Author: Johannes Surya

Definition of Wholesale – In the production goods supply industry, there is a term wholesale which also becomes a component in the product distribution process. In order for a product to reach consumers, there must be intervention from wholesale activities because it is also impossible for producers to go directly to consumers.

The existence of this wholesaler is very profitable, especially in areas far from the center of direct production. Even though sometimes the price offered has a slight difference with the price from the center or even the price from the center becomes cheaper, this is not a problem for consumers.

Take a look around you, there must be a lot of grocery stores right? Do you feel helped by the existence of these wholesale shops because you can get a need item quickly.

Does Readers know the difference between a wholesaler and a retailer? Because some people can’t tell the difference between the two. So, so that Readers understands this, let’s look at the following review!

Understanding Wholesale

Wholesale is the second or third distribution channel after distributors or sub-distributors.

According to Setyaningrum et al, wholesalers are business units whose activities buy or resell products to retailers, traders or industrial, institutional and commercial users.

Furthermore, according to Alma (2011), wholesale is all marketing activities that move goods from producers to retailers or to other marketing institutions.

Meanwhile, according to Griffin and Ronald (2007), wholesalers are independent entities that sell various types of consumer goods or business goods produced by various manufacturing companies.

Wholesale can also be referred to as a type of activity in the sale of goods or services to those who wish to resell them for business purposes.

Based on the definitions that have been described above, it can be concluded that wholesale is a marketing (technique) company that sells products in large quantities produced by various manufacturing companies and then resells them to retailers and other wholesalers.

Various Kinds of Wholesale

Although in general wholesale is part of the company’s marketing by selling products from manufacturing companies and then resale, it turns out that there are also three types of wholesale, you know, namely wholesale traders; brokers and agents; as well as branches and offices of manufacturers.

Well, here is the description.

Based on How It Works

1. Merchant Wholesaler

A wholesaler is a type of proprietary business that operates independently and takes title to the merchandise it handles. These wholesalers are also known as distributors, jobbers, or factory supply agencies.

These wholesale traders are usually the largest single group of wholesalers, and it is even estimated that 50 percent of the wholesale business is controlled by them.

Wholesale traders can be classified into two things, namely:

• Full Service Wholesaler, which provides storage services, has a sales force, sells on credit, delivers goods, and has management assistance.
• Limited-Service, which only offers some services to its suppliers and customers.

2. Wholesale Brokers and Agents (Brokers and Agents)

This type of wholesale is clearly different from wholesale traders. The most striking difference between the two is that in this type of wholesale they later take over the rights to the goods, then carry out only a small part of the sales functions.

Meanwhile, the similarity with wholesalers is that they usually specialize in a certain type of product or type of customer.

The main function of wholesale brokers and agents is to assist in the buying and selling process. For this, they will receive a commission from the sale price of the product.

These wholesale brokers and agents account for 11 percent of total wholesale sales volume.

This type of wholesale has special specialization on certain products and customers, namely:

a) Brokers (Brokers)

That is the type of intermediary that has the main function of bringing together sellers and buyers, as well as helping smooth the negotiation process. This broker or broker will later get a commission from the party who has hired his services.

b) Agent (Agent)

Namely intermediaries who represent sellers or buyers in the transaction process. In this case, it is usually more permanent than the broker. These agents have several types, namely:

• Manufacturer’s Agent, namely a type of intermediary agent who works for several producers and handles products that do not compete with each other in an area with a certain agreement.
• Selling Agent, which is a type of intermediary agent who is authorized to sell all products of a company. This authority usually includes responsibility for the entire marketing function of the manufacturer.
• Buying Agent, which is a type of intermediary agent who purchases, receives, controls, warehousing, and delivers goods for its customers.
• Commission Agent, which is a type of intermediary agent who handles goods that have been sent by producers to them, then sells them. After that, the sales proceeds (minus commissions and certain fees) will be handed over to the producers.
• Auction Companies, which are types of company agents that provide a place for sellers and buyers to meet and then make transactions. Not only that, they also provide physical facilities to display their products.

3. Branch Wholesalers and Manufacturer Sales Offices

Well, the next type of wholesale is branch wholesale and producer sales offices, which account for approximately 31 percent of the total wholesale business sales volume. Manufacturers generally open their own branches and sales offices to enhance inventory control and sales and promotion efforts.

In this type of wholesale, the sales branch has inventory and is usually found in the woodworking, equipment, and automotive parts industries.

Based on the Area of ​​Business

The distribution of wholesale based on the area of ​​business can be divided into three types, namely:

1.  Regional or Provincial Wholesaler ( The Regional Wholesaler )

That is the type of wholesaler that has a marketing area in a certain province or state only.

2. Local Wholesaler (The Local Wholesaler)

The next type of wholesaler is a local wholesaler which has an area in a certain city only, usually the regional levels are municipality, regency and residency.

3. National Wholesaler ( The National Wholesaler )

This type of wholesale has a marketing area for all regions within a country.

Based on Field of Activity

When viewed based on the field of activity, wholesalers have eight types, namely:

1.  Full Wholesale ( The Service Wholesaler )

A type of wholesaler whose business activities are purely in the form of buying and selling activities, such as wholesalers in general.

2. Wholesale Collector ( The Whole Collector )

This type of wholesale operates by collecting certain goods, either for its own needs or to fulfill orders from other parties (usually customers).

3. Limited Wholesaler ( The Limited Function Wholesaler )

This type of wholesale can only be done for some services. Limited because they only do “part” of the full wholesale party.

4. Truck Wholesaler ( Truck Wholesaler )

This type of wholesaler will carry out sales of merchandise, in the form of providing a service for the delivery of goods using truck transportation.

5. Wholesale Cash ( Cash Carry Wholesaler )

This type of wholesale is in the form of selling merchandise in cash and does not provide goods delivery services to the buyer.

6. Wholesale Shipping ( Drop Shipment Wholesaler )

This type of wholesale is usually in the form of sales activities and delivery of goods from producers directly to buyers.

7. Wholesale Order by Post ( Mail Order Wholesaler )

This type of wholesaler will carry out sales of merchandise by ordering via post.

8. Factory Wholesaler ( Manufacture Wholesaler )

This type of wholesaler will later carry out activities of selling merchandise as well as acting as a supplier, especially for industrial needs.

Based on the Type of Goods Traded

When viewed based on the type of goods to be traded, namely:

1. The Specialist Wholesaler

This type of wholesale is usually only specialized in selling certain items. For example, a grocery wholesaler that only sells basic needs such as cooking oil, rice, sugar, and others.

2. General Goods Wholesaler (General Line Wholesaler)

Namely the type of wholesaler or distributor who sells various types of goods.

Wholesale function

The existence of wholesalers and their traders certainly has various functions for the continuity of product sales until they reach the hands of consumers. Therefore, wholesalers and wholesalers have the following functions.

1. Sales and Promotion ( Selling and Promoting )

In this function, wholesalers’ sales force will help manufacturers to reach more consumers, especially those with small businesses, at a relatively low cost.

Wholesalers usually have good relationships with buyers, so these buyers also tend to trust wholesalers over distant manufacturers.

2. Purchase and Supply of Various Products ( Buying and Assortment Building )

In this case, wholesalers are usually better able to choose and determine what product items are needed by consumers as their buyers. This capability is certainly very helpful for the customer.

3. Breaking up large quantities ( Bulk Breaking )

Wholesalers usually buy products from central producers in bulk, then sort or “break down” them into smaller units. This is done so that they can provide savings for their buyers.

4. Warehousing ( Warehousing )

Wholesalers will usually store inventory in a warehouse, thereby reducing inventory costs and risks for both suppliers and customers.

5. Transportation ( Transportation )

Wholesalers are usually able to distribute goods more quickly than the central producer, because generally these wholesalers tend to have a close relationship with customers.

6. Financing _

Wholesalers can also help finance consumers as customers and supply prices by credit, with the condition that they must pay on time.

7. Risk Bearer ( Risk Bearing )

Wholesalers can also bear the risks that occur in their goods, such as theft, damage to goods, expiration, and other losses related to the ownership of goods.

8. Market Information

Wholesalers can provide information to their suppliers as well as their customers regarding the activities of new product competitors. This information is of course very useful.

9. Management and Consulting Services ( Management Service and Counseling )

Wholesalers can help retailers with management, from training salespeople to layout and store displays. The governance process can create accounting and inventory control systems.

Advantages of Wholesale Shopping

This wholesale system has been widely practiced by the community, both as buyers and traders. This also provides direct benefits to the producing companies. Well, here is a description of the advantages of shopping for goods wholesale.

1. Free to Choose Items

When shopping at a wholesale center, we can have the opportunity to choose good quality goods for ourselves.

2. No Need to Shop Often

In contrast to buying goods in retail which tends to shop continuously when the goods are used up. Through this wholesaler, we can buy in large quantities and use it more economically.

3. More Controllable Shopping Activities

When shopping for wholesale, we will definitely focus more on picking up and buying the things that are really needed.

4. Save Operational Costs

Buying goods wholesale can actually save operational costs, you know. When shopping wholesale, we will automatically get a price difference that is quite cheap compared to buying retail.

5. Stock Availability

When making wholesale purchases, the stock of goods at the wholesale store will continue to be available. This is because grocery stores will usually continue to supply goods that run out to be replenished.

Difference between Wholesale and Retail

Aspect	Wholesaler	Retail
Definition	Sales of goods in large quantities but at a lower price	Sales of goods to consumers in limited quantities, but the price tends to be more expensive than the original price
Cost	Cheaper	More expensive
Business Size	Large, usually in the form of a store building with a large size	Small, usually in the form of a simple shop
Capital	Higher, because they have to deal directly with the central producer	It’s cheaper, because it can usually be obtained from the local wholesale center
Sales Reach	Can be reached in all provinces, cities, to different districts	Has limited coverage space, only in villages or between villages
The Art of Selling	Not needed	Needed
Promotion	It’s not needed, because wholesale places tend to be crowded with consumers	Needed, especially in the village
Product Display	It doesn’t matter how the product looks, because consumers are only concerned with product quality	Necessary to attract customers

Well, that’s an explanation of the meaning of wholesale and the difference between it and retail. If you want to buy goods in large quantities at a more affordable price, you can do this at the wholesale center. However, if you only buy a limited number of items, you can do this at a shop that uses a retail system.

The definition of green marketing – The more you come here, the more real the impact of environmental problems seems, right? Global warming, destruction of coral reefs, air and water pollution, deforestation of tropical forests, and bad waste management are starting to affect our lives.

In the past, there were still many people who did not really think about environmental issues. Over time, slowly but surely, more and more people are starting to take this seriously. In fact, make this a consideration in making decisions, including buying or consuming products.

Not a few who prefer products that are environmentally friendly. Because of this, now many companies are implementing environmental-based marketing strategies or commonly known as Green Marketing .

So, what exactly is Green Marketing ? How is the concept? What are the benefits that companies and consumers get from green marketing? In this article, we will cover all of them in depth. Listen to the end, OK!

Definition of Green Marketing

Green Marketing , according to The American Marketing Association (AMA) is product marketing with more emphasis on environmental safety. It includes all company activities, from product modification, production process, packaging, and advertising.

So you could say that the company takes advantage of various environmental preservation issues to devise ways to promote its products. This is done to respond to consumer expectations in preventing environmental damage. As explained by Ari Setiyaningrum, Jusuf Udaya and Efendi in the book Principles of Marketing .

In addition, every company that implements green marketing usually chooses product marketing that is safe for the environment, designs product development so as not to have a negative impact on the environment, and produces, promotes, packages and claims products in a way that is more sensitive to environmental issues.

Green Marketing Goals

Basically, the company’s goal of implementing green marketing is to gain added value, increase competitiveness, and produce products that are more eco-friendly .

Given that people’s awareness of environmental issues is increasing, if a company cannot meet consumer expectations, it will most likely find it difficult to survive.

As proof, many companies are increasingly aggressively adopting green marketing activities into their projects, producing products that are more environmentally friendly, and reaching consumers with messages and ways that are environmentally friendly.

In short, green marketing is chosen to meet the needs and affect the emotional feelings of consumers by reducing the impact of environmental damage.

Green Marketing Components

Green marketing has three main components, namely eco label , eco brand , and environmental advertisement . All three are green branding tools that can increase awareness of the features and aspects of products that are environmentally friendly.

By implementing these three green marketing components , companies can “seduce” consumers to buy products that are environmentally friendly and help reduce the negative impact of the production process on the environment.

Furthermore, Boztepe (2012) explains that green marketing also has factors that are usually taken into consideration by consumers when choosing environmentally friendly products, namely environmental awareness , green product features , green prices, and green promotion .

In other words, if the company wants to be known as a company that pays attention to environmental preservation, then these four factors must really be considered.

Environmental Awareness

Environmental awareness is the company’s awareness of the condition of the surrounding environment and the importance of protecting the environment. With this, companies can introduce environmental problems and convince consumers that the products they get do not harm the environment and human health.

Green Product Features

This is a product feature that supports environmental care. At the very least, an environmentally friendly product must fulfill several things, namely:

• Can be reused or recycled
• The packaging can be accounted for
• Does not contain hazardous materials
• Wear green labels
• Organic and certified

Green Product Price

Price is a very important marketing element in influencing consumers and showing product quality. Many consumers are willing to pay for products that are expensive as long as the product has more value for them.

For example, they are willing to buy food whose ingredients are proven organic and do not harm health or the environment even though the price is relatively expensive. For them, the money spent is proportional to the benefits they get.

Green Product Promotion & Advertising

The last is the company’s efforts to introduce products to consumers by utilizing environmental advertisements in various media. That way, companies can invite consumers to buy environmentally friendly products and make them aware of the positive impact of purchasing these products on themselves and the environment.

In order for an environmental advertisement to run smoothly, the company must include the following three elements:

• Company statement on environmental concern
• Shows that the company cares about and is dedicated to improving the environment
• Demonstrate actions or actions of companies that care about the environment and show the results.

You can learn more about green promotion in the book Strategic Marketing: Sustaining Lifetime Customer Value written by Sofjan Assauri. This book comprehensively describes the concept of customer satisfaction that makes strategic marketing, both strategic, segmentation, positioning, preparation, and implementation.

 

Components of Green Marketing Outside the Company

In addition to the four components above which are all carried out by the company, green marketing is also influenced by components carried out by parties outside the company, namely:

Paying Customers

Paying customer is a group of consumers who are committed to buying environmentally friendly products. These consumers have their own level of “greenness” and product needs.

Providers

Providers are suppliers of raw materials, energy, and office equipment using environmentally friendly methods. For example, a wood supplier who obtains his wood legally and pays attention to the sustainability of the forest.

Politicians

Politicians refer to government regulations regarding the environment that will affect companies in implementing green marketing . Companies can also play an active role in encouraging the government to draft regulations if necessary.

Pressure Groups

Pressure groups are parties that pressure companies to implement environmentally friendly production systems. For example, such as government, consumer agencies, or trade organization legal institutions.

Problems

The problems here are environmental and social issues related to the company.

Predictions

This is a prediction of the problems that will be faced by the company in the future.

partners

Partners or partners are third parties associated with companies involved in environmental and social issues.

Benefits of Green Marketing

The concept of green marketing is actually an alternative for companies to carry out marketing using limited resources effectively and efficiently. This is done in order to meet the needs and desires of consumers who are increasingly concerned about environmental issues.

Especially now that many people are increasingly concerned about the environment. Starting from academics, consumers, practitioners, public regulators, to the wider community. By implementing green marketing, companies will also get other benefits, namely:

• Get environmentally friendly products
• Manufacturers and advertisers alike develop products to meet consumer desires
• Become more innovative in input, output, and marketing strategy.

Green Marketing Constraints

In the process of implementing green marketing, companies may encounter several problems or obstacles. For example like:

1. Choosing Inappropriate Green Marketing Activities

There is a possibility that the green marketing activities chosen by the company are inappropriate. Especially if the activity misleads consumers and industry, and violates applicable rules or laws.

2. Perception error

When a company modifies a product to meet consumer demand, the product may not be of better quality than the previous product. This is most likely due to a misperception by the company. Therefore, companies must have good knowledge in order to take the right steps.

3. Unsupportive Regulations

Companies must ensure that regulations made by the government can support green marketing activities that will be carried out. In addition, regulations must be able to provide opportunities for consumers to make better decisions and motivate them to be environmentally responsible.

Why Should You Implement Green Marketing?

In Canada, India, Australia and several other countries, green marketing is a major requirement that must be met. In India, for example, 25% of people believe that green marketing is very important for protecting the environment in the future.

Beyond that, green marketing can also make companies have a harmonious relationship with nature. That way, companies can use it as a foundation in various activities. For example, making buildings that are environmentally friendly.

It doesn’t stop there, green marketing can also provide other benefits such as:

1. Producing a Longer Lasting Product

Products processed with green marketing principles are usually more durable than other products. The reason is because the production process uses environmentally friendly materials and the resulting product can be recycled again.

This is what differentiates green marketing products from other products that usually can only be used once.

Based on a survey of 30 thousand people conducted by the Nielsen Global Survey, 55% of them are willing to spend more money to get green marketing products.

2. Save Expenditure Costs

In carrying out green marketing, companies must ensure that all production processes are carried out in an environmentally friendly way, including using energy.

Well, the use of environmentally friendly energy can actually save the company’s expenses in the long term.

3. Changing Thinking Regarding the Environment

Consumers are not the only party invited to care about environmental sustainability. The concept of green marketing must be able to encourage every company to use natural resources wisely, such as the use of water and electricity.

In addition, this concept can indirectly change the way companies and consumers think about the environment. For example developing ways to deliver products that are more fuel efficient, utilizing alternative energy sources, or looking for renewable staples.

Green Marketing marketing strategy

Consumers in Indonesia actually have concern for environmental issues, unfortunately they do not know what steps must be taken to produce ” green ” activities. Moreover, they are also not the party that makes “ green ” goods or services.

This can be used by companies to implement green marketing marketing strategies . That way, companies can change the behavior and lifestyle of consumers.

As in the book Marketing Management Basic Concepts of Strategy compiled by Sofjan Assauri. This book teaches you about providing insight and knowledge about marketing management: an outline and systematic understanding of the basics of knowledge and its problems, and its application in managing the marketing field within a company.

The steps that can be taken by companies in implementing green marketing marketing strategies are as follows:

1. Segmenting

Segmenting is market grouping by creating market segment profiles. Kottler (2009) defines a market segment as a group of customers who have the same desires. Companies can take advantage of SWOT analysis to create a conceptual framework and look for opportunities that exist in each segment.

2. Targeting

Targeting here means determining the market segment to be served by the company. In this stage, the company must be able to define the buying interest and purchasing power of consumers who claim to be ” green consumers “.

Fortunately, most consumers who are looking for green marketing products are usually educated, so they are worthy of being a target market. To achieve this, companies can take advantage of various facilities, including the internet.

3. Positioning

Positioning is an attempt to design a company’s offer and image so that it has distinctive characteristics compared to other competitors in the minds of consumers. Here the company must look for what offers can create the image of an “environmentally friendly company” to consumers.

One way is to conduct education, because this can shape the company’s image (Polonsky, 2009). For example by holding a program to introduce environmental problems to consumers and show the company’s efforts to overcome them. This can be done by introducing environmentally friendly products or work culture.

4. Products

To implement green marketing , companies must make consumers aware that the products they use are environmentally friendly products. This can be done by:

• Adding eco labels to products
• Include the message ” less environmentally harmfull ” to give the impression the company is trying to minimize environmental damage.
• Use the green color which represents the environmental care movement

5. Price

When compared, the price of green marketing products is indeed more expensive than other products. However, the company also incurs less production costs in the long run.

Companies also usually target the upper middle class market who already have knowledge of environmental issues so that companies will find it easier to convey their environmentally friendly messages.

In addition, by targeting the upper middle market, the company can create opinion leaders who will influence the market segments below.

6. Promotion

In implementing green marketing , companies can use 4 ways of promotion, namely:

Sales Promotions

Sales promotion is a way for companies to introduce green products to the public by providing samples of their products.

Publicity

Publicity is the method most often used by companies when marketing green products. This method usually shows the implementation of CSR carried out by companies to the public while offering the products they have.

Advertising

Companies use online marketing advertising strategies to promote green products. 

Distribution

Companies can use two ways to distribute green products. First with direct marketing channels via online marketing . The second is with a 1-level channel for consumer goods companies .

Examples of Green Marketing in Indonesia

Green marketing is nothing new in Indonesia, although numerically not many companies have implemented it. According to data from the Ministry of Industry , there are 69 companies on the list of green industries. Some of them are Unilever, PT. Sinar Sosro, and PT. Holcim Indonesia.

On a smaller scale, S. Sorong., J. Lapian & D. Soepono (2022) found that green marketing is a determining factor for high/low consumer purchasing decisions for products resulting from Unsrat’s micro, small and medium enterprises.

In other words, green marketing is very influential in changing consumer purchasing decisions. The higher/better green marketing perceived by consumers, the purchasing decision will increase. Vice versa, if green marketing perceived by consumers is getting lower/worse, purchasing decisions will be lower.

In addition, research conducted by Hindayani & Setyorini (2020) also found that eco labels, eco brands , and environmental advertisements used on Love Beauty and Planet products in Bandung have a partial and simultaneous effect on consumer purchasing decisions. This means, consumers have awareness about the importance of using environmentally friendly products.

Closing

Basically, with this green marketing , indirectly, natural conditions will be better maintained. Therefore, not a few companies are currently implementing green marketing. What we can see from marketing green marketing in general is the packaging and also the process of making a product where companies claim that the packaging and process of making their products are environmentally friendly.

Thus the discussion of green marketing to examples. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful for Readers.

 

The term theory has been used in many different contexts, but its most common meaning is that of an explanation of observed regularities. For example, why do more TB sufferers come from the working class compared to the upper middle class, or why is the job classification based on technology? However, such theories tend not to be the subject of study within social theory, which usually focuses on theories with a higher level of abstraction. What we know here is a distinction between theory which is often called middle range theory and also grand theory, which operates at a more general and abstract level.

In this article, we will discuss more about the grand theory and how to determine the grand theory in a scientific work or thesis.

The definition of grand theory itself is usually used as a means to find the main theoretical foundation that is used as a basis for determining the concept of the research carried out. Grand theory, middle theory, and also applied theory are a single entity that is used as the basis for the preparation of scientific papers by experts. Examples of grand theory as well as middle theory in thesis or research proposal can be seen in the second chapter regarding the theoretical basis.

The theoretical basis is the part that discusses the research that has been done, the creation of a variable and also the framework and understanding of each variable used. How to find a grand theory in research should be done after preparing the hypothesis. Determining the thesis title will have an impact on the research object used, including the search for primary variables and also secondary variables during the testing process using the SPSS application.

Definition of Grand Theory

Grand theory is a theory that explains the whole of social life, history, or human experience. Where this grand theory is abstract because it is composed of the main concepts used to understand the social world. The term grand theory was first coined by a social scientist named Charles Wright Mills in 1959. Grand theory emphasizes the concept of balance, systems, decision-making, and also forms of communication as a basic tool for studying international relations.

So, in simple terms this grand theory is a main theory that is used to explain a phenomenon as a whole. This theory is abstract and far from operational. Therefore, a middle range theory is still needed so that it is more real and can be used to build a model.

What is Grand Theory in Research?

The grand theory in research is the main concept used by researchers to allocate information about the hypotheses they use. The purpose of this grand theory is to support research that is based on research gap results and also a certain scientific framework. What is grand theory, middle theory, and also applied theory can be applied in the fields of education, law, economics, and nursing. Research gap is a collection of previous research results compiled by researchers to determine the title of the research proposal and also the thesis written.

Grand theory is used as the basis of the hypothesis used. The hypothesis is a temporary estimate of the dependent variable and also the independent variable. The scientific framework of thinking is the positive and negative relationships regarding the dependent variable that are used to create independent variables in research.

Questions and Features of the Grand Theory

Questions regarding the grand theory of qualitative and quantitative research must be made to ensure that the research is in line with previous information. The foundation of this theory contains research gaps, formulation of hypotheses as well as scientific frameworks and operational definitions of certain variables.

The characteristics of grand theory, middle theory, and also applied theory are related to information in the preparation of scientific papers. The main theory or grand theory is a concept that links the social world in society with events according to the plot recorded in the researchers’ writings. Questions and also the characteristics of the grand theory must be based on the results of previous research. The purpose of the theoretical basis is to present theoretical problem information in relation to previous research that has been carried out based on certain knowledge.

How to Determine the Grand Theory in Thesis and Research Proposals

How to determine the grand theory in the thesis as well as research proposals can be found through the theoretical basis material. The purpose of this theoretical basis is to improve the quality of research results because researchers have received support from previous results with the same object. How to find this grand theory can be based on research journals and research methodology books that are delivered to students.

The definition of grand theory according to experts is a main concept that connects written works with the social world in society to explain the relationship. How to compile grand theory, middle theory, and also applied theory based on certain information obtained by researchers. The process of assessing research problems must be based on a theory that is appropriate to the variables in order to obtain research results that are in line with testing certain hypotheses.

What is Middle Range Theory?

Middle range theory is a theory that is used to connect the gap between the limited hypotheses of empiricism studies and abstract grand theories. Some say that this middle range theory is a theory that we cannot yet believe in the truth, but it is needed for the development of the existing hypotheses in the research until a systematic effort is needed to develop a combined theory that will explain all similar research.

This theory is used as the development of a hypothesis that must be tested, not as a research regulatory tool. Generally will produce a research model. This middle range theory is agreed upon as a field that is relatively broader than a phenomenon, but does not discuss the whole phenomenon, and pays great attention to discipline in building it.

Use of Grand Theory and Middle Range Theory

These grand theories offer some indications to researchers as to how they can guide or influence the gathering of empirical evidence. So if someone wants to test a theory or to draw conclusions that can be tested the level of abstractness tends to be greater. Researchers will find it difficult to make clear connections between theory and the real world.

There must be a paradox here. Even very abstract notions such as Parsons’ notions of pattern variables and functional conditions must have a relationship with external reality. Where the idea might have resulted from Parsons’ reading of his research or thoughts about that reality or the writings of others before. However, the abstract level of the theory is so large that it is difficult for them to be used in research.

For research purposes, this grand theory is used in a limited way in social research. Vice versa, this middle range theory is more reliable in seeing a phenomenon. Generally, it is not the grand theories that guide social research, but rather the middle range theories that are more likely to be the focus of empirical inquiry. However, that does not mean that grand theory is not important or not needed. Middle range theory is unlike grand theories, which operate in a limited domain.

The theory differs slightly in the range of applications. Where the middle range theory is between the grand theory and also empirical findings. The theory represents an attempt to understand and also explain empirical aspects that are limited and impossible to explain by a grand theory. Even the distinction between grand theory and middle range theory does not completely clarify the problem of the deceptively simple question of what is a theory? This is because the term theory is often used in a somewhat broader way than the existing background literature in the field of social research.

Social scientists are sometimes prone to being somewhat dismissive of research that has no clear link between grand theory and middle range theory. This kind of research is often considered as active empiricism. It would be very difficult to say that it was inaccurate, to label as naïve empiricism, many studies in which the publication strategy as theory was used simply because the authors had not been preoccupied with theory.

Such research is directed and conditioned by research questions that arise from an analysis of the literature. Data collection as well as subsequent analysis will be directed to explain or find solutions to research problems or problems that have been identified at the outset. Literature acts as a proxy for theory. In many cases, theory is latent or implicit in the literature.

Indeed, research that appears to have the characteristics of a fact-finding exercise should not be prematurely dismissed as naïve empiricism. McKeganey and Barnard’s (1996) research on prostitutes and their clients is an example. Even if one takes away the fear of HIV infection, the research too can be construed as naïve empiricism and perhaps of a rather prurient kind. However, this would be a rigorous assessment and may also be inaccurate.

However, asking this question may invite consideration of other questions. For example, regarding the extent to which research is related to theory, what is the role of the theory? Until recently, there were many who spoke as if theory was something that guided and influenced the collection and analysis of data. In other words, the research was conducted to answer the search points raised by theoretical considerations.

However, an alternative position is to view theory as something that happens after the collection and also analysis of some or all of the data related to a project. We begin by looking at the significance of the second fact or in considering the relationship between theory and research. Are we referring to inductive or deductive theory?

Definition of Good Governance – Since the reform era until now, the duties and responsibilities of the government have increased along with the demands from the public for fast, easy, inexpensive and good services. But to make it happen, cooperation between the government, the private sector, and the community is needed.

Therefore, the government is committed to implementing good governance or good governance to overcome various kinds of problems that exist in Indonesia. Good governance is expected to help integrate the roles of the government, government sector and society so that the implementation can be more effective, efficient and accountable.

So what exactly is meant by good governance? Why does it need to be implemented in Indonesia? and How has it been implemented so far? Find the answer below, yes!

Definition of Good Governance

Good governance is basically a concept of government that builds and implements the principles of professionalism, democracy, transparency, efficiency, accountability, effectiveness, excellent service, and can be accepted by all people (Anggara, 2012).

Meanwhile, the World Bank defines good governance as solid, accountable government management, based on efficient market principles, capable of preventing corruption both politically and administratively.

Good governance can also be interpreted as a value that upholds the will of the people and is able to increase the ability of the people to achieve social justice, the goal of independence, and sustainable development.

In other words, good governance can be considered as a government that is professional, effective, efficient, puts the interests of the people first, and is committed to providing the best service and is free from corrupt practices.

You can learn other good governance concepts with interesting analogies from DR. Gradios Nyoman Tio Rae, SH, MH in his book entitled Good Governance and Corruption Eradication.

The concept of good governance that sounds utopian is actually not impossible to realize. However, in practice it requires good cooperation between the three main actors, namely the government, the private sector, and civil society.

Principles of Good Governance

To assess the success of the concept of good governance, we must know the principles behind it. That way, we can use it to measure the government’s performance in managing the government so far. Handayani (2019) explains that the principles of good governance consist of:

Society participation

This is community involvement in decision-making, either directly or through legitimate institutional representation. By paying attention to the voice of the people when making decisions, the government can make policies that are more lively and originate from the locality of its citizens.

Law Supremacy

Law has a very important role in upholding justice and truth, therefore every law made by the government or DPR must be fair, impartial, and also consistent. Good governance is required to apply the law indiscriminately, regardless of position, kinship, or material.

Transparency

Transparency in good governance can be interpreted as easy access to information about government administration activities for the community. This means that all members of the public can get the latest information that is correct and can be justified easily.

Stakeholders

Stakeholders in good governance can be decision makers or program implementers. Therefore, stakeholders are required to go hand in hand with the interests developed by the government and society.

Consensus Oriented

Basically, state, community and government activities are political activities in which there are two main things, namely consensus and conflict. Thus, when making decisions or solving problems, the government must prioritize consensus and then commit to implementing this consensus consistently.

For the Indonesian people themselves, consensus is actually not a new thing, because our nation has always relied on deliberation to reach a consensus when solving a problem.

equality

All citizens must have the same opportunity to achieve their welfare and equal position before the law. This principle of equality plays an important role in triggering the impact of justice and stable economic development because all people have the same rights and opportunities to develop themselves without worrying about being intervened by anyone.

Effectiveness and Efficiency

To carry out programs and policies, the government must adhere to the principles of effectiveness and efficiency. This means that the government must ensure that each program runs according to the provisions that have been made by using the budget according to needs.

Accountability

All activities related to the public interest must be accountable to the public. In good governance, responsibility and accountability are given to superiors and also the wider community.

As for this accountability, when viewed theoretically, it can be divided into five types, namely:

1. Organizational accountability
2. Legal accountability
3. Political accountability
4. Professional accountability
5. Moral accountability

Strategic Vision

Strategic vision is an attempt to maintain the existence of the state. You do this by designing activities or programs that can help achieve the goals of the country.

This vision can be in the form of a long-term vision or long-term vision which can last up to 25 years. Or it could be a short term vision or short term vision which is only about 5 years.

As explained by Abd. Rohman, S. Sos., MAP and Dr. Willy Tri Hardianto, S.Sos., MM, MAP in the book Bureaucratic Reform and Good Governance. Through this book, the author invites us to re-examine the aspirations of the state in reforming the Indonesian bureaucracy as contained in various existing regulations, to evaluate and seek to revive the spirit of reform for the realization of accountability, equity and quality of public services.

Elements of Good Governance

A good government, according to Anggara (2012) must have four main elements, namely accountability, transparency, openness, and the rule of law .

Accountability

Accountability means that the government must be responsible for all actions and policies set.

Transparency

The government, starting from the central to the regional level, must be transparent to its people.

Openness

The government must provide an opportunity for all people to express their responses and criticisms of the government.

The rule of law ( rule of law )

Good governance is part of a democratic life. Well, one of the conditions is law enforcement that is just, firm and indiscriminate. Without this, a democratic life is only a dream that is difficult to realize.

Without strict law enforcement, people can do anything to achieve their own goals. Including doing actions that violate the rules. Thus, good government must have a sound legal system.

History of Good Governance in Indonesia

The concept of good governance in Indonesia began to emerge after the reform era began, which was motivated by problems left by the New Order government. Such as a government centered on the president, high state institutions that are not running well, and a lack of public participation in government.

During the reform era, the executive and legislative bodies succeeded in formulating 3 laws which later changed the system of government in Indonesia. These laws are:

Law Number 32 of 2004 concerning granting greater authority to regional governments, both districts and cities, to manage governance and development. This law plays an important role in changing development policies and plans in the regions so that they are more in line with the conditions and circumstances of the people.

Law Number 28 of 2004 concerning granting greater authority to regional governments to manage and allocate funds in carrying out development.

Law Number 28 of 1999 concerning implementation in the field of development and implementation of government at the central and regional levels. Law Number 28 of 1999 is what then becomes the initial basis for implementing good governance as the basis for administering government.

Well, the three laws above are the main foundation for implementing the concept of good governance in administering government in Indonesia. Unfortunately, the Indonesian government seems unable to understand good governance as a whole, so that this concept cannot be implemented properly. However, the government’s commitment to making good governance the foundation of governance values ​​must still be appreciated.

If Readers wants to know about the history of good governance at the global level, the book Good Governance 3 Revisions compiled by Prof. Dr. Hj Sedarmayanti can be his main reference.

The goal of Good Governance

Basically, every government of any country would want to have a good governance system to ensure that the country remains safe and peaceful. The Indonesian government regulates the application of the concept of good governance through Permenpan Number: PER/15/M.PAN/7/2008 concerning General Guidelines for Bureaucratic Reform of the State Minister for Administrative Reform. In the Permenpan, it is explained about the purpose of good governance, namely:

Creating a Clean Bureaucracy

The first objective is to create a clean bureaucracy, meaning that it is free from corruption, collusion and nepotism.

Creating an Effective, Efficient and Productive Bureaucracy

The second goal is to create an effective, efficient and productive bureaucracy so that people can benefit from it. An example is the administration process which is more practical, free from illegal levies, and is not complicated.

Creating a Transparent Bureaucracy

The third goal of good governance is to create a transparent bureaucracy while protecting confidential information.

Building a Bureaucracy that Serves the Community

The government is committed to serving all the needs of society as well as possible. Like providing easy access for all people and so on. That way, public services can be done with prime and fast.

Creating an Accountable Bureaucracy

The last is to create a bureaucracy that is accountable or responsible for all actions taken. This means that the government will work hard to implement every policy or program. If something goes wrong then, the government will not look for scapegoats.

How is the Implementation of Good Governance in Indonesia?

As previously discussed, realizing the concept of good governance requires good cooperation between the government, the private sector, and civil society. That way, every policy and program that is made is always based on joint decisions.

In this case, the government plays the role of administrator of the state, while the private sector becomes the driving force in the economic sector, and civil society acts as the adjusting party.

These three parties have their respective roles in the administration of good governance. Therefore, the harmonization of the three will be a great strength. In other words, the government, private sector, and civil society must work together in managing the economy, natural resources, environment, and also the social sector.

Examples of Good Governance in Indonesia

• In order to realize good governance in Indonesia, the government has made many innovations and breakthroughs, since the reform era began until today. Here are some examples of good governance that we can still see.
• The term of office has been changed from what was previously up to a lifetime, now it is limited to 5 years with a maximum of 2 terms. This means that after being elected President twice, he cannot run for a third term.
• General elections for the legislature and executive involve the people from the campaign period to voting at TPS. This is different from the past where the election was represented by members of the DPR.
• Changing the Civil Servant acceptance system to be open with the CPNS Test. This test can be taken by all Indonesian citizens who meet the requirements. In the past, civil servants were very thick with nepotism so that if one family member became a civil servant, other family members could also become civil servants.
• APBN is made transparent to prevent corruption in APBN funds. In this way, the public and all parties can monitor and audit the use of the state budget by the government.

Establish the Corruption Eradication Commission (KPK) whose task is to eradicate corruption in the executive and legislative branches, both central and regional. The Corruption Eradication Committee (KPK) is a line of defense as well as a state attack in fighting corruption in this country.

Problems of Good Governance in Indonesia

The government’s efforts to realize good governance like the examples above deserve praise and appreciation, but that doesn’t mean that the government in Indonesia is free from problems.

This is because if you look at the reality on the ground, the application of the concept of good governance in this country is still not optimal. How did it happen? To answer this, we need to go back to the reformation era.

At the time reforms broke out in Indonesia, the economic crisis ravaged the country. The reason is none other than bad governance during the New Order era and the rampant practices of KKN (Corruption, Collusion, Nepotism) in almost all elements of government.

As a result, the quality of public services is not given proper attention. Even society seems to be underestimated. Government administrators are more concerned with filling their own stomachs and fulfilling personal interests.

This has resulted in delays in the development process, an increase in the crime rate, an increase in the number of unemployed and poor people, a decline in the level of public health, a worsening of the quality of education, triggering conflicts in various regions.

Now, twenty-four years have passed, these problems have not completely disappeared in this country. Even though the government has made good governance the foundation of governance. Unfortunately, good governance in Indonesia still has several problems, including:

1. The bureaucratic reform planned and carried out by the government has not been able to meet the demands of the people’s needs
2. There are still many problems found in the process of seeking a final decision or settling various existing cases in Indonesia.
3. There are still practices of abuse and violation of authority, the rates of Corruption, Collusion and Nepotism are still high, and the procurement controls are still weak as well as controlling the work of government apparatus.
4. The public is increasingly enthusiastic about taking part in the formulation and implementation of public policies. In addition, people’s demands on the government are getting higher.
5. Society is increasingly demanding the government to implement the principles of good governance so that government governance can improve.
6. The institutional system and governance in the regions are still inadequate, triggering the low performance of government apparatus resources in the regions.

One of the main problems in implementing good governance in Indonesia is the lack of transparency, even though transparency itself is a basic requirement of good governance . So, no matter how much effort the government makes in realizing good governance, it will be difficult for the public to know and evaluate.

As discussed by Roby Arya Brata in his book entitled Analysis of Good Governance and Strategic Governance Problems . This book also discusses strategic and controversial governance issues that often attract public attention, but policy solutions to create strong, effective and integrated governance.

Thus the discussion on good governance , starting from its meaning to its purpose. Hopefully this article will provide inspiration and be useful for Readers.

Definition of Globalization – People say the world is now narrow. Where do you want to go in minutes? With anyone we can squeeze each other. News abroad there, in the country was a hit. Even viruses that are far from the country of the Bamboo Curtain can reach remote villages in Indonesia. All of that is the impact of globalization.

Connect with anyone without using it for a long time because the internet is our mainstay. What do you want to see, just click. If you want Japanese food, you don’t need to fly to Japan. If you want Korean artist clothes, you don’t have to bother.

Many things easily go viral because they spread easily. Many people are suddenly famous because their actions are watched by many people. All because of globalization. What is globalization? how did globalization happen? what is the impact of globalization? can we take advantage of globalization? What are some examples of globalization?

Definition of Globalization

Globalization is a process of international integration that occurs because of the exchange of world views, products, ideas, and other aspects of culture. Advances in transportation and telecommunication infrastructure, including the emergence of the telegraph and the Internet, are major factors in globalization which are increasingly encouraging the interdependence of economic and cultural activities.

Many argue that globalization began in the modern era, some other experts have even succeeded in tracing the history of globalization to before the time of European discovery and voyages to the New World. There are also experts who note that globalization may have begun to appear in the third millennium BC.

In the late 19th and early 20th centuries, the world’s economic and cultural interconnectedness took place at a rapid pace. The term globalization has been echoed more frequently since the mid-1980s and more frequently since the mid-1990s.

In 2000, the International Monetary Fund (IMF) Grouped the four basic aspects of globalization: trade and transactions, movements of capital and investment, migration and movement of people, and the liberation of knowledge.

In addition, environmental challenges such as climate change, trans-border water and air pollution, and over-fishing from the oceans are also related to globalization. The process of globalization ultimately affects and is affected by business and work procedures, the economy, socio-cultural resources, and the natural environment.

In Indonesia itself, we can see perspectives that can spark openness and clarity of discourse regarding the direction of economic development due to globalization, which Readers can read in the books Globalization, Constitutional Economics, and Economic Novels.

Basically, the notion of globalization does not yet have a precise definition, except for a working definition, so it depends on which side one sees it. Globalization is seen as a social process, or a historical process, or a natural process that will bring all nations and countries in the world increasingly bound to one another, creating a new order of life or co-existence by removing geographical, economic and social boundaries. .

Globalization is synonymous with the term global village or global village, in which the boundaries of the country’s territories seem to be fading or even disappearing, aka becoming borderless due to advances in communication and transportation technology. Why do national borders seem to fade and even disappear? National boundaries are called faded because everyone can visit any country very easily because of the help of modern means of transportation.

In addition, communication between people from different countries can be easily carried out with the help of communication tools and the internet network. National boundaries are called faded because now if we need an item we can even find trade goods from abroad very easily. In the twinkling of an eye, with finger exercises, any item can be ordered.

Technological developments are one of the factors why globalization can be considered positive. The development of science, which then gave rise to innovations in the field of technology, has many benefits. Such as messaging technology.

In the past, we had to painstakingly come to the post office to send news. It took several days to deliver messages via postage stamps. If you want to go a little faster, you can use the telegram, but via the telegram, only a few messages are conveyed.

Not to mention that the post office is far from the house. It takes effort to get there. But the excitement is certainly irreplaceable. In the run-up to Hari Raya, the post office would be flooded with orders for Eid cards. We can send Eid cards to distant family or colleagues. Even we will be happy to hear the voice of the postman who delivers Eid cards for us.

Currently, by only using technology such as smartphones with internet connections, it is very easy for us to send messages in seconds, even face-to-face. If it’s a holiday, say goodbye, copy and paste people’s posts if you distribute them. In just seconds our message has been received.

Similar to transportation, technological developments encourage people to make innovations such as online motorcycle taxis. Now the people of Indonesia, especially in big cities with a high level of mobility, will be greatly helped by this online motorcycle taxi service application.

Because of this globalization, various things become instantaneous and it becomes easier for us to fulfill our needs, as well as various sciences that have developed with globalization which are discussed in the book Globalization is a Myth by Paul Hirst.

Definition of Globalization According to Experts

1. Selo Soemardjan

Selo Soemardjan argues, “globalization is the formation of a communication and organization between different people around the world who have the aim of following the same new rules.”

2.Anthony Giddens

Anthony Giddens states that “everything that happens, namely social relations eventually becomes intense between people in this world and connects one event to another which produces a reciprocal impact between one region and another so that it expands to aspects of life between the two. ”

3. Cochrane and Pain

Cochrane and Pain stated that globalization is marked by the emergence of a global cultural and economic system that can make people from all over the world become a single society that grows globally.

4. Malcolm Waters

Malcom Waters stated that globalization is a social process that can result in the emergence of geographical restrictions on socio-cultural conditions that become less important and exist in every human consciousness.

Types of Globalization

After discussing the notion of globalization, the next thing to discuss is the types of globalization. The scope of globalization is very broad, such as globalization in the field of transportation, economic globalization, socio-cultural globalization, science and technology globalization, communication globalization, and others.

Transportation globalization

The field of transportation will continue to experience changes along with globalization, moreover public transportation will also continue to develop. In this case, the development of transportation due to globalization can be in land, sea and air transportation. Thanks to globalization, the delivery of goods from one region to another will be faster.

Economic globalization

The second type of globalization is economic globalization. We can see this type of globalization because of international trade carried out by two or more countries. In fact, thanks to economic globalization, one does not need to leave the house to buy an item.

Cultural globalization

In accordance with the notion of globalization, the next type of globalization is cultural globalization. It is no longer a stranger if social culture is a type of globalization. One of the cultures that has started to enter Indonesia, namely Korean culture.

Science and Technology Globalization

Science and technology will continue to experience development from time to time, so that science and technology is a type of globalization. Therefore, the more advanced the times, the more science and technology that can be utilized by many people.

Communication globalization

The globalization of communication, as the name implies, this type of globalization is synonymous with matters of communication. One of the things that has begun to change since the globalization of communication is the reduction in the activity of sending messages which is replaced by sending  chats .

Globalization Process

Based on the notion of globalization, globalization does not suddenly occur, of course. Globalization doesn’t happen overnight. Globalization occurs through many processes. What’s the process?

Globalization arises because of the development of science and the human mind that makes science continue to progress.

The discovery of a theory by a scientist at one time will be perfected by the next scientist.

With reason, humans do not necessarily accept theories from previous scientists. As time goes by, science also develops. The development of science is the beginning of advances in information technology, communication technology, and transportation technology.

The discovery of communication tools, for example, which were initially so unexpectedly simple, are now increasingly sophisticated so that the communication process is very fast.

If in the past we could only send messages via the SMS Short Message service, which had a limited number of words sent and the pulse price was relatively expensive, unexpectedly, now we can use a chat-reciprocating application.

Even if at first we could only send messages to one person, now we can share messages with many people directly with the group facilities provided.

If in the past only voices could greet each other, now distant forms can also be seen via video calls. Advances in technology eventually encourage a lot of innovation in social life. If in the past we were constrained by transportation to go anywhere, now even though we don’t have motorbikes or cars, the city only has to order online transportation wherever we are, wherever we are going.

Characteristics of Globalization

The definition of globalization, types, and processes have been discussed, so the next discussion is the characteristics of globalization. What are the characteristics of actual globalization? According to Cohen and Kennedy the characteristics of globalization are:

1. Increased Common Problems

Increasing common problems, such as the spread of virus-borne diseases of migratory people, foreign debts, and patterns of international crime. The spread of the virus as it is currently sweeping the world where Covid-19, which originated in Wuhan China, has now spread everywhere.

2. Increased Cultural Interaction Between Countries

Increased cultural interaction between countries through mass media and the internet. Some time ago a local private TV station held an interstate talent search event in Southeast Asia. Through this event we get to know what foreign singers are like and it also happens that we see their culture.

3. Every Country is Interdependent in the Economic Sector

The countries of the world have a high degree of dependence due to markets and economic production. Economic activities carried out globally have encouraged the birth of the World Trade Organization, which oversees the implementation of international trade economy.

4. The occurrence of trade between countries

Natural resources owned by a country are not necessarily owned by other countries. So to fulfill each other’s needs there is a process of trade between countries. Import and export process can not be avoided anymore. There was an international economy.

5. Changes in the Concept of Space and Time

Changes in the concept of space and time, where the state’s territorial boundaries are fading due to easy migration of the population. As we know, now Singapore or Malaysia is one of Indonesia’s tourist destinations.

With the availability of many qualified and affordable airlines, the two countries are close to Indonesia. It is said that many are used to going back and forth there like it’s close.

Features of Globalization

In order to know more deeply about globalization, the characteristics of globalization will be explained below, namely:

• Technology is getting more advanced, while examples of technological developments are the internet and some electronics.
• Many countries carry out economic cooperation through bilateral or multilateral trade. That way, the needs of a country will be easily met.
• Some of the world’s problems are common problems, such as the problem of environmental damage.
• There is cultural acculturation that occurs because it is easy to get information about the culture of other countries.

Impact of Globalization

Globalization has also changed the pattern of people’s lives, one of which is leading people to know many cultures from countries outside. The impacts of globalization in the economic and socio-cultural fields are:

1. The Impact of Globalization on the Economy

Globalization has an impact on the economy. There are positive impacts as well as negative impacts. What are the impacts?

a. The Positive Impact of Globalization

The positive impact of globalization is triggering creative and innovative attitudes among the general public so that they can compete in the global realm.

The rain of goods from abroad offering low prices and luxury quality goods has made local producers turn their heads so they can compete with foreign products. This of course increases creativity and sparks innovation among the wider community.

It’s easy to get goods from abroad at affordable prices. It is undeniable that goods from China’s bamboo curtain country are now dominating the domestic market. With affordable prices and special quality we can get these goods. there are already many distributors who play in imported china goods.

Increased types of employment due to foreign investment from abroad. Increased foreign investment creates job opportunities everywhere and this is clearly beneficial because it can suck up a lot of unemployment.

There are opportunities to work abroad. Working abroad is no longer complicated now. Many agents channel labor abroad.

b. Negative Impact of Globalization

The ease of getting goods from abroad makes the national market dominated by imported goods. Moreover, if consumers prefer foreign products then fall on local traders.

Triggering consumerism or non-thrifty lifestyle in society. The rise of Korean fever among young people makes them target Korean style. Their love for Korean bands causes them to buy merchandise from their favorite artists. Whatever the price is installed, no longer a complaint. that is why Indonesia is considered a promising market for them. Likewise with collectors of well-known foreign brands. Their ease in collecting items will be difficult to control.

The entry of foreign workers in large numbers so as to dominate the local workforce. The ease of entry of foreign workers into our country has caused large numbers of foreign workers to invade Indonesia. even in the entertainment world, we are getting used to seeing foreign artists. Many foreign nationals are starting to have a place in the hearts of Indonesian citizens.

The death of local businesses due to the sale of goods from abroad. If goods from abroad continue to flood Indonesia, then it is not impossible that local entrepreneurs will go out of business. Failing to compete with foreign products makes traders fall.

With this globalization, everything is made easier with the emergence of E-Commerce, electronic contracts and others. However, this also increases the number of cyber crimes. Therefore, the existence of the book The Influence of the Era of Globalization on Business Law in Indonesia discusses the impact of globalization on business law that applies in Indonesia.

 

2. The Impact of Globalization in the Socio-Cultural Sector

As is the case in the economic field, in the social sector there are also impacts given by globalization, including:

a. The Positive Impact of Globalization

In terms of socio-culture, globalization has a positive impact, namely changing the mindset of people who were originally ancient to be modern. The ancients were known to be old-fashioned. Naturally, because their access to the outside world is limited. Meanwhile, nowadays any information from anywhere is easy to get. So the mindset of society has changed to be modern.

Making people aware of cultural diversity in the world (world multiculturalism). In addition, fostering an attitude of tolerance between communities due to the interdependence of both work and education dependencies.

b. Negative Impact of Globalization

Failure to understand modernization will result in juvenile delinquency as a result of imitating broadcasts in cyberspace. The flurry of shows on television or the internet makes it easy for teenagers to accept the negative things from these shows.

It is easy to be influenced by foreign culture so that you forget the local culture. As is currently happening. The Korean culture wave is sweeping. Teenagers are starting to love all things Korean, from music, drama, clothes and even food. When eating Korean food is considered cooler than eating warm, for example, it is a negative impact of globalization.

Forgetting local culture because it is considered ancient. Lately, Indonesian culture has been abandoned by young people. They feel more proud to be able to imitate foreign dances than Indonesian dances.

Factors Causing Globalization

Based on the notion of globalization, globalization does not just happen, but there are several contributing factors, including:

1. Easily Accessible Transportation

Globalization can occur because transportation is easily accessible, so it is easy for someone to go abroad, such as an airplane.

2. There is International Trade

The next factor causing globalization is the existence of an open economy or international trade. With international trade, various kinds of products from abroad will easily enter Indonesia.

3. Technology and and Transportation that continues to grow

Technology and transportation that continues to grow is one of the causes of globalization. An example of technological developments can be seen with  e-commerce .

Globalization Aspect

After discussing the notion of globalization to its causal factors, the next discussion is the aspect of globalization. In general, the development of globalization is seen from 3 aspects, namely political aspects, economic aspects, and socio-cultural aspects.

Political Aspect

With globalization, world-class organizations emerged, so that political relations with many countries could occur. World-level organizations, such as  the World Bank ,  WTO, and so on.

Economic Aspect

The economic aspect experienced a significant development due to this globalization. This can happen because there are already many countries that can carry out international trade. In fact, there are already many  domestic and foreign e-commerce sites , making it easier for consumers to shop.

Socio-Cultural Aspects

Globalization is often seen from the entry of foreign cultures into the country. The entry of this culture generally occurs through the internet or social media.

Benefits of Globalization

In addition to having both positive and negative impacts, globalization also provides benefits. The benefits of globalization are as follows:

1. Provide Convenience in Communicating

Will provide an ease in the field of communication with other people. If there was no globalization, maybe our communication would only revolve around the local area.

2. It’s easy to get goods from abroad

Will provide convenience in obtaining various forms of goods which will satisfy the life of a human being. Want brand name clothes made in America? Want a sophisticated car made in Germany? easy to order. Goods are easy to get even from abroad.

3. More Public Transportation

There will be a form of mobility of the population which will be higher with the help of various forms of transportation vehicles. The distance between the place of work and home will not be an obstacle. Want day or night we easily get transportation.

4. Opening New Jobs

Will open various forms of job vacancies. This can reduce the number of unemployed, of course. That way, the level of community welfare can continue to increase.

5. The Tourism Sector Can Increase

Will increase the growth of the tourism sector. Indonesia will find it easier to introduce tourism spots to the eyes of the world. Beautiful places throughout the archipelago will soon reach the eyes of the world.

6. A More Transparent Democracy

Will improve the existing democracy to be more transparent. The ease of accessing information makes political parties such as elections easy to follow. This causes the democratic party to be more transparent. Fraudulent relative can be reduced.

How to Deal with Globalization

As previously explained that globalization has both negative and positive impacts. Therefore, we need to be good at dealing with globalization so as not to abandon our original cultural values. In this case, what is meant by “smart” is to keep trying to think critically when getting information from the mass media or social media, as well as when wanting to learn about foreign cultures, so that cultural values ​​are not abandoned.

Another way to deal with globalization is to keep trying to buy local products, so that domestic businesses continue to run and remain able to compete with foreign products. In addition, it can improve the national economy.

Example of Globalization

After knowing the meaning of globalization to the positive impacts of globalization and the negative impacts of globalization, the following discussion is an example of globalization, namely:

• There is trade between countries to meet domestic needs
• Working abroad will be easier
• It is easy to learn foreign cultures and languages
• The attitude of tolerance respects the culture of other countries is greater
• There are international organizations
• Can play a role in carrying out world peace
• Learn with modern and sophisticated technology
• There is an exchange of students abroad.

So how, after reading the notion of globalization to examples of globalization, have you understood more about globalization? Hopefully we can take positive things from globalization and throw away the negative impacts.

 

Prayer movement – The obligation of Muslims is to carry out the commands of Allah SWT and stay away from His prohibitions. Carrying out His commands one of them is to pray. Prayer is very important in Islam so that it is included in the 2nd pillar of Islam. Even prayer is the pillar of religion. The obligatory prayers are the five daily prayers, including Fajr, Dzuhur, Asr, Maghrib and Isha.

Prayer is a worship that must be done by Muslims. In carrying out the prayer, one should not be careless, there are pillars and conditions for the validity of the prayer that must be fulfilled so that the prayer is valid before Allah SWT. Then what is the meaning of prayer itself?

Meaning of Prayer

In Arabic, prayer is a prayer or a way of praying to ask Allah SWT.

The meaning of prayer in this language is written in the meaning of QS At-Taubah verse 103, with the following sound:

Amen

Meaning: “And pray for them. Verily, your prayer becomes peace for their souls, and Allah is All-Hearing, All-Knowing.”

Meanwhile, prayer in KBBI is described as worship to Allah SWT and must be done by every Muslim according to certain conditions, pillars, and readings.

Prayers have legal requirements including being clean from hadas and uncleanness, purity of body, place and clothes, praying according to the time, covering the genitals and facing the Qibla.

There are two kinds of prayer, namely fardhu prayer which is obligatory and sunnah prayer which is permissible but not obligatory.

Procedures for Prayer Movement

After discussing the meaning of prayer, this discussion will discuss the procedures for prayer movements. The following are procedures for prayer movements that you need to know.

• Stand

The procedure for standing is:

1. The legs are stretched for about one inch (kilan) of approximately 20 cm.
2. The body, especially the chest must face the Qibla.
3. The gaze is directed to the place of prostration.

• Intentions and Takbiratul Ihram

The procedure for carrying out the intention is:

1. The intention in the heart is carried out together with takbiratul ihram (pronounce ألله أكبر ). Things that must be intended (which must be presented in the heart), namely:

If fardhu prayer:

• Desire / intentional prayer.
• The stupidity of prayer.
• Determine the intended prayer, such as midday, ashar, etc. as well as if pronounced (  أصلي فرض الظهر / العصر. )

If the sunnah prayers are timed or have a reason, then they must:

• Desire or intentional prayer.
• Determine the prayers such as qobliyah prayers, ‘Eid al-Fitr, kusufus syamsi etc., if pronounced as follows:

( أصلى سنة قبلية الظهر ) ( أصلي سنة عيد الفطر )

1. If the sunnah prayer is absolute, then it is enough to wish or intentionally perform the prayer if it is pronounced ( أصلى سنة )

Things that are sunnah intended:

• Relying on prayer to Allah ( لله تعالى)
• Explaining the nature of prayer ( أداء / قضاء )
• Explain facing the Qibla and the number of cycles. So an example of the lafadz is:

( أصلي فرض الظهر أربع ركعات مستقبل القبلة أداء / قضاء الله تعالى )

The procedure for takbiratul ihram is as follows:

• Raised both hands
• Both palms are directed to the Qibla in a slightly inclined position.
• The condition of the fingers is allowed to stretch as usual.
• Hands are raised so that the fingertips are in line with the upper ears, thumbs are in line with the lower ears and palms are in line with the shoulders.
• After that place both hands on the left between the navel and chest in the following position:
• The right hand supports the left hand. The thumb, ring finger and little finger of the right hand hold the left wrist.
• The index finger and middle finger of the right hand are laid out on the left hand
• After that, read the iftitah prayer, which is as follows:

اللهُ اَكْبَرُ كَبِرًا وَالْحَمْدُ لِلهِ كَشِيْرًا وَسُبْحَانَ اللهِ بُكْرَةً وَاَصِيْلًا . اِنِّى وَجَّهْتُ وَجْهِيَ لِلَّذِيْ فَطَرَالسَّمَاوَاتِ وَالْnk ??? لاَ شَرِيْكَ لَهُ وَبِذَ لِكَ اُمِرْتُ وَاَنَ مِنَ الْمُسْلِمِيْنَ

“Allaahu Akbaru Walhamdulillaahi Katsiiraa, Wasubhaanallaahi Bukratan Wa Ashiila, Innii Wajjahtu Wajhiya Lilladzii Fatharas Samaawaati Wal Ardha Hanifan Musliman Wama Anaa Minal Musyrikiina. Inna Shalaatii Wa Nusukii Wa Mahyaaya Wa Mamaatii Lillaahi Rabbil ‘Aalamiina. Laa Syariikalahu Wa Bidzaalika Umirtu Wa Ana Minal Muslimiin.”

Then pause for a while as long as it is enough to read ( سبحان الله ) . Then, read the ta’awwudz prayer, and be silent for a while if it’s enough to read ( سبحان الله )     

• Read Surah Al-Fatihah

The procedure for reading Surah Al Fatihah is as follows:

1. Starting from the bismillah verse, it is obligatory to keep tasydid, letters, makhraj and the collapse of the verse and continuously
2. After reading Al Fatihah then read (رب اغفرلى) then read (آمين) , but for the public after the imam reads Alfatihah they are not allowed to read (رب اغفر لى)   but only read (آمين)
3. After that, be silent for a while, if it’s enough to read ( سبحان الله ) if you pray alone. And it’s enough to read Al Fatihah if you become a priest.
4. After that, read the letters, if you pray the Fajr prayer, the letters are long, if you pray the Maghrib, the letters are short, while the order is according to the order of the Mushaf.
5. After reading the letter, be silent for a while, enough to read سبحان الله, then bowing.

• Ruku’ and Tuma’ninah

The procedure for bowing is as follows:

1. After being silent for a while, he finished reading the letter, then read the takbir while raising both hands as when takbiratul ihram
2. Then both palms hold the knees, the position of the back and head flat like a board
3. The fingers are usually beber and directed to the Qibla.
4. Both elbows are stretched from the stomach and the stomach is lifted.
5. Recite tasbih three times (3 X)

سُبْحَانَ رَبِّيَ الْعَظِيْمِ وَبِحَمْدِهِ

Subhaana Rabbiyal ‘Adziimi Wa Bihamdih.

• I’tidal and Tuma’ninah

I’tidal procedures, namely:

1. Reciting (سمع الله لمن حمده ) while raising your hands like takbiratul ihram and then placing them on the chest or releasing them, but more importantly releasing them on condition they don’t move them.
2. Read the prayer ربنا لك الحمد … ) 

سَمِعَ اللهُ لِمَنْ حَمِدَهُ

Sami’Allahu Liman Hamidah

1. Pause for a moment then say the takbir to prostrate without raising your hand.

• prostrate 

The procedure for prostration is:

1. From i’tidal (standing straight) down and the first to reach the place of prostration are the two knees then the palms of the hands then the forehead together with the nose
2. Both elbows are stretched away from the stomach
3. Palms parallel to shoulders
4. The legs are stretched and enforced until the toes face the Qiblah
5. Abdomen lifted from both thighs.
6. Read the prostration prayer three times.

سبحان ربي الأعلى وبحمده

Subhaana rabbiyal a’la wabihamdih.

1. When prostrating, seven limbs must be attached to the place of prostration, namely the forehead, both knees, both palms, some of the inner toes, and there must be no obstructions between the forehead and the place of prostration.
2. Read takbir then sit down.

• Sitting Between Two Prostrations and Tuma’ninah

The procedure for sitting is:

1. Get up from prostration while reciting the takbir then both palms are placed on the thighs so that the fingertips are level with the knees.
2. The fingers are exposed normally.
3. The sole of the right foot is upheld, the tip is facing the Qibla while the left foot is occupied.
4. Reading du’a (رب اغفرلى وارحمنى … )

رب اغفر لي وارحمني واجبرني وارفعني وارزقني واهدني وعافني واعف عني

Robbighfirlii warhamnii wajburnii warfa’nii warzuqnii wahdinii wa’aafinii wa’fu ‘annii.

• Second prostration 

The second way of prostration is:

The prostration here is the same as the first prostration. After prostrating and getting up to continue the second rak’ah while reciting the takbir without raising your hands and being circumcised, sit down and rest for a while, then place your palms on the place of prostration and then stand up.

Order of the second cycle:

1. The method for the second cycle is the same as the first cycle except for takbiratul ihram, and in this second cycle it is circumcised to sit for the initial tahiyat if the prayer is more than two cycles and for the final tahiyat if there are two prayer cycles.

2. Sit for the initial tahiyat

The method is the same as sitting between two prostrations, except that here the fingers of the right hand are held except for the index finger and the more important position is that the thumb is held, the tip is placed on the edge of the palm under the index finger which is let go, while the other three fingers are also held. that implies the number fifty three ( 53 ).

3. Then read the initial tahiyat prayer and read a special sholawat for the Prophet Muhammad, namely:

التَّحِيَّاتُ الْمُبَارَكَاتُ الصَّلَوَاتُ الطَّيِّبَاتُ لِلَّهِ السَّلاَمُ عَلَيْكَ أَيُّهَا النَّبِىُّ وَرَحْمَةُ اللَّهِ وَبَرَكَاتُهُ السَّلاَمُ عَلَيْنَا وَعَلَى عِبَادِ اللَّهِ الصَّالِحِينَ أَشْهَدُ أَنْ لاَ إِلَهَ إِلاَّ اللَّهُ وَأَشْهَدُ أَنَّ مُحَمَّدًا رَسُولُ اللَّهِاَ . للَّهُمَّ صَلِّ عَلىَ مُحَمَّدٍ

Attahiyyaatul mubaarakaatush sholawaatuth thayyibatu lillaah. Assalamu ‘alaika ayyuhan nabiyyu wa rohmatullahi wa barokatuh. Assalaaamu’alainaa wa ‘alaa’ibaadillaahish shoolihiin. Asyhadu allaa ilaaha illallaah wa asyhadu anna Muhammadar Rasulullah. Allahumma sholli ‘alaa Muhammad.

4. When the reading reaches the lafadz (الا الله) the right index finger is raised slightly tilted to the right/qibla direction and the circumcision eye is directed at the tip of the index finger so that it will stand up.

1. After reading the tahiyat and sholawat prayers and getting up while reading the takbir both palms are placed at the place of prostration, then after almost standing straight (up to the limit there is enough for bowing’) both hands are raised as when takbiratul ihram.
2. Sit for the final tahiyat. Slightly different from sitting for the first tahiyat, that is, the left buttock is attached to the place of prayer, the sole of the right foot is upheld, while the sole of the left foot is extended towards the right foot (through underneath).

• Read the Final Tahiyat

The reading is the same as the initial tahiyat It is mandatory to keep tasydid, letters, makhroj and must be continuous, namely as follows:

اَللَّهُمَّ صَلِّ عَلىَ مُحَمَّدٍ وَعَلىَ آلِ مُحَمَّدٍ كَماَ صَلَّيْتَ عَلىَ إِبْرَاهِيْمَ وَعَلىَ آلِ إِبْرَاهِيْمَ إِنـَّكَ حَمِيْدٌ مَجِيْدٌ اَللَّهُمَّ باَرِكْ عَلىَ مُحَمَّدٍ وَعَلىَ آلِ مُحَمَّدٍ كَماَ باَرَكْتَ عَلىَ إِبْرَاهِيْمَ وَعَلىَ آلِ إِبْرَاهِيْمَ إِنـَّكَ حَمِيْدٌ مَجِيْدٌ

Allahumma sholli ‘alaa Muhammad wa ‘alaa aali Muhammad kamaa shollaita ‘alaa Ibrahim wa ‘alaa aali Ibrohim innaka hamidum majiid. Alloohumma baarik ‘alaa Muhammad wa ‘alaa aali Muhammad kamaa barakta ‘alaa Ibraahiim wa ‘alaa aali Ibrohim innaka hamidum majiid.

• Read Sholawat Prophet

1. At least read ( اللهم صل على سيدنا محمد … )
2. After reading sholawat on the Prophet, he is circumcised to also read shalawat for the Prophet’s Family, namely lafadz ( وعلى آل سيدنا محمد … انك حميد مجيد and after that he is circumcised in prayer.

• Greetings First

1. When going to the first salutation, it is sunnah for the intention of completing the prayer.
2. Then turn to the right until the right cheek is visible from behind the person greeting.
3. After that say the second greeting while turning to the left.

• Sort Pillars of Prayer

1. It is obligatory to sort/order prayers, namely the sentences above which are written in capital letters (which are numbered).
2. After the prayer is finished, both palms are rubbed on the forehead and face up to the chin.

Things that need to be considered

In carrying out the prayer, there are things that need to be considered, namely as follows:

1. Before praying, the siwakan is circumcised and reads the letter An Naas
2. The sunnah recites the intention, so that it makes it easier to present the intention in the heart
3. For women when bowing, both elbows are pressed against the stomach (should not be stretched). At the time of prostration, both knees and the soles of his feet pressed against his thighs.
4. In the dawn of the second rak’ah after i’tidal it is sunnah to pray qunut
5. If you become a makmum, you must intend to become a makmum, that is, if you recite
   :
6. The five pillars of qouly (recitation) must be heard by one’s own ears, namely:
7. Takbiratul ihram
8. Final tahiyat
9. Surah Al Fatihah
10. Sholawat on the final Tahiyat.
11. First regards.

Benefits of Prayer Movement for Health

Running the prayer certainly has very good benefits for the body. Then, what are the benefits of prayer movement for health? The following are the benefits of prayer movements for health.

1. Improve blood circulation
2. Promotes Digestion
3. Relieves back pain and joint pain
4. Maintain heart health
5. Healthy mentally
6. Makes the soul more peaceful
7. Affects posture

Wisdom from Prayer

After discussing the understanding, prayer movements to the benefits of prayer, below we will discuss a little about the wisdom of prayer. Here’s the wisdom of praying:

1. When prostrating in a series of prayers when our position as servants is to surrender everything to Allah SWT because Allah SWT is the place of a servant who absolutely belongs to Allah SWT.
2. Only Allah SWT is able to provide help to his servant by praying.
3. Five times the obligatory prayer times. This is a form of Allah SWT’s love for his people to repent. Because we as His people every day must commit sins either intentionally or unintentionally.
4. By praying we can add faith and taqwa to Allah SWT because as humans there are many worldly temptations.

Closing

Prayer is a mandatory worship for all Muslims. Therefore, no matter how busy a Muslim is, he still has to leave time for prayer. Thus the discussion about prayer movements. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you.

 

Definition of Non-Aligned Movement – ​​Does Readers know what non-aligned movement is? So, the meaning of this non-aligned movement is an international organization consisting of 100 countries that do not consider their countries to be allied with or against any big power bloc.

The purpose of the existence of this non-aligned movement organization is certainly one of the ways to reduce tensions between the two blocks involved in a dispute. In addition, this organization also aims to unite countries that do not want to form an alliance with countries that participated in the Cold War.

Then what exactly is the meaning of the non-aligned movement? For more details, let’s look at the explanation below regarding the meaning of the non-aligned movement and its brief history.

Definition of Non-Aligned Movement

The non-aligned movement or commonly abbreviated as NAM or Non Aligned Movement (NAM) is a movement pioneered by third world countries that have members of more than 100 countries and seek to carry out their foreign policies in a way that does not take sides with anyone or does not consider their own country has an alliance with the West Bloc or the East Bloc. The NAM was founded on September 1, 1961 which was spearheaded by several figures, including Soekarno from Indonesia, Jawaharlal Nehru from India, Gamal Abdul Nasser from Egypt, Kwame Nkrumah from Ghana, and also Joseph Broz Tito from Yugoslavia.

The Western Block countries with the largest number are eight countries consisting of the United Kingdom, the United States, Belgium, France, Canada, the Netherlands, Luxembourg and Norway. Meanwhile, the Eastern Bloc consisted of only four countries, namely East Germany, Czechoslovakia, Romania, and also the Soviet Union. To be able to maintain the position of each block, the Western Bloc finally formed the North Atlantic Treaty Organization or NATO. Meanwhile, the Eastern Bloc formed the Warsaw Pact. In addition, the two blocs continue to look for allies to increase their defense in Asia, Africa and America.

Even though currently the two blocs are no longer at war, the differences between the two blocs continue to be a problem material in international life. Therefore, in response to conditions that could heat up at any time, the countries that had just gained independence in the Asia-Africa region also finally held discussions through the Asian-African Conference or KAA which was held in Bandung, West Java.

According to the website of the Indonesian Ministry of Foreign Affairs, the Asian-African Conference has a fairly close relationship with the NAM. At a meeting of KAA member countries in Indonesia in 1955, an agreement called the Ten Principles of Bandung was born. The agreement contains the principles of implementing international cooperation. After that, from 1 to 6 September 1961, the First Summit was held again in Boegorg, Yugoslavia. The conference was attended by approximately 25 countries including Indonesia.

Through this conference, a neutral country organization or NAM was born. Therefore, the NAM was finally officially established on September 1, 1961. Several countries that were in the NAM and participated in attending the Summit I included Algeria, Afghanistan, Saudi Arabia, Sri Lanka, Burma, Congo, Cambodia, Cuba, Ethiopia, Cyprus, Ghansa, India, Guinea, Indonesia, Lebanon, Iraq, Morocco, Mali, Sudan, Somalia, Tunisia, RPA, Yugoslavia, Yemen and Nepal.

At the First Summit, the NAM founding countries agreed to establish a movement, not an organization to avoid all bureaucratic implications in building a work effort between each NAM country. Then the First Summit emphasized that the NAM would not be directed to a passive role in international politics. But to formulate the country’s own position in an independent way that can reflect all the interests of member countries.

NAM succeeded in occupying a special position in foreign policy in Indonesia. This is because since the beginning of the formation of the NAM, Indonesia has played a central role, the KAA has also become one of the proofs of Indonesia’s role and contribution in pioneering the establishment of the Non-Aligned Movement. In particular, President Soekarno was also recognized as one of the initiating figures and also the founder of the NAM organization. Indonesia considers that the NAM has an important role. Because the principles and goals of the NAM are to reflect on the struggles and goals of the Indonesian people, as stated in the 1945 Constitution.

History of the Non-Aligned Movement

The word “Non-Aligned” was first introduced by the Prime Minister of India, namely Jawaharlal Nehru in his speech in 1954 in Colombo, Sri Lanka. In that speech, Nehru explained the five pillars that can be used as guidelines to form Sino-Indian relations which are called the Panchsheel or the five controllers. This principle was then used as the basis of the Non-Aligned Movement. The contents of the five principles include:

1. Mutual respect for territorial integrity and sovereignty.
2. Non-aggression agreement
3. Non-interference in other countries’ internal affairs
4. Equality and mutual benefit
5. Maintaining peace

The Non-Aligned Movement originated from an Asian-African Summit held in Bandung, Indonesia in 1955. At the conference, countries that sided with a particular bloc would declare their desire not to be involved in a confrontation between Western or Eastern ideologies. The founders of this movement were five world leaders, including Josip Broz Tito the president of Yugoslavia, Soekarno the president of Indonesia, Gamal Abdul Nasser the president of Egypt, Pandit Jawaharlal Nehru the prime minister of India, and Kwame Nkrumah from Ghana.

This movement had lost its credibility in the late 1960s when its members began to split and join other blocs, including the Eastern Bloc. After that, the question arose about how a country allied with the Soviet Union like Cuba could claim to be a non-aligned country. The movement then began to split completely during the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan in 1979.
The ASEAN Summit or Summit is the culmination of meetings between leaders of ASEAN member countries in relation to economic and cultural development among Southeast Asian countries. In order to achieve the ASEAN goals that have been formulated, it is necessary to conduct business and activities. During implementation, 11 committees have been formed, for example, food ingredients and committees for agriculture, finance, tourism, and also the mass media. This committee has a goal to improve the form of cooperation between the six member countries. In addition, it also forms committees from the Ad Hoc Committee or Working Committee. These committees include the Special Committee which has the duty to improve trade relations with the ECC. Then the committee is also tasked with increasing cooperation between ASEAN and Australia, New Zealand, Canada,

Purpose of the Non-Aligned Movement

The main purpose of the existence of the non-aligned movement or NAM is to support the right to self-determination, sovereignty, national independence, and also the national integrity of member countries. In addition, the main objectives of the NAM are as follows:

1. Against apartheid.
2. Not taking sides in multilateral military pacts.
3. Struggle to oppose all forms and manifestations of imperialism.
4. Fight for and oppose colonialism, occupation, racism, neo-colonialism, and foreign domination.
5. Disarmament.
6. Will not interfere in the internal affairs of other countries and coexist peacefully.
7. Refuse to use or threaten force in international relations.
8. Building a social economy and restructuring the international economic system.
9. Carry out international cooperation in accordance with equal rights.
10. Developing solidarity among developing countries to achieve prosperity, togetherness and independence.
11. Alleviating world tension, due to the emergence of feuds between the two blocks, namely the West Block and the East Block.

Implementation of the Non-Aligned Summit

The Non-Aligned Summit is a high-level conference held by countries that adhere to political principles that are not bound by any of the blocs.

1. First Conference

The first meeting was held in 1961 in Belgrade to spark political principles together. The meaning of this policy reads “politics based on peaceful coexistence, free from blocs, not members of military alliances and dreams of aspirations to eliminate colonialism in all its forms and manifestations”.

The first Non-Aligned Conference which was held in September 1961 in Belgrade was seen as a continuation of the Asian-African Conference in Bandung. A total of 25 countries took part, 8 from Asia, 9 from Africa, 1 from Europe, Yugoslavia, then one from Latin America, Cuba and 6 from Arabia. The conference was the driving force of President Tito who shifted to the Third World as they wanted to escape the second block of isolation. Threesome with Nehru as well as Nasser, Tito played vocal group meeting. Where the conference discussed racial discrimination, assistance for progress, and also development and disarmament.

2. Second Conference

The second conference was held in October 1964 in Cairo. Where the conference was attended by delegates from 48 countries and 10 countries with official observer status, most of which were Latin America. The two conferences saw conflict between the moderate leaders of the Nehru state group and also the leaders of the radical groups Soekarno and Kwame Nkrumah.

3. Third Conference

In September 1970, the third Conference was held in Lusaka, the Capital of Zambia. The number of participants present at that time increased to 54 countries, 9 countries sent observers. The main theme of this conference, led by the President of Zambia, Kenneth Kaunda, is the dispute over the racist white minority regime in South Africa. The principle of non-alignment was stated not to reduce its power as it had been formulated in Cairo and also Belgrade.

 

4. Fourth Conference

The fourth high-level conference took place in September 1973 and was attended by 75 countries in Algeria. Where at that time, Prince Sihanouk who came from Cambodia represented the royal government. The observers consisted of organizations from the independence and liberation movements of South Africa and also Latin America. The main theme presented at the conference chaired by Algerian President Boumediene was regarding the problems of poor countries. In closing, the right of resolution is formulated to nationalize foreign companies.

5. Fifth Conference

The fifth conference was held in August 1976 in Colombo, the capital of Sri Lanka. In this conference, apart from being strengthened by non-aligned countries which are detrimental to the world economic order that is unjust and can threaten world peace, a joint formulation was also formulated to fight non-aligned countries in the field of trade. industry, information technology media, which includes ways to strengthen non-aligned countries. From the conference, they succeeded in formulating a joint action program called the declaration of struggle.

6. VI Conference

The sixth conference was held in September 1979 in Havana, the capital of Cuba. The number of participants who took part in the conference were 94 countries, 20 observers, and 18 organizations as well as countries with guest status. Even though the atmosphere was filled with conflict between moderates and radicals, the conference succeeded in formulating a resolution to strengthen the non-aligned principles formulated in a political declaration. Not only that, an economic declaration strengthening the non-aligned attitude towards what they claim is detrimental to the domination of foreign economic wealth by developing countries was also successfully formulated.

7. VIIth Conference

Cambodian membership was not completed successfully. Thus, both Heng Samrin’s government and the Pol Pot regime only became observer status, the Non-Aligned Summit, which was supposed to be held in September 1982 in Baghdad, the capital of Iraq, was canceled due to the war between Iraq and Iran which had not been successfully resolved. Then, Delhi, the capital of India, became the substitute venue for this seventh non-aligned conference.

This is an explanation of the meaning of the non-aligned movement, history, and also the purpose of the existence of the non-aligned movement. Hope it is useful.

Locomotor, non-locomotor and manipulative movements can be found in daily activities, including during various sporting activities. However, not many people know about these two types of motion.

Locomotor movement itself is a movement that causes displacement or movement of the body from one place to another. Locomotor skills are defined as the skills of moving individuals from one place to another, for example, jumping, walking, running and climbing.

In locomotor movement one has to move the body from position A to B and when moving, the body will be lifted to move to the second position. These movements are usually taught to children at an early age, namely when practicing movement skills. Most children will learn to walk when they are around 1 year old and run when they are around 2 years old. Locomotor movement skills can develop from the results of a certain level of developmental maturity. However, regular practice and experience also have an important role to achieve one’s locomotor skills.

To understand more deeply about locomotor movements, you can find out the types, benefits and examples. The following is a summary of the types, benefits and examples of locomotor movements. Check out the full explanation below!

Definition of Locomotor Movement

Locomotor movement is a body movement by moving from one position to another which consists of basic movements. So, in an individual movement, it is then required to be able to move the body from position A to position B or to position C. When moving independently the body will be lifted and then projected upwards to go to the second position.

Basically, basic locomotor movements are a domain movement of fundamental basic movements. In a locomotor skill then it can be defined as a skill that is moving individuals from one place to another.

Most of the locomotor skills themselves develop as a result of a certain level of maturity. However, experience and practice are also important in achieving mature proficiency. In a locomotor skill, for example, galloping, gliding, fast running, and jumping, which may be more difficult to do because these are a combination of other basic movement patterns.

A locomotor skill in the form of basic or gross motor coordination foundation or gross skill which basically involves a lot of large muscle movements. Locomotor movements are also movements that go anywhere. Experts also define locomotor movement as one of the movements that causes the body to move from one place to another or to various places, so that in English it is also called Traveling.

This is of course the opposite of non-locomotor movement, which does not cause the body to move from one place to another. A locomotor movement is also one of the foundations for the development of movement coordination which generally involves large muscles, muscle growth, endurance and stamina or power.

Examples of Locomotor Movement

Locomotor movement as a movement of the whole body to go through a certain space or distance. This movement will also make a person move from one place to another. Many activities can be done with this locomotor movement.

When doing sports there will be a lot of locomotor movements that are carried out. Not only helping friends to move on exercise, locomotor motion also has various benefits. Know the following examples of locomotor movements:

1. Walk

The first example of locomotor movement is walking. Walking as a movement to move the body from one place to another. Walking is a process of losing balance and returning it alternately when moving forward in an upright position.

In practice, gait shows very little up and down movement and sideways movement. Arms and legs move in opposite directions. In walking, the legs move alternately, with one foot always in contact with the ground or floor. This means that the stepping foot must be placed on the ground before the other foot is lifted. So there is no hover moment.

Body weight is transferred from the heel to the ball of the foot and then to the toes for propulsion. Toes point straight ahead and arms swing free from shoulders in the opposite direction to feet. Body erect, eyes focused forward and directed slightly lower than eye level. The legs swing gently from the pelvis, with the knees bent until they are just a little off the ground.

A gait that has reached the mature stage is soft, smooth, and completed in easy sequences. Assessing the walking patterns of children, pay attention to the following aspects:

• Bouncing walk – too much vertical (upward) thrust.
• Excessive swing of arms out to side.
• Failure of arm swing at (not originating from) shoulder.
• The feet step too close so that the whole body looks stiff when walking.
• Both feet went too far like a duck walk.
• Big toe pointing out.
• The big toe points inward – dove toe.
• Head too far forward – body leans forward before lead foot hits the ground.

2. Running

Running is also included in locomotor motion. Running as one of the movements of moving the body from one place to another with a step change technique while the body is in the air. Compared to walking, running is the movement of the feet rapidly alternately, in an instant, both feet leave the earth before one foot immediately rests on it.

Running is distinguished from fast (sprint) to slow. The body, although it differs in degree according to speed, must lean slightly forward. Knees bent and lifted, arms swinging in front and back of shoulders, and elbows bent.

During the early stages of running (2 years of age), a child will develop an unstable balance. The child makes exaggerated leg movements, specifically the knees of the legs swinging outward then rotating forward in preparation for the grounding phase. This knee action is accompanied by the feet pointing the toes out. This excessive movement gradually disappears as the child’s limbs become longer and stronger.

3. Stand on tiptoe

Apart from running, another example of locomotor movement is tiptoeing or the movement of moving the body from one place to another using one foot to land and rest on.

4. Jumping

Another example of locomotor movement is jumping. The jumping movement as a type of movement skills projects the body and involves landing and refusing using both feet.

5. Jumping

Jumping is the movement of resisting and absorbing force by landing on one foot. This movement requires muscle strength, body coordination, and dynamic balance.

6. Galloping

Apart from jumping, another example of locomotor motion is galloping. This movement is often referred to as galloping. Galloping as a walking motion activity combined with jumping ( jumping ). The direction of galloping can also be backwards or forwards. This movement itself is done with two legs.

7. Creeping

The next example of locomotor movement is the creeping movement. The creeping movement itself can be interpreted as the movement of moving the body from place A to place B or B to A with the body positioned face down on the surface.

8. Climb

Apart from creeping, another example of locomotor movement is climbing as a movement of moving the body up and down using both hands and feet. The upper limbs themselves are in charge of keeping the body from falling.

9. Leaping

Another example of locomotor movement is leaping. Leaping itself can be interpreted as a split movement in the air by extending a step to reach a considerable distance. Usually this movement is also combined with a running movement.

10. Sliding

Apart from leaping , there is also a locomotor movement called sliding. Slidding is a jumping movement to the right or left with one foot always in front, from a position with both feet wide apart.

11. Skipping

The next example of locomotor movement is skipping which can be interpreted as a movement that comes from a combination of alternating walking and lifting movements. One walk, one tiptoe and so on.

12. Rolling

The last example of locomotor motion is rolling or rolling. In a simple sense, rolling is a rotating motion without stopping along a surface. This movement can also be done in a forward, backward, and sideways direction.

Examples of Locomotor Game

Doing locomotor movements will also help make your friends aware of your body. In addition, this movement will also help train agility and dexterity in moving. This locomotor movement is also a basic movement that can be done by humans.

Practicing this locomotor movement can also help train body strength and balance. This movement will also be the basic movement in various types of sports. Therefore, this movement will nourish the body. Below are various types of locomotor movements that you can often do.

Locomotor movement as a movement that involves the body in humans. Locomotor movements are also usually often carried out by sportsmen such as football, basketball, volleyball, running and so on.

Because basically locomotor movement also has the characteristics of moving places. For example, moving from one place to another. Meanwhile, when we play soccer without realizing it, we are already doing some of the locomotor movements.

Fundamental basic movements according to Harrow (1972) are an inherent movement pattern that forms the basis for complex movement skills including non-locomotor movements, locomotor movements; and manipulative movements.

The game of softball itself has a series of basic locomotor, non-locomotor and manipulative movements. Locomotor movement as a movement to change places. In locomotor movements, certain body parts move or change places. Examples of locomotor movements include running, jumping and climbing. Meanwhile, non-locomotor movements include movements that are not accompanied by a change of place.

After hitting in softball, it means that certain body parts make movements with the body position in place. Examples of non-locomotor movements themselves are shaking, bending, turning, and swinging. There is a manipulative movement which is a movement that involves mastery of an object or a movement that involves a tool.

Some examples of manipulative movements are hitting, catching, throwing and bouncing the ball. In the game of softball itself there is a combination of basic locomotor, non-locomotor, and manipulative movements. The following are examples of traditional locomotor games:

• Cak Engkleng or Engklek.
• Gobak Sodor.
• Patil Lele.
• Yeye Stilts or Rubber Jump.
• Rangku Pestle Bekel Ball or Stick Dance.

The benefit of the locomotor movement itself is to develop an awareness related to a body’s presence in space. Experts usually refer to it as motor perceptual awareness which consists of: Awareness of one’s own body, Awareness of a spatial relationship (spatial), Awareness of the concept of direction and Visual and auditory awareness from an early age, this awareness will also be seen in a child when imitating the teacher’s movements or imitating other children.

The difference between locomotor and non-locomotor movements is in daily activities. The two basic movements then appear naturally. However, as a means of agility training, this movement is then taught from an early age to children. Educators then realized the importance of honing both locomotor and non-locomotor movements, so that these two things were later included in the sports education curriculum at the elementary school level.

While non-locomotor movement can be known from the beginning of the movement. Non-locomotor movements as basic movements which can then be carried out without any displacement. This movement skill is also done by moving the limbs involving muscles and joints in a stationary or static state of the body.

Non-locomotor movements are also divided into four types, including twisting the body, bending the body, twisting the body, and changing the position of the limbs. If the locomotor movement is described by running, tiptoeing, crawling, and walking. While non-locomotor movements are twisting the body, bending and changing body position or movements to change the position of the limbs that are not accompanied by making the body move completely to another place.

Benefits and Purpose of Locomotor Movement

Benefits of Locomotor Movement

Locomotor movements have several benefits, namely:

• Self-awareness of the body.
• Awareness of direction concept.
• Train agility and dexterity.
• As a basic movement that is usually done by humans.
• Train skills and courage in carrying out a movement.
• Train the strength and balance of the body.
• Develop the ability to recognize space.
• Maintain body health and fitness.

Purpose of Locomotor Movement

The purpose of basic locomotor movements in rhythmic gymnastics is to support the achievement of the goal of perfecting motion which is used as a basis for channeling interests and talents and complementing efforts to develop the whole person. From these goals, children’s movements can be created in the future which can then be directed to other useful activities, especially in the development of sports.

The purpose of rhythmic activity in the first rhythmic gymnastics is to stimulate creativity through freedom of fantasy and an emphasis on spontaneous movement. Second, forming personality, especially individual abilities, personal and social maturity. Third, cultivating movement cooperation aimed at oneself is impossible without paying attention to the movements of others. So that in rhythmic gymnastics there are three things that must be considered, namely rhythm, body flexibility (flexibility), and movement continuity.

Meaning of Rhythmic Movement – Rhythmic motion or commonly known as rhythmic gymnastics is a type of sport that can be done alone or with many people. This sport is usually an alternative for people to always maintain body fitness.

Readers needs to know, there are lots of elements contained in every movement of rhythmic motion. For example, flexibility, balance, continuity, body flexibility, rhythm, to flexibility.

In this article, we will explain the ins and outs of rhythmic motion, starting from the meaning, history, types, elements, stages, to the benefits that need to be known. Let’s see the full review!

Definition of Rhythmic Movement

In general, rhythmic motion or often referred to as rhythmic gymnastics is an activity performed with music or songs as accompaniment. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), rhythmic gymnastics is the activity of moving the body to the rhythm of a song or music.

Quoted from Encyclopaedia Britannica (2015), rhythmic motion or better known in English as rhythmic gymnastics is a physical activity that is carried out with the help of, for example, balls, ropes and ribbons.

Meanwhile, according to Oktariyana and Oktariyani in their book entitled Multimedia-Based Rhythmic Gymnastic Movement Learning , rhythmic motion is mostly done as a goal to improve fitness, health, and of course body flexibility, especially to increase cardiovascular endurance and body joint flexibility.

Rhythmic motion can also be done using tools or without tools. For example, several tools that are often used, such as maces, hoops, sticks, balls, ribbons, and hats. The series of rhythmic gymnastics can also be done by walking, running, jumping, jumping, and swinging and rotating the hands.

As the name implies, rhythmic motion is a sport in which there are elements of motion coordination that follow the rhythm (beats), both from music and without music. Therefore, rhythmic motion requires a very good harmony between movement and rhythm.

In its development, rhythmic motion has become a sport that is contested. The Federation Internationale de Gymnastique , or FIG for short, is an international organization that oversees rhythmic movement athletes.

History of Rhythmic Movement

Rhythmic motion originally had a very long history. Quoted from the Olympic.org online page, rhythmic motion was first recognized in the 18th century. At that time, this activity was better known as group gymnastic movements accompanied by some basic choreography.

European society’s interest in gymnastic activities at that time led to the emergence of many competitions for rhythmic motion. Rhythmic movement is a very interesting blend of several disciplines. For example, classical ballet, such as plies and arabesques.

In Indonesia alone, rhythmic motion became known in 1912 during the Dutch colonial era. Rhythmic movements entered at the same time as the establishment of physical education as one of the compulsory subjects in various Dutch East Indies schools. Meanwhile, during the Japanese colonial era, rhythmic movement was banned, so it was replaced with Taiso or morning exercises which had to be carried out in schools.

During its development, rhythmic motion began to be included as a sport by the Federation Internationale de Gymnastique (FIG) in 1963. A year later, more precisely in 1964 in Budapest, Hungary, for the first time an international competition or tournament was held for the sport of rhythmic motion.

Ludmila Savinkova from the Soviet Union was an athlete who became the first world champion in the rhythmic gymnastics category. By holding this international competition, of course it succeeded in making the world community more enthusiastic. No wonder that every year, the number of athletes for rhythmic gymnastics is increasing.

Over time, in 1984 to be precise, rhythmic motion was officially registered as one of the sports in the biggest competition in the world, namely the Olympics. The athlete who won the gold medal in the rhythmic motion category was Lori Fung from Canada.

Until 1992, competition for rhythmic gymnastics was only held specifically for the women’s singles category. Only in 1996, the team or group category for rhythmic gymnastics began to be contested in the Olympics.

Types of Rhythmic Movement

According to the Physical Education and Health book, there are three types of rhythmic motion which ultimately make rhythmic motion what it is today. The three types of rhythmic motion include:

1. Delsarte

Rhythmic motion was first pioneered by a director named Delsarte (1811 to 1871). Therefore, until now this type of rhythmic motion is called Delsarte rhythmic motion.

This rhythmic motion basically comes from a theatrical art. Delsarte himself wanted every movement of the cast to be carried out as if it were a natural movement.

2. Jacques-Dalcroze

Rhythmic motion also comes from the art of music fronted by a music teacher named Jacques-Dalcroze. Dalcroze hoped that each song would become a movement in rhythmic motion. In this system, of course music takes precedence over movement.

Meanwhile, Dalcroze’s student Bode agreed that a move should be made from the inside to the ferries. So do not be surprised if the rhythmic movement itself is also known as ” Ausdruck Gymnastiek ” or can be interpreted as gymnastics that is carried out with feeling.

Over time, Bode’s disciples continued to experience growth. In fact, Bode’s students admit that they are very happy to give them during practice with tools such as balls, clubs and hoops.

3. Rudolf Laban

Rudolf Laban (1879 – 1958) became the pioneer of rhythmic movement which departed from the art of dance. This rhythmic movement can be regarded as a sports activity similar to dance, especially ballet. The rhythmic movements taught by Rudolf Laban prioritize the beauty and harmony of the movements. Therefore, to perform this rhythmic motion requires flexibility of the body in order to produce very beautiful movements.

Elements of Rhythmic Movement

According to the book entitled Multimedia-Based Rhythmic Gymnastic Movement Learning (2018) by Oktariyana and Oktariyani it is known that there are three elements that need to be emphasized in rhythmic motion, namely flexibility, balance, continuity, body flexibility, rhythm, and flexibility. The following are some elements that need to be known from rhythmic motion, including:

1. Body Flexibility

In rhythmic motion, the element of body flexibility can be understood as the ability to move the limbs freely without pain. This is due to the flexibility of the body in rhythmic motion in accordance with the joints and muscles that can move freely.

For example, when doing movements such as twisting, bending, or stretching the body. Therefore, when ordinary people see someone doing rhythmic movements, it is like seeing a broken body.

2. Body Balance

The element of body balance is a person’s ability to control or control the balance of the body when performing rhythmic movements. This element can be said to be very important because it makes a person more stable when moving.

In order for someone to have body balance when doing rhythmic gymnastics or rhythmic movements, they can use hand swings and stepping exercises and of course it must also be accompanied by the rhythm of music.

3. Continuity of Movement

Continuity of movement in rhythmic motion can be understood as one of the elements that make a series of movements always continuous or uninterrupted. If one part of the movement is over, one can continue the movement to the next part according to the rhythm of the song that accompanies the exercise.

Therefore, it’s a good idea to arrange a series of rhythmic movements that you want to display so that activities can run well and smoothly. Rhythmic motion is basically a gymnastics performed to express a sense of art or beauty. In addition, rhythmic motion also has the goal of fostering and improving the art of movement with rhythm.

4. Body Dexterity

The body’s flexibility when performing rhythmic movements can be seen after the body gets used to all kinds of gymnastic movements. Several characteristics related to the flexibility of the body in rhythmic motion can be seen when the body parts are not too stiff in movement. In order to get used to doing rhythmic movements, it takes a long time, so you have to be diligent and tenacious.

5. Rhythm

As the name implies, rhythmic motion is a combination of movement with rhythm. Good rhythmic movement depends on having a rhythm that fits the sequence of movements. Rhythm itself is a movement that is carried out simultaneously with the tempo of the movement.

Rhythm that is widely known and used by many people, especially students, among others, rhythm 2/3, 3/2, or also 4/4. For example, the 2/3 rhythm song is the duck goose cut, the 3/4 rhythm is the parrot, and the 4/4 rhythm is an example of the rice cut song.

6. Flexibility (body flexibility)

The last element of rhythmic motion is flexibility or often also called body flexibility. Flexibility is a person’s ability to dynamically move joints and muscles at a certain angle. Flexibility itself is adjusted to the ease in folding the body and limbs, starting from twisting, stretching, bending and bending movements.

Flexibility is important because it can make a person not afraid of getting injured when doing a series of rhythmic gymnastic movements. Flexibility in rhythmic motion itself can be seen from the agility of movement. This of course can be obtained from a routine and consistent rhythmic motion training.

Example of Rhythmic Movement

The following are several forms or combinations of step pattern movements in rhythmic motion sports from the class VII Physical Education, Sports and Health Education modules, namely:

1. Rhythmic motion of regular steps or loops

How to do regular step patterns or loops, namely:

• Someone has the initial attitude of standing straight while both hands are on the waist.
• During the first count, the right foot can be stepped from the heel, sole, followed by the fingertips.
• By the time it reaches the second count, the next step is to step with the left foot, just as it was done when stepping on the right foot.

2. Rhythmic movement of meeting step patterns or bijtrekpass

How to do a meeting step pattern or bijtrek pass, namely:

• The initial attitude is to stand straight while both hands are placed on the waist.
• On the first count, the right foot steps forward.
• Next, when it reaches the second count, the left foot follows to step forward.
• Then, the left foot can be moved to step forward until it is parallel to the right foot.
• Alternate the movement of both legs.

3. Rhythmic movement of the front step pattern or galoppas

How to do the front step pattern or galoppas, namely:

• The initial stance is standing straight with both hands placed on the waist.
• Starting on the first count, the right foot should step forward.
• By the time it reaches the second count, the left foot can be moved forward by stepping the right foot together.
• Next, both feet can step alternately for several counts forward alternately. (Counts can be adjusted according to the rhythm leader’s instructions or the rhythm beat of a song or music).

4. Rhythmic motion of a cross pattern

How to do cross pattern motion, namely:

• The movement begins with the initial attitude, namely standing straight with both hands that are right on the waist.
• Next, on the first count, the left leg can be crossed with the right leg through the front.
• Then, on the second count, the right foot can step towards the left side.
• This movement can be continued continuously. Up to the opposite with a 2/4 beat. Movement is done 4 x 8 counts.

5. The rhythmic movement of the side step pattern or called zijpas

How to do a side step pattern or called zijpas, namely:

• The side pattern movement starts with the initial attitude of standing straight with both hands placed on the waist.
• At the first count, the right foot can step towards the right side.
• Then, at the second count, the left foot can be moved to catch up with the right leg until it is tight or parallel.
• Next, do the same movement to the left side.
• Movements can be done repeatedly or alternately using a 4 x 8 count pattern.

6. The rhythmic motion of the jump pattern forward

How to do the forward jump pattern, namely:

• The forward jump movement begins with the initial attitude of standing upright with both hands on the waist.
• At the time of counting to one, the right leg jumps together swinging the left leg.
• Next, on the count of two, jump for the left leg while swinging the right leg.
• Do these movements alternately or repeatedly for 4 x 8 counts.

7. The rhythmic motion of the jump pattern by opening and closing the legs

How to do a jump pattern by opening and closing your legs, namely:

• Begin the movement with the initial attitude of standing straight with the position of both hands placed on the waist.
• On the first count, both legs can be moved open wide to the side.
• After that or the count of two, close both legs tightly and together again.
• Do this movement repeatedly and continuously according to the count applied (4 x 8 counts or more).

Benefits of Rhythmic Movement

After discussing various things about rhythmic motion, here are some of the benefits of rhythmic motion that Readers can feel. According to the book Multimedia-Based Rhythmic Gymnastic Movement Learning there are several benefits of rhythmic motion, including:

• Rhythmic motion can be used to burn excess fat, increase heart and lung endurance, improve the appearance of certain body parts.
• Rhythmic motion is a type of exercise or gymnastics that can be used to lose weight.
• If done lightly, the body’s system can be improved while eliminating bad habits, such as smoking.
• This sport can improve coordination, agility, endurance, flexibility, balance and various other activities.
• The body becomes healthier and the mood is happier because of the influence of music.

Thus the discussion about rhythmic motion as a sport that is very suitable for Readers to be fitter and healthier. 

Definition of Expansion – The term expansion is not something that is foreign to people in the business world. Expansion is generally carried out when the business has reached a point of growth or development and in an effort to generate more profits, where the company enlarges or increases the number of certain interests. Meanwhile, expansion is taken from the word expandere which is an absorption word in English expansion which means to spread.

To find out more about the expansion, you can see this article, Readers.

Definition of Expansion

In general, the meaning of expansion in the economic environment itself is an effort made to increase economic activity and growth of the business world. According to the Bank Indonesia dictionary, this economic expansion has meaning in economic development. In this case, development then follows a conjuncture pattern, namely the process of economic growth or decline that occurs continuously and alternately.

Usually, the marker of economic development is an increase in prices, an increase in the amount of money circulating among the people, an increase in total production, and also an increase in consumption.

Market expansion can be said as an activity that the company carries out with the aim of expanding new markets with various products that the company already has before. The purpose of the company to expand is to reach the market in a new location. By expanding, it is hoped that the company will be able to get new customers and introduce new products.

Meanwhile, from a business point of view, expansion is an effort to expand or enlarge the company’s business network as an effort to increase the company’s profits in the future. To find out the meaning of business expansion, you can refer to the following discussion.

Definition of Business Expansion According to Experts

The following is the definition of business expansion according to experts.

1. Financial Services Authority (OJK)

According to the OJK, business expansion is an activity aimed at expanding or enlarging the scale of a business, which is usually marked by the creation of a new market, expansion of facilities, and recruitment of new employees. In addition, according to the OJK, expansion can also refer to an increase in economic activity and the business world.

2. Bambang Riyanto

According to Bambang Riyanto, expansion in business is a company activity that aims to enable the expansion of business capital, both fixed capital and working capital, within a company.

3. Alex S. Nitisemito

Alex then explained expansion as a form of the company’s efforts to expand its market coverage and production capacity. According to Alex, the reason for this condition then occurred was because there was an increase in demand for the company’s product and service capacities.

4. Suad Husnan and Enny Pudjiastuti

According to Suad Husnan and Enny Pudjiastuti, expansion is a form of business expansion by adding capital, adding capacity, adding units to meet different production needs, and acquiring (merging) with several other companies.

Expansion Type

As previously mentioned expansion is a strategy to expand a business. Therefore, in its application it cannot be done haphazardly, companies must adjust to their business needs.

With careful planning, it will help minimize the risk of expansion failure, such as financial losses, ineffective management, instability, and so on.

In addition, the expansion itself has several types, including:

1. Mergers

The first type of expansion is a merger in which two or more companies are combined into one company. This type itself is done as an effort to expand the business. Companies that are more dominant will maintain their corporate identity, while other companies’ identities will become unclear. Before merging, it is important to know the reputation of the companies to be merged. The merger itself can be divided into three parts, namely:

• A conglomerate that acquired several companies.
• Horizontal merger where the company will then buy another company with another operational level or level.
• Vertical mergers are companies that are in the same industry but have differences at the operational level.

2. Acquisition

The purpose of acquisitions in expansion is to increase the company’s income. Acquisition as a take over process or acquisition of share ownership or company assets driven by one or a certain group of investors.

The purpose of the acquisition is as a form of expansion by increasing the company’s income or to increase income from other sectors. It is possible that a company will then acquire a raw material producer so that later the company can continue to maintain it.

3. Hostile takeover

The next type of merger is a hostile takeover in which forced acquisitions are made to a company. In other words, a business person will then buy shares of other companies. This is done when the shareholder opens an offer to his business.

Then, these shares will be acquired at a price higher than the market price. In addition, the company will also immediately change ownership, usually what happens is a change in management and employees as a whole.

4. Leveraged buyouts

The leveraged buyout of expansion then requires a large amount of capital. Leveraged buyout is an attempt to own a business by borrowing money and making purchases. Expansion of this type can be said to be one of the expansions that will spend quite a lot of capital. Of course this is because money or capital is obtained by way of debt to other parties.

5. Internal Growth Expansion

One type of expansion is internal growth expansion. In this type of expansion, the company then relies on internal resources and capabilities to increase business size. Some examples of activities that are generally carried out in an internal growth expansion are:

• Buy new machines or build new factories to increase production capacity.
• Reach a wider range of consumers by opening new outlets or branch offices.
• Increase advertising costs with the aim of increasing sales
• Offering a new variant of an existing product to the market.
• Expanding market segments, for example by reaching other segments related to the current segment. Expanding into new markets, for example by selling products abroad.

6. External Growth Expansion

As the name implies, this type of expansion then involves external parties to grow. External growth expansion itself incorporates the resources and capabilities of other firms. This form of external expansion can be carried out in several ways, including:

a. Acquiring another company

This acquisition itself involves taking over and controlling another company. After the acquisition, the target company then becomes a subsidiary of the acquirer. However, each then still operates independently.

b. Merger with another company

This merger is the result of the merger of the two companies into one larger entity so that after the merger, only one company survives.

c. Establishing a joint venture

Under the joint venture, the two companies then agreed to build a new business. This strategy itself allows companies to combine capacities, expertise, technology, and complementary resources. The company will share the risk with business partners.

• Building a strategic alliance – Finally, this strategic alliance then involves an agreement between two or more companies to be able to share resources and carry out a particular project. Each of them would then remain independent of the other.

3 Stages of Expansion

1. Make Careful Planning

A business can be considered ready to grow if the company has good planning, and this also supports the expansion process. For this reason, companies should ask a number of questions, such as what goals do they want to achieve by expanding their business? Then what’s the target? How will the business develop in the next five years? as well as how the company’s current sales?

If this question has been answered, at least the company will get four main conclusions:

• First, the business is ready to expand because the sales flow is smooth and it already has many regular customers.
• Second, the business must then have a product, brand, and can be self-produced within the next five years.
• Third, market share has begun to expand and already has a lot of demand, so new markets must be presented to accommodate business sales.
• Fourth, new employees are needed so that every form of operational activity can be carried out on an ongoing basis and so that the sales process can be more effective and faster.

2. Determine How the Business Model

Later when carrying out expansion activities, the current business model will no longer be the same as the future business model. In the application of length, SOP or Standard Operating Procedures are also needed, and if you want to add employees, then business activities will also change slowly.

In addition, the method of selling will also of course change over time. For this reason, it is very important to determine a business model so that it can help determine the right standard or method which can then be used in business activities.

More than that, if you have determined a new target market and already have many types of new products that are very varied, then you must also determine what methods should be applied to reach a larger target market, gain engagement, and carry out sales actions within your target market. the market.

3. Prepare the Capital Required During the Expansion Process

Business capital will certainly be needed in carrying out expansion activities. This capital itself is needed to rent or build a new building, buy an online store, also pay employees, build a physical store to build a production factory or warehouse.

You can also get this capital from the profit of the sales process. Apart from that, you can also make capital loans. Applying for a business capital loan does not always indicate that the business is unhealthy or unable to expand. Sometimes, applying for a business capital loan is also needed by business people to manage the company’s financial cash flow.

Expansion Example

Many activities can then be carried out through business expansion, starting from opening a new branch, also building partnerships with other companies, creating new products, increasing marketing and many more. One example of business expansion is:

• Semen Gresik Tbk, where they set up a holding company or holding company for Semen Gresik, as well as expanding by opening new branches or agencies under it. Business expansion in the sense of expanding business operations to other countries or abroad is one of the strategic agendas for a company. This is because overseas expansion has very important implications in maximizing business growth. For example:
• Alibaba Group Holding Ltd is one of many multinational companies (corporations) which are currently developing rapidly in the field of digital business (e-commerce). Alibaba Group is also actively expanding its business to various parts of the world. The European and American regions have succeeded in becoming its expansion targets.

Thus the discussion of the definition of expansion to examples of expansion. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful as well as add insight to Readers.

Understanding Generator – In everyday life, of course, we are familiar with electric generators. Usually, this tool is then needed in buildings that require a constant source of electricity, such as sewage treatment plants, hotels, airports, and hospitals. With a generator, it is able to prevent discontinuity and interruption of business operations. An electric generator is a device that produces electrical energy from a mechanical energy source, usually by means of electromagnetic induction.

Simply put, a generator is a machine with motion (mechanical) energy that is capable of converting it into electrical (electrical) energy. There are various sources of motion energy from generators. For example, in a wind power plant , this generator can move because of the wind that drives the wheel to rotate. So, what are the functions of the generator and how does it work? Check out the full review below:

Definition of Generators

An electric generator is a machine used to generate electrical energy from mechanical energy sources. The working principle of an electric generator is electromagnetic induction. Based on the type of electric current, generators are then divided into direct current generators and alternating current generators.

The difference between the two is in the use of a commutator in direct current generators and slip rings in alternating current generators. The working process of an electric generator is also known as a power plant. An electric generator also has much in common with an electric motor, but an electric motor is a device that converts electrical energy into mechanical energy.

In addition, the generator also encourages electric charge to be able to move through an external electric circuit, but the generator does not create electricity that is already in the windings of the coils. This is analogous to a water pump, which then creates a flow of water but does not create any water in it.

The source of mechanical energy can then be a reciprocating or turbine steam engine, water falling through a turbine or waterwheel, internal combustion engines, wind turbines, hand cranks, solar energy as well as the sun, compressed air, or whatever source of mechanical energy is passing through it. .

Generator Type

1. Direct Current Generator

The working basis of the direct current generator is the occurrence of electromagnetic induction events. Direct current generators can also produce induced failures in one direction by changing the shape of their terminal rings. The terminal ring in this form is also known as a split ring or commutator.

A direct current generator will only use a single ring commutator that is split in half, thereby producing direct current, while an alternating current generator has two separate rings.

When an electromotive force arises, the contact with the load circuit then switches terminals, so that the output voltage has only one sign and produces a direct current. The addition of the number of coils which are then connected to the commutator with a commutator ring consisting of several segments, is also able to reduce the ripple in the direct current voltage.

2. Alternating Current Generator

The first alternating current system was made by William Stanley in Great Barrington, Massachusetts. The project for making this system itself was funded by Westinghouse. At the same time, the alternating current system was traded by Nikola Tesla.

The use of alternating current continued to increase after CS Bradley made a 3-phase alternating current generator in 1887. This three-phase alternating current generator has high efficiency, so it has been used as a general power generator in the world since 1900 AD.

This alternating current generator consists of a coil and a coil of wire which is rotated in a magnetic field. The inside of the alternating current generator is also known as the armature. The contents of the armature are iron cylinders that are used as a place for coils of wire to be wound.

In addition, the generator terminal also has two rotating rings which are connected to the electrical load by means of soft copper bushings. The magnetic field is then formed by permanent magnets or electromagnets. The energy to rotate the armature can be in the form of human power, combustion, or the potential energy of water

Generator Working Principle

In a journal published by the Sriwijaya State Polytechnic, it is explained that the basic principle of a generator is alternating current. The principle of the generator also uses Faraday’s law which states that if a conductor is in a changing magnetic field, an electromotive force will form on this conductor. The magnitude of the generator voltage will then depend on:

• Rotation speed(N)
• The number of wires in the coil that cut the flux (Z)
• The amount of magnetic flux which is then generated by the magnetic field (f)
• Generator Construction

It was also explained that the number of poles of this alternating current generator depends on the speed of the rotor and the frequency of the generated EMF. This relationship can be determined by the following equation: F = pn/120 Description: f = voltage frequency (Hz) p = number of poles on the rotor n = rotor speed (rpm).

As we know that an electric generator is a device that converts mechanical energy into electrical energy, the generator does not create electrical energy, but only uses the supplied mechanical energy to drive electric charges.

In addition, the working principle of the synchronous generator is also based on electromagnetic induction, after the rotor is rotated by the prime mover, the poles on the rotor will rotate automatically. If the pole coil is supplied by direct voltage, a rotating magnetic field will arise on the surface of the pole.

Meanwhile, modern generators work based on the principle of electromagnetic induction which was first discovered by Michael Faraday in 1831. Faraday also discovered that electricity can be induced by moving an electric conductor, such as a wire containing an electric charge, into a magnetic field.

Therefore, this movement can create a voltage difference between the two ends of the cable or the electric conductor, which in turn causes electric charges to flow and produce an electric current.

Generator Function

The main function of the generator is to produce electrical energy by changing the force of motion in it. In addition, the number of electronic equipment today also makes generators have many functions. The functions of generators in everyday life include the following:

1. Power Plant

The generator is the main component that can generate electricity. The sources of energy used are various, such as water, sun, natural gas, ocean waves, wind, and so on. Thus, the function of the generator is to make us not easily run out of electrical energy.

2. As a Power Backup

As we know, there are lots of public places that use generators. Of course, it is used as a backup power supply. Some places, such as supermarkets, hotels, and hospitals, use generators in the form of generators to store electricity in them.

With a generator, this backup electricity can then help with daily activities. That way, you don’t have to worry anymore in the event of a power outage.

Generator Development

Before the relationship between magnetism and electricity was discovered, generators used electrostatic principles. The Wimshurst machine also uses electrostatic induction or “influence”. A Van de Graaff generator that uses one of two mechanisms:

• Transfer of charge from high-voltage electrodes
• The charge created by the triboelectric effect by means of the separation of two insulators

1. Faraday

Soundproof 3-phase generator made circa 1831-1832 Michael Faraday later discovered that a potential difference is produced between the ends of an electrical conductor which moves perpendicular to a magnetic field. He also built the first electromagnetic generator based on this effect by using a copper disc rotating between the poles of a horseshoe magnet.

This process also generates a small direct current. In addition, the design of the device, dubbed the ‘Faraday disk’, is inefficient due to the flow of electric current in the opposite direction to the part of the disk that is not affected by the magnetic field. The current induced directly under the magnet will flow back to the disk outside of the influence of the magnetic field.

The reverse current also limits the power delivered to the conducting wires and induces the heat generated by the copper discs. The homopolar generator which was later developed was able to solve this problem by using a number of magnets arranged around the edge of the disc to be able to maintain a stable magnetic field effect.

Another weakness of the development of this generator is the small voltage generated by this tool. This can occur due to a single current path through the magnetic flux.

2. Dynamo

The dynamo was the first electric generator capable of delivering power to industry, and is still the most important generator used in the 21st century. Dinamo also uses the principle of electromagnetism to be able to convert mechanical rotation into alternating current electricity.

The first dynamo based on Faraday’s principle was built in 1832 by Hippolyte Pixii, a French instrument maker. This tool also uses a permanent magnet that is rotated by a “crank”.

This rotating magnet is positioned so that its north and south poles pass through a piece of iron wrapped in wire. Pixii also discovered that magnets rotate by producing a pulse of current in the wire each time a pole passes through the coil.

Furthermore, the magnetic north and south poles induce currents in opposite directions. By adding a commutator, Pixii will convert alternating current into direct current.

Closing

From all the discussion above, it can be said that a generator is a machine that has the function of producing electrical energy and also providing electricity reserves. Therefore, these generators are usually owned by hospitals, supermarkets, and so on. Generators that function to provide electrical energy reserves are usually known as generators.

Thus the discussion about generators, starting from their understanding, functions, to their working principles. Hopefully all the discussion above can provide benefits as well as add to your insight.

Definition of Echo and Reflected Sound – In everyday life, did Readers ever realize that all sounds that Readers can hear actually have the ability to reflect?

Just like a basketball being bounced off a wall, sounds that can be produced by anything including humans, animals, plants, and also inanimate objects also have the ability to bounce, it’s just that the reflected sound has no form because sound also has no exist, right? Readers needs to know that sound is also a form of energy that can be utilized in human life.

Then, what are the kinds of reflected sounds? Come on, let’s look at the following article so that Readers can understand reflected sounds better!

What Is Meant By Sound?

Before discussing the types of reflected sounds, Readers needs to first understand the meaning of the sounds. Sound and sound actually have the same meaning. Sound can be produced by all things including humans, animals, plants, and even inanimate objects around.

According to the Big Indonesian Online Dictionary, sound means something that can be heard by the human ear. If illustrated, sound has a wave-like shape. As previously explained, sound is also a form of energy. Sound energy generally comes from vibrating objects and vibrations can propagate.

The definition of sound is a longitudinal wave that propagates tightly and at the same time tenuously formed by air molecules and can be generated from a sound source that is capable of vibrating. From the propagation of the sound will later be heard by the ear and in the end can be understood by the brain.

In general, sound can be measured using Hertz (Hz) units, and the loudness of sound can be measured using decibel units.

What Is Sound Energy?

Sound energy is all abilities that arise as the influence of sound.

When Readers is talking, he must make a sound, or when he doesn’t intend to make a sound, he can still make a sound, for example when he runs, hits, and opens a door. Well, of course all of these sounds are produced by a sound source.

Sound Source

Sound sources are all objects that have the ability to be able to produce a sound and have various types because not all sounds can be produced by just one source. An example is the ukulele, the source of the sound is in the form of strings. In addition, the workings of sound sources to be able to produce a sound also have various kinds.

Discussion about sound sources will not be far from resonance. Resonance is the vibration of an object caused by another object, so that the sound produced becomes louder and stronger. The existence of this resonance is generally used for musical events, using a resonator.

The existing sound has several characteristics, namely strong, weak, shrill, and low pitch.

Based on the frequency, sound can be divided into 3 types, namely:

1. Infrasound

Infrasound is a sound that is classified as weak because it has a number of sound vibrations of less than 20 Hz per second. The human ear is generally unable to hear infrasound, only certain animals can hear it, such as cats, crickets, dogs, and so on.

2. Audiosonics

Audiosonics is a type of sound that has a number of vibrations of approximately 20-20,000 Hz per second. With this number of vibration sizes, audiosonic sounds can reach and be heard by the human ear.

3. Ultrasonic

Ultrasonic is a type of sound whose frequency is very strong, and its level is above audiosonic sound. The number of sound vibrations is more than 20,000 Hz per second. However, even though the ultrasonic sound has a strong vibration, the human ear is unable to perceive and hear it. Just like infrasound, ultrasonic sound can only be heard by certain animals. For example, like bats and dolphins.

Kinds of Reflective Sounds

Readers  must know that reflected sound is sound that is created as a result of a sound wave hitting a reflective plane and then the sound wave is reflected back. There are three types of reflected sound, namely echo, echo, and amplify the original sound.

1. Echo Sound

Echo sound is a type of reflected sound that occurs after the original sound. This means that the sound of the reflected sound will be heard with a short pause after the original sound has been created. Echoes can occur because there is a considerable distance between the sound source and the reflecting wall.

In contrast to the echo type of reflected sound, this echo sound often occurs on hillsides, cliffs, caves, and soccer stadiums. The similarity of these places is that the distance between the reflecting walls is more than 20 meters. For example, when Readers is in a cave, when Readers shouts “Hi”, then the reflected sound of the word “Hi” will come out after the original sound is no longer heard.

2. Echoes

An echo sound is a type of reflected sound that sounds as if it is not clear, even the clarity is not the same as the original sound. This echo sound can occur as a result of mixing the original sound with the reflected sound.

Reverberation generally occurs at a distance between reflective walls of about 10 to 20 meters, such as inside buildings, such as cinemas, concert halls and conference halls.

For example, when Readers is watching a concert from a singer he likes, then the singer shouts the word “Biar”, later as a result of the echo sound, Readers will listen to the word “Biar” with a pause. Here’s an illustration:

Original sound: bi – ar

Reflected sound: bi — ar

Sounds heard: Let ———— ar

3. Amplify Original Sound

The next type of reflected sound is that which has the properties of amplifying the original sound. In contrast to the type of reflected sound that has been described, in this type the reflected sound will actually become an amplifier for the original sound, this can happen because the distance between the sound source and the reflecting wall is close enough, so the time needed by the sound to reflect back the sound also tend to be shorter.

Therefore, this type of reflected sound will be heard and considered at the same time as the original sound. The original sound can actually sound louder, generally this happens when Readers sings in a small closed room like a bathroom.

Whether the sound is strong or not depends on several factors, namely:

• Resonance
• Amplitude (maximum deviation of a wave that will affect the sound strength) of the sound source
• The distance between the sound source and the listener
• The distance between the listener and the reflecting wall

Benefits of Reflected Sound:

• Can be used to measure the depth of the sea, especially in ultrasonic sound.
• To detect the fetus in the womb, usually using infrasound.
• To detect damage to a metal.
• There are speakers on the radio, television, to cell phones. Usually using audiosonic sound.
• For the search for ships or metal treasures on the seabed.

Properties of Sound Energy

Sound energy has special properties, namely it can move to another place, by propagating in certain media. Not only that, sound can also be absorbed and can be reflected.

1. Sound Can Travel Through Liquids, Gases, and Solids

Many think that sound can only travel through solids, when in fact, sound can also travel through gases and liquids.

The vibrations created by sound will propagate through the waveform. Therefore, the propagation is called a sound wave. Well, these sound waves can propagate through liquids, gases, and solids. Even the fastest propagation is when through the air. An example is when ringing the gong.

• Through solid objects, for example when playing a can phone using strings and cans. Sound waves will propagate through the strings to the end of the phone and up to the ear.
• Through liquid objects such as when a rock falls into water
• Through gaseous substances, for example when there is thunder in the rainy season

You also need to know, Readers , that sound cannot propagate in a vacuum. A vacuum is a room that has no air in it.

2. Sound Can Be Absorbed and Reflected (Reflection)

When sound waves propagate in solid objects and the surface of these objects, the sound will be absorbed and even reflected. For example, if sound hits the surface of a cave, it will reflect and create an echo.

3. Sounds Can Experience Refraction (Refraction)

Not only light can experience refraction, but also sound. This is because light and sound both have waves, where the main characteristic of the wave is refraction.

An example of sound refraction is when the sound of thunder sounds louder at night than during the day.

This can happen because during the day, the upper layer of air tends to be colder than the lower layer. Therefore, the speed of sound propagation becomes smaller in cold temperatures when compared to hot temperatures, thus making the speed of sound in the upper layers of air smaller than that in the lower layers.

4. Sound Can Experiencing Flexion (Diffraction)

Sound waves are very easy to experience bending or diffraction because sound waves in the air have wavelengths in the range of centimeters to several meters.

An example of this sound diffraction is when Readers can already hear the sound of the engine of a vehicle at the corner, even though Readers has not seen the vehicle because it is blocked by the buildings around the corner.

5. Sounds Experiencing Mixture (Interference)

It turns out that sound waves can experience symptoms of combination or interference. Well, this interference is divided into two types, namely constructive interference (sound amplification) and destructive interference (sound attenuation).

An example of sound wave interference is when Readers is between two loudspeakers with the same frequency and amplitude, then later Readers will hear alternating loud and weak sounds.

Sound Requirements

Even though anyone and anything can produce sound, in order for it to be heard by human ears and animal ears, it also requires several conditions, namely there must be a medium, a source of sound, and a listener.

1. There is Medium

Previously, it was explained that sound can travel through solid, liquid, and gas objects. Well, these objects can become a medium for sound propagation to occur. Therefore there is a statement that sound cannot be produced in a vacuum.

The existence of the medium also influences the speed of sound. An example is the sound of thunder. The sound of thunder can be caught by human and animal ears because it propagates through the air. If the air has a temperature of around 20०C then the speed of sound is 343 m per second.

Another thing if the medium is a liquid, then the speed of sound is around 1,500 m per second. The speed of sound is generally used to search for treasure or ships that have sunk on the seabed.

Then in the medium in the form of solid objects, especially steel, the speed of propagation is around 6,000 m per second. This experiment on the speed of propagation of sound in a solid medium can be done simply by tapping the table with a pencil.

2. There is a Sound Source

The source of the sound is the vibration of the object that produces the sound. If Readers’ ear is closer to the sound source, the sound will be clearer and louder. Examples of sound sources are the sound of a guitar coming from plucked strings, the sound of a drum coming from animal skins being beaten, and so on.

3. There is a Listener

So, those who can hear various sounds around Readers are humans and animals. How can sound be heard? Namely by relying on the sense of hearing in the form of ears.

Sound Characteristics

• Tone is a sound that has a regular frequency
• Wheezing is a sound that has an irregular frequency
• Timbre, namely the color of the sound, which is in the form of the overall auditory impression obtained by the ear of Readers from the sound source.
• A boom is a sound that has a large amplitude and is heard suddenly.

Benefits of Sound for Human Life

The presence of sound is of course very beneficial for human life in various fields, even including in the health sector though. So, here are the benefits of sound:

• Detects the presence of tumors in the human body.
• Destroys kidney stones in the human body.
• Ultrasound (Ultrasonography), which is a method for detecting a fetus in a mother’s womb. In this case, it will usually use ultrasonic waves.
• To measure the depth of the sea, detect the presence of mines, search for sunken ships, and locate fish groups using SONAR (Sound Navigating Ranging) tools.
• To detect the oil and mineral content in the earth, especially using ultrasonic waves.
• To measure the length of cave passages and investigate metal damage, using sound reflection.
• Tones sung by humans can be used to study the expression of human thoughts, motivations and emotions.

Well, that’s an explanation of the types of reflected sounds and the benefits of sound for everyday human life. Even though sound is closely related to Readers’ life , without realizing it, it turns out that the existence of sound is very useful

 

Definition of waves – Waves are vibrations that propagate. The ideal form of a wave will follow the sinusoid movement.

In addition to electromagnetic radiation, and perhaps gravitational radiation, which can travel through a vacuum, waves are also present in the medium (which due to deformation can generate spring forces) which can travel and transfer energy from one place to another without causing the particles of the medium to move randomly. permanent; i.e. no mass transfer.

The following is an explanation of the definition of waves. Read more!

Definition of Waves

Based on the explanation above, the notion of a wave can be defined as a propagation symptom of a vibration or disturbance. Understanding Waves will continue to occur if the source of this vibration vibrates continuously. Waves carry energy from one place to another .

A medium is called:

• Linear if the different waves at all given points in the medium can be summed.
• Limited if limited, otherwise it is “infinite”.
• Uniform if the physical characteristics do not change at different points.
• Isotropic if the physical properties are “same” in different directions.

A simple example of a wave, if we tie one end of a rope to a pole, and shake the other end of the rope, many hills and valleys will form on the shaken rope. This is what is called a wave.

In the information age like today, waves play a very important role in human life. One of them is the fetus that is still in the womb can be seen with the naked eye because there are ultrasonic waves.

Other examples can be seen in the following events.

• We can hear music because there are sound waves .
• Kidney stones are destroyed with ultrasonic waves.
• The distance from Venus to Earth can be measured with great precision.
• The state of the bowels of the earth and its contents can be known with the help of seismic waves.
• We can enjoy radio and television because there are radio waves.
• We can communicate with each other by phone and many other things.

In general, waves are divided into groups of waves based on the direction of propagation and wave groups based on the medium of propagation. Based on the direction of propagation, waves can be grouped into longitudinal waves and transverse waves. Based on the medium of propagation, waves are grouped into mechanical waves and electromagnetic waves.

Wave Type

When we throw a stone into a lake or pool of water, circular waves are formed and spread out. Waves will also travel along a string stretched straight across a table if we vibrate one end back and forth . Water waves and waves on the rope are two common examples of mechanical waves.

If a wave propagates to cause motion in the medium in which the wave propagates it is called a mechanical wave . On a mechanical wave , travel Waves in the medium occur due to interactions in the medium. The stronger the interaction in a medium , the wave travel will be faster.

Travel pace the wave depends on the inertial medium where the greater the inertial medium, the slower the wave will travel . In contrast to mechanical waves, electromagnetic waves propagate without the need for an intermediary medium such as radio, microwave, infrared, UV and X-ray waves.

1. Types of Waves Based on the Medium

Based on the discussion above , waves can be divided into two types based on the medium of propagation , namely :

• Mechanical wave _ _, which is a type of wave that requires an intermediate medium in its propagation. Examples are waves on a string, water waves, and sound waves.
• Electromagnetic waves _, which is a type of wave that can propagate even though there is no medium. Based on the frequency, the sequence of electromagnetic waves, namely radio and television waves , microwaves , infrared rays , visible rays , ultraviolet rays , X rays , and gamma rays.

2. Types of Waves Based on the Vibration Direction

Based on the direction of vibration, waves can be divided into two types, namely transverse and longitudinal.

a. Transverse Wave

If we observe a string wave , the pattern that is formed propagates along the rope, while the movement of the rope components (distortions) occurs in a direction perpendicular to the rope. Waves with the direction of vibration perpendicular to the direction of propagation are called transverse waves . For sound waves that are produced due to pressure, the direction of vibration that occurs is in the direction of the wave propagation. An example is sound waves in air.

This wave is generated by periodically applying pressure to one part of the air , so that the air molecules around that area also vibrate . The vibrating molecules strike the molecules around them that are at rest, so the molecules that were initially at rest also vibrate in the same direction. And so on , so that the molecules that are farther apart vibrate. This is the phenomenon of wave propagation. The vibration direction is exactly the same as the wave propagation direction.

Description:
I : wave crest .
II : wave hill .
III : valley wave .
IV : one wave cycle abbreviated by one wave .
V : the length of one wave cycle (the distance between the crest of the wave to the crest of the next wave) abbreviated by the wavelength. VI : wave amplitude = biggest wave deviation.

The phase or phase angle of the wave is the same as the phase of the vibration that caused it. In the picture above, if the phase angle at point A is 0 ⁰ , the phase angle at point B = 90 ^o , point C = 180 ^o , point D = 270 ^o , point E = 360 ^o , point F = 630 ^o . As for the magnitude of the phase is as follows.

b. Longitudinal Waves

Waves with the direction of vibration the same as the direction of wave propagation are called longitudinal waves.

In the picture above it appears that the direction of vibration is parallel to the direction of wave propagation. A series of density and strain propagates along the length of the spring. Density is the area when the spring coils approach each other, while strain is the area where the spring coils move away from each other .

While transverse waves have patterns of peaks and valleys, longitudinal waves consist of patterns of density and strain. Wavelength is the distance between successive densities or strains ; _ _ what is meant here is the distance from two points that are the same and successive in density or strain.

One of An example of a longitudinal wave is sound waves in air. Air as a medium for sound wave propagation, contracts and stretches along the direction of air wave propagation. Unlike water waves or string waves, sound waves cannot be seen by us eye.

Properties of Waves

1. Reflection or Reflection of Waves

Of course, friends already understand very well about this reflection, so in general I think we agree. In wave reflection, the law of wave reflection applies :

The angle of incidence of the wave is equal to the angle of reflection of the wave. The incident wave, reflected wave, and normal line lie on the same plane.

2. Refraction Wave

The change in the direction of the wave when the wave enters a new medium causing the wave to move at a different speed is called refraction . In refraction there is a change in the rate of propagation. The wavelength increases or decreases with changes in speed, but there is no change in frequency. This event is shown in the following figure.

In this picture the wave speed in medium m 2 is smaller than medium 1. In this case , the direction of the wave bends so that its propagation is more nearly perpendicular to limit. So, the angle of refraction (θ ₂ ) , is smaller than the angle of incidence ( θ ₁ ), so the Snell’s Law equation is obtained as follows.

or

or

Snell’s law can be used to calculate the angle of incidence or the angle of refraction, and in experiments to calculate the refractive index of a material.

In 1637, René Descartes independently used the heuristic argument of the conservation of momentum in the sine form in his Discourse on Method to explain this law. Light is said to have a higher speed in a denser medium because light is a wave that arises as a result of the disturbances of the plenum , the continuous substance that makes up the universe. In French, Snell’s law is called la loi de Descartes or loi de Snell-Descartes .

Previously, between 100 and 170 AD Ptolemy of Thebaid found an empirical relation of the angle of refraction which was only accurate at small angles. The concept of Snell’s law was first described with mathematical accuracy in 984 by Ibn Sahl of Baghdad in his manuscript On Burning Mirrors and Lenses .

With this concept, Ibn Sahl was able to create lenses that could focus light without geometric aberrations, known as aspherical lenses. The Ibn Sahl manuscript was discovered by Thomas Harriot in 1602, but was not published although he worked with Johannes Kepler in this area.

In 1678, in Traité de la Lumiere , Christiaan Huygens explained Snell’s law from the derivation of Huygens’ principle of the wave nature of light. Snell’s law is said to apply only to isotropic or “regular” mediums under conditions of monochromatic light which only has a single frequency, so it is reversible.

Snell’s law is translated into ratios as follows

 

3. Mixture (Interference) Waves

Wave fusion occurs when there are waves with different frequencies and phases that meet each other. There will be two results of wave interference, namely constructive (mutually reinforcing) and destructive (mutually weakening). Constructive interference occurs when two waves meet on the same phase, whereas destructive interference occurs when two waves meet on opposite phases.

4. Deflection (Diffraction) Waves

Wave diffraction is the deflection or scattering of waves when they pass through a gap. Diffraction symptoms will become more obvious if the gap is narrower.

5. Wave Dispersion

Wave dispersion is the event of the decomposition of light rays which are a mixture of several wavelengths into their components due to refraction . Dispersion occurs because of the difference in deviation for each wavelength, which is caused by the difference in the speed of each wave when it passes through the refracting medium. If a ray of white light falls on one side of the prism, that white light will unravel into its components and the full spectrum of visible light is visible .

6. Wave Dispolarization

Wave dispolarization is the absorption of part of the direction of the wave vibration , so that it only has one direction. Polarization will only occur in transverse waves, because the wave direction matches the polarization direction, and vice versa, it will be absorbed if the wave direction does not match the polarization direction of the gap.

Utilization of Waves

There are so many uses of waves taking into account the various characteristics of the waves that are around us. Some of them include:

• TV and radio waves for communication.
• Microwaves are used to cook food or what we know as microwaves .
• Sound waves that are very helpful in the health sector , namely ultrasound on ultrasound equipment to check for the presence or absence of disease.

Wave Magnitude

The magnitudes of the waves include:

1. Wavelength

When you observe waves on the surface of the water, then drop a rock on the surface of the water, that’s where peaks and valleys will be seen which are called the wavelength, which is the distance between two adjacent peaks or the distance between two adjacent valleys.

2. Fast Propagation of Waves

Fast wave propagation to see how fast the waves move from one place to another.

3. Deviation

As long as the wave propagates, the deviation in a medium is always changing , starting from its minimum value to its maximum value. The maximum and minimum values ​​are obtained periodically.

4. Amplitude

Amplitude is a non-negative scalar measurement of the magnitude of the oscillation of a wave. Amplitude can also be defined as the farthest distance or deviation from the equilibrium point in sinusoidal waves that we study in physics and mathematics – geometric subjects. The amplitude in the international system is usually symbolized by (A) and has units of meters (m).

5. Period

The period is the oscillation time needed by an object to return to its original oscillation. Suppose a point is at zero deviation .

6. Frequency

Frequency is the number of oscillations per second in a medium. To calculate frequency, one sets the time interval, counts the number of times the event occurs, and divides this count by the length of the time interval. In the International System of Units, the results of this calculation are expressed in units of hertz (Hz), which is the name of a German physicist named Heinrich Rudolf Hertz who discovered this phenomenon for the first time. A frequency of 1 Hz denotes an event that occurs once per second.

 

where f is the frequency (hertz) and T the period (seconds or seconds).

In addition, the frequency is also related to the number of vibrations with the formula:-

In rotating mechanical devices, the measurement of vibration frequency per minute, abbreviated r/min or rpm, is often used. 60 rpm is equal to one hertz.

7. Oscillation Speed

Oscillations are periodic variations over time of a measurement result, for example a pendulum swing. The term vibration or vibration is often used synonymously with oscillation, although vibration actually refers to a specific type of oscillation, namely mechanical oscillation.

Oscillations do not only occur in a physical system, but also in biological systems and even in society. Oscillations are divided into two types, namely simple harmonic oscillations and complex harmonic oscillations. In simple harmonic oscillations there is simple harmonic motion, which can occur in an object, molecule, or atom.

For other terms in the results of electrical measurements, oscillations can be called flickers or disturbances that change the shape of the wave to be damaged/defective.

Oscillation speed to find out how fast there is a change in deviation in the medium. In transverse waves , the speed of oscillation is seen up and down the deviation, while for longitudinal waves , the speed of oscillation is seen from the fast vibration back and forth.

So, that’s a review of the meaning of waves and a complete explanation behind it. 

 

Definition of non-touch force and examples – Does Readers still remember the material about touch and non-touch force? Yep, that is physics material at the elementary and junior high school levels. At that school level, the discussion of touch and non-touch styles is really just the basics.

When Readers moved the chair, did he realize that at that time we were exerting a force on the chair?

Yep, a push or a pull that can cause inanimate objects around to move or move. Well, because there is a non-contact force, it means that there is also a touch force.

Apart from moving chairs, what else is an example of this non-touch force? Come on, see the following reviews!

Definition of Non-Touch Force

The non-contact force is a force that will work even though there is no touch to the object being addressed. In this case, the force released by the force source can still be “felt” by the object, even though the two are not in direct contact.

So, it can be said that objects can move or get the influence of a force even without human touch or a source of force. Some types of non-contact forces include gravitational forces, electric forces, and magnetic forces.

This non-touch force is of course different from the touch force, the difference lies in the “touch” given by the source of the force to the object being addressed. However, even though this non-contact force does not get a direct touch from the source, objects can still move. In conclusion, this non-contact force requires other means so that the object can move.

Gravity

The gravitational force is one type of non-contact force. In this gravitational force, all the particles in an object (which has mass) will appear attractive forces. This gravitational force is the source of the force not from humans, but from the sun or the earth.

An example is the force of gravity that comes from the earth. Planet Earth has a very large mass, so it produces a large gravitational force to be able to attract objects around it. These objects are the moon, meteors, to man-made satellites.

Even though planet Earth has a large gravitational force, the center of the universe is the sun. Therefore, the gravitational force on the sun causes the position of the planets around it to always be in accordance with the orbits and together around the sun as its axis.

Meanwhile, the gravitational force of the earth is not only on objects around it, but also living things and objects on planet earth. This gravitational force was proposed by Newton.

Earth’s Gravity

Previously, it was discussed that the gravitational force on the earth is not the greatest gravitational force, because the sun is the center of the solar system. So it can be said that planet Earth also “follows” the gravitational force of the sun.

Then, what about humans and objects on earth, do they follow the sun’s gravitational force? Of course not. Humans and objects that are around it follow the force of gravity of the earth.

Around 1687, a physicist as well as a mathematician, astronomer, chemist, philosopher and theologian, namely Sir Isaac Newton put forward the law of universal gravitation. The results of the idea were written in a journal entitled Philosophiae Naturalis Principia Mathematica and described the force of gravity in human everyday life.

In this idea, Newton stated that the fall of every object comes from the pull of the earth, with the following formula:

Why is there a formula? Of course there is, because the force of falling objects due to the pull of the earth can be calculated using a certain formula. Based on this formula, it is described as follows:

F = the magnitude of the gravitational force between the two masses

G = gravitational constant

m1 = mass of the first object

m2 = mass of the second object

r = distance between the two masses

A simple example to prove whether the earth’s gravitational force really exists is the fall of objects from top to bottom. Try throwing the ball up, of course the ball will come back down. If the ball bounces, it will definitely move from top to bottom.

It is the gravitational force that causes you, the people, your house, bridges, and all other objects on planet Earth to remain in a stable position and not scatter or float in the air.

Electric Force

Electric force is a force generated by electric charges, so that it can indirectly move objects. In the electric force, there is an attractive or repulsive force that arises from two objects with electrons.

On average, all objects around us have an electric charge or electrons, even if it’s water. There are two types of electric charge in an object, namely positive charge and negative charge.

Meanwhile, there are two types of electric forces, namely static electric forces and dynamic electric forces. An example of static electricity is a simple experiment between a scrap of paper and a plastic ruler.

If you’re curious, experiment with small scraps of paper and a plastic ruler. The plastic ruler is rubbed on the hair first, then stick it on the scrap of paper. Then the two will attract each other.

This happens because hair, especially when it is dry, has an excess of electrons. In the electric force, it is usually denoted by the letter F.

Static Electric Force

Static electricity is a term for a collection of electric charges that have a fixed or static amount, causing an imbalance of electric charges in or on the surface of an object.

An example of an experiment to prove the existence of static electricity is an experiment between small pieces of paper with a plastic ruler. When we rub a plastic ruler on our hair, the ruler becomes negatively charged, while the hair becomes positively charged. Now, when the two of them are brought together by rubbing them, it will make the materials release their charge until finally they are electrified or charged.

Dynamic Electric Force

In contrast to static electricity, this dynamic electric force has a moving electric source, namely direct current and alternating electric current. The use of this dynamic electric force is usually electronic goods that require electricity to flow through cables.

Electric field

The electric field is an area or room that is around electrically charged objects, so that these objects will feel or experience an electric force. The direction in the electric field varies.

The strength of the electric quantity on objects that are in an electric field depends on the magnitude of the Coulomb force per unit charge at a point.

 

 

Magnetic Force

Magnetism is the force of attraction or repulsion on magnetic objects. These objects usually occur in metal or iron objects. There are magnetic properties in an object that are obtained naturally and there are also those that must be deliberately made by humans, so that they become artificial magnets.

Every object around it basically has a small magnetic element called an elementary magnet. However, not all of these elementary elements are arranged in an orderly manner, there are also non-magnetic objects whose elementary magnetic directions are irregular.

This magnetic force is almost the same as the electric force due to the mutual attraction or pushing between the two objects.

Each magnet generally has two poles, namely the north pole and the south pole. For example, if you take a permanent magnet and cut it into smaller pieces, you will still get parts of the north pole and south pole, because the elementary magnetic elements are arranged in an orderly manner. Magnets also have certain properties, namely:

• Magnetic poles of the same kind (the north pole with the north pole; or the south pole with the south pole) then the two will repel each other.
• Magnetic poles are not the same (north pole and south pole) then the two will attract each other.

Magnetic field

The electric field is the area, area, or space around a magnet, where other magnets or other objects get magnetic influence so that they experience a magnetic force. Almost the same as the electric field huh…

The magnetic force that exists in this magnetic field when described, seems to have lines, which are as follows:

• Magnetic lines of force will always come out from the north pole to the south pole on a magnet.
• The density of lines of force per unit area that exists at a point, illustrates the strength of the magnetic field at that point.
• The greatest density of force lines can be observed at the magnetic poles. Therefore, the magnetic field is strongest in the polar regions.
• The farther from the poles, the smaller the density of the lines of force. This proves that the further away from the poles, the weaker the magnetic field will be.

Did Readers know that in the magnetic force there is an electric charge? Yep, in a magnetic field there are moving electric charges, called the Lorentz force. From this event, of course, it is used by humans for their daily needs.

Examples of Touchless Style in Everyday Life

Gravity

• Objects thrown up, will always fall downwards
• Humans can sleep on a bed quietly, not floating in the air (like in outer space, because there is no gravitational force)
• Humans can stand upright on the surface of the earth
• Means of transportation can walk upright on the surface of the earth, not hovering in the air (stable)
• Houses, bridges and buildings can stand upright and stably
• Slide game rides
• The planets in outer space rotate on their axis. If there were no gravitational force, the planets would be unstable and collide with each other.
• The fruit falls from the tree
• Drinking water is poured from the teapot
• Rainwater from the atmosphere falls downwards
• Tidal events
• Play basketball, volleyball and tennis
• The aircraft can be in the air and descend to the surface in a stable manner
• Tap water always falls downwards

Electric Force

• Got electric shock
• Lightning when it rains
• Use of batteries and lights
• Rub a plastic ruler on the hair and then bring it closer to the small pieces of paper
• Turn on the refrigerator, tv and other electronic equipment
• A plastic ruler is rubbed against a woolen cloth
• Sparks on vehicle tires, while on the highway
• Turn on the electric drill
• Use of photocopiers
• Charge cell phones and laptops
• Use of spray paint
• Use of laser printers

Magnetic Force

• The use of magnets on the refrigerator door, which allows the door and refrigerator body to stick together and then close tightly
• Use of magnets on microphones
• The use of magnets in loudspeakers on televisions, earphones or smartphones
• Electric motor
• Compass equipment
• Cars lifting junk and nails on the highway
• Metal Detector, to detect the presence of metal underground
• Turtle migration
• Magnets for notes on the fridge
• Magnets to stick the paper on the board
• Bird migration
• Darts game

Well, that’s an explanation of the non-touch force and examples in everyday life. Maybe we are not aware of the existence of some types of non-touch force, even though in fact it has great benefits for our daily life.

1.  

What is the meaning of style? As we know, force is a push and a push. However, style does not stop there. There are many things about style.

This article will discuss these matters. Starting from the definition of style, the characteristics of the style, the types of styles so that there are various styles. Make sure Readers reads it to the end to find out all the information about style.

Definition of Style

Forces can move free objects or objects that are not bound. In addition, the definition of force in physics is a quantity that has a certain magnitude and direction. Force is an interaction which, when acting alone, will cause a change in the state of motion of an object.

Forces can affect changes in motion, position or changes in the shape of objects. Style is an inseparable part of everyday human life. Style can start from many things.

Like body movement, moving things to do a job. It can be said that style is something that always accompanies human activity.

The concept of understanding force can be explained in Isaac Newton’s laws of motion. There are three legal terms defined in his work. The work is Principia Mathematica in 1687.

According to Newton’s first principle, an object that is at rest or moving at a uniform speed in a straight line will remain in that state. Until there is a force applied to it.

The second law says that when an external force acts on a body it will produce an acceleration. Acceleration or change in velocity of the body in the direction of the force. The magnitude of the acceleration will be directly proportional to the magnitude of the external force. And will be inversely proportional to the amount of matter in the object.

Newton’s third law states that when an object is given a force from another object, both objects will exert a force. The style is the same as the style of the first object. The principle of action and reaction will explain something. Explain why a force will tend to change the shape of an object. Regardless of whether the force will cause the object to move or not.

Style Properties

1. Force can change the shape of things

This property is one of the main stylistic properties. force can change the shape of an object or a particular object. For example, in clay. Through style, clay can be made into a shape. That is an example of the property of force in changing the shape of objects.

2. Forces can change the direction of objects

Not only the shape of objects, force can also change the direction of objects. Forces can change the direction of a moving object. An object in motion can be turned in another direction by means of a force.

An example is the game of football. When someone kicks a ball towards the kipper, the kipper can change the direction of the ball again. Through kick style, the kipper can make the ball away from the goal and himself.

3. Force can change a stationary object into motion

The nature of the next style is that it can change objects that are still to move. For example, like the objects around us. Like a silent table. Through a pulling or pushing force, the table can turn into a move.

4. Force can change a moving object into a stationary object

The nature of the force this time is the opposite of the previous point. Through force, objects in motion can become still. An example is the game of baseball. When someone catches the ball, the ball that was originally moving becomes still. This is one example of the nature of force that can change a moving object into a stationary object.

5. Force can change the speed of motion of objects

The fifth characteristic of force is that it can change the speed of the moving object. Through force, a moving object can be set its speed limit. Can be made slower or even faster.

For example, like driving a car. Through force, the car can be set speed. Cars can go very fast or very slow. It all depends on the force exerted by the person driving the car.

Style Types

Examples of touch forces include muscle force, frictional force and spring force. While the non-contact force is a type of force that occurs when the source of the force is not in contact. The point is that the source of the force does not experience direct contact with the object that receives the force. Examples of non-contact forces are gravitational forces, magnetic forces and electric forces.

Various Styles

1. Normal style

The normal force is a reaction force that arises when an object is placed. The position of the object is perpendicular to the plane surface. The magnitude of the normal force that occurs on an object is determined by the magnitude of the other force.

The force also acts on objects at the same time. For example, like books resting on a surface. Then the surface will exert an upward force on the book.

The goal is to prop the bobo off the books. Sometimes, the normal force is exerted horizontally between two objects that are touching each other. For example, someone who is leaning against a wall.

Then the wall will push the person who is leaning on it. the thrust given will be done horizontally. That is an example of the normal force.

2. Muscle Style

Muscular force is the type or type of force possessed by living things that have muscles. This muscle force arises because of a coordination. This coordination occurs between the muscular and skeletal structures of the body.

Muscle style is included in the touch force group. For example when there is someone who lifts weights. To be able to lift weights, the muscles in the body will coordinate.

That’s what can help someone to lift the burden. The muscles in the body will coordinate. This will allow the hands to move so that the existing burden will be lifted.

3. Spring style

Spring force is the force generated by a spring. The spring referred to here is a handle that has elastic properties. Spring force can appear because the spring is moving.

Like stretched or docked. It allows its shape to return to its original state after the force has occurred. For example, like people who are archery. When they want to shoot, someone will issue a force in the form of pulling hot children. The arrows will certainly stretch and bring out the style.

4. The force of gravity

Gravity is a type of attraction force. This gravitational force will pull on all objects with mass. The pull will lead to the surface.

The simplest example is the force of gravity on the earth. If there were no earth’s gravitational force, all objects on earth would certainly float. It’s the same as in outer space. Therefore, the earth attracts all existing objects so that these objects lead to the surface of the earth.

5. Friction force

Friction is a variety of forces that appear because there is a touch. The touch occurs directly between the two surfaces of the object. Frictional force has a direction that is always opposite.

The direction of the frictional force will be opposite to the direction the object is moving. The size of the frictional force will be determined by the surface of the object. As smooth or rough surface of the object.

The smoother the surface of the object, the smaller the friction force that appears. Conversely, the rougher the surface of the object, the greater the frictional force that appears. Friction is also divided into two, namely kinetic friction and static friction.

6. Electric force

Electric force is a type of force that comes from objects with an electric charge. These electrically charged objects will produce an electric field. An example is a fan. Through the flow of electricity, the fan can become motion energy which will then rotate.

7. Machine style

The next style is the engine style. Machine force is the force that arises as a result of the work of a machine. Examples include motorbike engines, cars or electronic equipment. Inside these objects is a machine.

Machine style is considered very effective in helping to relieve human work. That’s because it makes humans do not need to issue full force in using it. Thanks to the help of machines, things can run easily.

8. Magnetic force

The next kinds of forces are magnetic forces. The magnetic force is a consequence of the existence of the electromagnetic force. One of the four styles on a natural basis.

The magnetic force is caused by a moving charge. Two objects that contain a charge in the same direction in motion. The two objects each have a magnetic attraction.

Likewise, charged objects moving in opposite directions will have a repulsive force on each of them. The magnitude of the magnetic force between the two objects is uncertain. It depends on how far apart the two objects are. the direction of the force also depends on the direction of motion relative to the charge in each case.

9. Tension force

Tension forces are various forces whose channels use ropes, wires or cables. The force will appear when these objects are pulled tightly. The pull is through a force acting from the ends and opposite.

This tension force will be directed along the cable. Next, it will draw evenly on the object. The object in question is the object at the end of the cable in the opposite direction.

10. Air resistance force

This air resistance force is a special type of frictional force. This force will work on objects when moving in the air. Air resistance is often observed.

The goal is to counter motion in an object. This force can also be seen in moving objects. However, the movement occurred at high speed. Examples include skiers moving down a hill, skydrivers, or objects that have a large surface area.

Understanding Magnetic Force – Has Readers ever encountered magnetic objects? Talking about magnetic objects, something must be attached to something that can stick together. This can happen because the magnetic object has a magnetic force that can react with each other. In the study of physics, magnetic force is a theory that Readers might have encountered since he was in junior high school. 

So, Readers needs to know and understand more about the magnetic force because apart from being related to subjects at school, we will find many examples of the magnetic force in everyday life. The following is an explanation of the meaning, properties, benefits, and examples of using magnetic force in everyday life. 

DEFINITION OF MAGNETIC FORCES

Magnet is one of the elements that has the ability to attract other elements around it which have special properties to produce a force reaction. So every magnet must have a magnetic force to attract other objects around it. Of the various types of force, there is a magnetic force that we often encounter in everyday life, for example a pin attached to a magnet. 

So, the magnetic force is a form of force that has the ability to attract objects made of special materials caused by the presence of a magnet in it. Magnets have the ability to repel objects as well as being able to attract and keep other objects attached. Magnets will attract magnetic objects, while objects that cannot be attracted are non-magnetic objects or also called diamagnetic. 

The magnetic force is one part of the electromagnetic force, where the other four forces are the basic natural forces caused by charge movements. Because magnets only attract special objects, magnets can also not work or have no force at all, or even some special objects may reject the magnet. In this case there will be a tug of war if they contain charges with the same direction of motion. 

Meanwhile, it will move in the opposite direction if it has a repulsive force between the two objects. It is considered as a form of Attractive and Repulsive energy that exists between the magnetic poles and the electrically charged moving particles. This moving charge will then create a magnetic field that interacts to create a magnet. 

PROPERTIES OF MAGNETIC FORCES

Based on the explanation of the meaning of force and magnetism above, we can conclude that the magnetic force also has properties that characterize the symptoms of magnetic force. The following are the properties of the magnetic force that Readers needs to know: 

1. Has a Magnetic Field

In practice, the magnetic force has a magnetic field which is the area around the magnetic source that is still affected by the object’s magnetic force. The strength of the magnetic force on the magnetic field is not the same because the farther outside the magnetic field the weaker it is. 

2. Can Penetrate Objects

The force generated by the magnet can penetrate the particles of non-magnetic objects even if they are blocked by other objects. The penetrating power of the magnet can also be lost if the coating is too thick and overcomes the disproportionate strength of the magnetic force. 

3. Has a Repulsive and Attractive Force

Magnets have both attractive and repulsive forces because they have two poles, namely the north and south poles. If the second pole is brought closer to the same one, they will repel each other, otherwise if they are brought closer to a different pole, they will attract each other. 

4. Only Interesting Certain Objects Around It

Because it has a magnetic field, magnets can only attract objects that are around it. The distance a magnet can attract others also depends on the size of the magnet which can also create a larger magnetic field. 

5. Magnetism Can Weaken 

The magnetic force can also be weakened because it has a magnetic field and has a certain magnetic strength. The magnetic field will be denser the closer it is to the magnet, while the magnetic field will fade the closer it is to the magnet. 

TYPES OF MAGNETS

From the properties of the above magnets, magnets have several types of materials that can produce different magnetic forces. The following are the types of magnets that Readers needs to know:

1. Ferromagnetic Or Magnetic Materials

Ferromagnetism is a form of matter that can be strongly attracted by a magnet or has a very strong magnetic force. If this type of object is near a magnet, it will be attracted to the magnetic object. Because of the strong magnetic force on ferromagnets, this material can also be used as a magnet itself. Examples of magnetic or ferromagnetic objects are iron, nickel, steel, and cobalt. 

2. Paramagnetic

Paramagnetic is a non-magnetic material but can still be attracted by a magnet even though it has a weak magnetic force. Paramagnetic objects have unpaired electrons so they cannot align their magnetic moments in all directions. That is why its magnetic strength is very weak even in the presence of an external magnetic field. This magnetic moment will tend to adjust in the direction of the magnetic field that has been applied, so that it can strengthen it even more. Examples of paramagnetic objects are Oxygen, Manganese, Aluminum, Platinum, Lithium, and so on. 

3. Diamagnetic

Diamagnetic is a non-magnetic material that repels magnets. That means various diamagnetic objects cannot be attracted by a magnet at all even though they are located close to a very strong magnet. Diamagnetic is a material that does not have unpaired electrons. 

Almost all of these materials have a diamagnetic material so they have a tendency to oppose the existing magnetic field. The material is finally repelled by the magnetic field. Examples of non-magnetic or diamagnetic objects are zinc, mercury, gold, and so on. 

Of the types of magnets above, magnets are then divided into several forms as follows:

• Bar magnets are shaped like bars or blocks or cubes
• Cylindrical magnets are shaped like long tubes
• A needle magnet is shaped like a compass needle with both pointed ends or magnetic poles
• U magnets (shoeshoe magnets) are shaped like a horseshoe or like the shape of the letter U
• Ring magnets are round like rings
• Chip magnets are shaped like metal strips

BENEFITS OF MAGNETIC FORCES 

Readers needs to know that physics studies related to magnetic forces can be easily found around the environment where they are used. Readers must have been unable to compete with the benefits of the magnetic force because he can find it in his daily needs. Following are the benefits of the magnetic force in everyday life that Readers needs to know so he can make the most of it:

1. Attracts Other Things

Magnets have the main benefit of attracting other objects, especially objects that are made of special materials, such as steel and iron. This magnetic force can be used for the iron industry to facilitate iron from one place to another using an iron pulley with a large hanger made of magnets to attract iron objects. 

2. Power Plant

Magnets can be used to support electricity generation on a small scale to even a large scale. An example of a magnet that can generate electricity on a small scale is the magnet in a bicycle dynamo which is useful for emitting bicycle lights. An example on a large scale is in a generator for electricity generation which requires a large magnetic force.   

3. Directions

Magnets can be used for directions because they have two poles, namely the north pole and the south pole. These magnetic properties can be used in the form of artificial magnets with characteristics resembling a needle that will point north and south. One of the benefits of a magnet as a direction can be found in a compass object that will point the clock hands towards the magnetic poles. 

4. As a Vibration Into Sound Converter

Magnets can also be useful as a converter of electrical vibrations into sound vibrations. One example of the use of magnets can be found in loudspeakers such as speakers or headsets. Inside these tools there must be a magnet which is a type of artificial magnet. That is why the sides of the headset when brought together will repel each other because the magnetic poles of the two are the same. 

5. As an adhesive to the closing mechanism

Magnets can act as adhesives on closing mechanisms applied to mechanisms such as bag or purse closures and refrigerator door closers. The way the magnetic force works is that the magnetic poles will be faced with different types of magnetic poles so that the meeting between the two can attract each other and succeed in creating an effective and efficient closing mechanism. 

6. Electrical Measuring Instruments

Magnets can be used in electrical measuring instruments such as ammeters or voltmeters. This tool requires a magnet to play the direction of magnetic force or a magnetic field with a coil of wire with a magnet in the middle. The way the magnetic force works on the electric measuring device is that it will produce a direction that can rotate the coil and then it will be held by a spring so that the coil does not move. So that the size guide will deviate and be in accordance with the running electric current. 

7. Electric Motor Products

Magnets can also be useful for technology products such as electric motors that use electrical energy which is then converted into motion. Inside the electric motor material is the component of the wire coil wrapped around the magnet. This component will produce a magnetic force in the opposite direction, so that the coil component will rotate according to its axis and eventually produce motion. 

8. To Find a Needle

Readers can use magnets to find needles that might fall in places that are hard to reach. Because of its small size, it is difficult to find a needle if it is lost. In addition, the sharp tip of the needle can be dangerous, so it must be found immediately if it is dropped or lost. 

9. Maglev Railway

Modern inventions about maglev trains or magnetic levitation were excited and popular at that time. The train moves on a magnetic rail which means it uses a magnetic force on the sides of the magnetic poles which repel each other if they are of the same kind. So that the train can run on the magnetic rail at a speed that is more than the speed of the usual train. 

EXAMPLES OF MAGNETIC FORCES IN DAILY LIFE

After knowing the benefits of magnets, Readers can listen to examples of objects that use magnetic forces in everyday life. The following is a detailed explanation of how the magnetic force works on objects that Readers might often encounter everyday: 

1. Compass

A compass is an object that uses a magnet to perform its function to show the direction of the wind. A compass has a needle that can rotate freely and then will always point north and south. Now that’s the movement of the needle that uses magnetic force to be able to show the south and north poles. 

2.MRI scanner

Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scanning is a form of medical imaging technique that is widely used by diagnostic centers around the world. This MRI scanner utilizes a very strong magnetic field, magnetic field gradient, and radio waves to produce images of the internal organs of the human body. 

3. Electric Motors

Moving electric motors say that there is electrical energy that turns into energy of motion thanks to the magnetic force. This electric motor generates a magnetic field through a coil with an electric current. This magnetic force then causes motion to rotate which eventually drives the motor. 

4. Computer

Does Readers know that the computers that we usually use also use magnets, namely the part of the data stored on the hard disk drive on computers that use a magnetic base. In the assembly there is a layer of magnetic material consisting of billions and even trillions of tiny magnets. Using an electromagnetic head, the data can be stored on the disk. 

5. Microwave Ovens

Microwave ovens are now widely used as household appliances for cooking or heating food. This tool uses the help of magnetic force to work, namely using megatron material to generate power for cooking and removing heat. 

Megatron material is a form of vacuum tube specially designed to cause electrons to circulate in a circle inside the tube. Magnets are then placed around the tube to provide a force that causes the electrons to move in a circle of the device. 

6. Cars

Cars are electromagnetic generated from car engines to create movement. The fossil fuel engine then generates energy from the hearth. This energy will rotate the magnetic coil attached to the axle of the car wheel, so that the car wheels also rotate, as well as the car that moves too. 

7. Fridge Or Refrigerator

The refrigerator uses a magnet located on the door so that the refrigerator can be closed perfectly. The magnetic force used in the magnetic door is very strong because the refrigerator must be completely closed in order to work according to its function. 

8. Fan

The fan also uses magnetic force so that it can work according to its function with the magnet in the fan rotor being repelled by the magnet in the stator. It is this repeated process that makes each cycle of the rotor keep moving, so that the fan can move and produce wind with electrical energy. 

Book & Article Recommendations

Well, that’s an explanation of the meaning, properties, benefits, and examples of using magnetic force in everyday life. Did Readers understand it? Magnetic force is actually familiar to us since childhood because many children’s toys use magnets for their application. In addition, the magnetic force is also useful to meet the needs of daily activities. If Readers can recognize and understand the theory of magnetic force, then he will not only be able to master physics at school but can also use it to facilitate daily activities. 

Definition of lines – Various kinds of lines are often outlined in a work of art which will later become a work. However, sometimes there are still many people who do not understand what the lines in a work of art actually mean.

Not only does it have its own meaning and definition, it turns out that lines also have quite a variety of types and types. One of the functions of actual lines is to add to the beauty of the artwork and make it look perfect.

A real line is a set of points that are parallel and equal in size and aligned in such a way that a prominent longitudinal dimension has a direction. These dimensions produce a variety of shapes, ranging from long, short, smooth, thick, curved, straight and many more.

To discuss further about lines, then you can see this article. In this article, it is not only explained about the meaning of lines, but also explained about the benefits as well as various kinds of lines. In the following we will explain the meaning of lines and types of lines.

Definition of Lines

A line is a combination of a number of points that are parallel and have the same size. The line itself has dimensions that are elongated in shape and have a direction. It can be short, thick, long, smooth, wavy, straight, curved and so on. What has become the measure of the line as well as for the line itself is not marked by sentimentality.

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a line is a long stroke (straight, crooked or curved).

However, using a relative size, what is meant by size is relative. What is meant by relative size includes high, low, long, short, big, thick, small, and also thin. There are three types of line directions, namely horizontal, vertical and diagonal.

Not only in works of art, lines are also known in geography. In geography itself consists of three lines, namely the Wallace line, the Weber line, and the Lydekker line.

Line Function

As it is said that there are no lines on this earth, of course the way people move will be very, very different. Why? Because in various aspects of life, we will use lines. What are the properties in our daily life? For example, on the aspect of road markings.

Path markings are longitudinal lines that are used as route signs. The existence of a marking line, can protect our safety when driving on the highway. Without marking lines, the helmsman of the means of transportation will at will give priority to other drivers and change routes.

In the health sector, for example, the line is used as a large marker of low temperature on a thermometer. With the current spread of Covid-19, who would have thought that in fact the line was also used as a sign of whether or not a person was infected when taking a swab test. 

With the existence of a line, at this time we can also understand aspects of linear meeting research, which also covers linear meeting. The linear meeting itself is a significant key to science.

Kinds of Geographical Lines

1. Definition of Wallace’s Line

Quoting from the Class XI Geography Learning Module compiled by Cipta Suhud Wiguna that the wallace line is the line that separates the geographical areas of the fauna of Asia and Australia. Where the wallace line starts from the Lombok Strait to the Makassar Strait, the Sulawesi Sea, to the Sangihe Islands.

Why is it called the wallace line? Because this concept was researched by Alfred Russel Wallace who was a British scientist who conducted research from 1854 to 1862. In detail, the types of fauna that are in Wallace’s line can be found in Kalimantan, Bali, Sulawesi, to Bali.

So that the area in the western part which is on the Wallace line can be found Asiatic flora and fauna. On the other hand, in the eastern part which is on the Wallace line, transitional or Wallace flora and fauna can be found.

 

2. Definition of Weber’s Line

The Weber line is a line that shows the center where there is a transition between the transition area which is dominated by Asiatic fauna and the transition area which is filled with Australian fauna species. The person who is credited with formulating Weber’s line is the German social scientist Max Weber. Where in 1919 Weber sparked that the area east of this line would be known as the Sahul shelf while the area west of this line would be known as the Sunda shelf.

This Weber line concludes that the ocean depth is the dividing gap between the distribution of fauna in Asia and Australia. Where the Weber line shows that the western part is more than 50% influenced by Asian fauna, while the eastern part is more than 50% influenced by Australia.

3. Definition of Lydekker’s Line

The Lydekker line is the line that separates the Wallacea region from eastern Indonesia which is occupied by Australian flora and fauna. Where to the west is the transition area and the area to the east is an area filled with Australian flora and fauna.

Quoting from Visionlearning (2013) linear algebra can help you on the mortuary team to identify gangs of United States war who became victims in Earth War II, only by measuring the distant samples of the bones found.

Not only that, the line is listed at the bottom on the architectural concept aspect. Then, what happens when there are no lines? It is true that most likely, we have not been able to see the concept of ordinary houses at this time.

So, now you can imagine, if the function of the line really affects people’s daily lives. Next, we understand about the types of lines, let’s go!

Types of Lines in Fine Arts

1. Diagonal Lines

The first type of line in art is the diagonal line. Diagonals are straight lines that slope to the right or left. These diagonal lines give the impression of something that is unstable, moving or dynamic. Meanwhile, diagonal lines or slashes to the right or left are lines that are analogous to a person running and a horse jumping, as well as a sloping tree and so on.

2. Horizontal Lines

The next type of line is a horizontal line, which is a line with a straight horizontal appearance. Horizontal lines or better known as horizontal lines tend to be associated with horizontal sea horizons, as well as fallen trees, people sleeping or dead people and various other flat objects as well. This line has a calm and steady character.

3. Vertical Lines

The next type of line is vertical which means a straight line, and the next definition of a vertical line is a vertical line which is analogous to objects that stand straight and straight, such as tree trunks, monuments, people standing and so on. The line gave the impression of being motionless and pointing towards the sky.

4. Zig-Zag lines

Various kinds of zig-zag lines are also one of the types of lines that exist in art. The line model is similar to straight lines made in opposite directions and then reconnected. The meaning and meaning of the Zig-Zag line actually describes excitement, joy and something intense and can also mean passion and burning passion.

5. Curved Lines

Curved lines are lines whose direction bends and there are three kinds of these lines, namely major arcs, dome curves, and floating curves. For the meaning and impression of curved lines that give the impression of elegance, flexibility and refinement. But it can also symbolize uncertainty.

6. Broken Lines

From its appearance, this line is formed from a collection of several lines separated by distance between one another. Dotted lines are also often used in geometry material, here. For example, to show the area that intersects a plane.

7. Parallel Lines

Parallel lines are the relationship of two identical and parallel lines. The characteristic of parallel lines is that no matter how long the line is made, there will never be an intersection between the two lines. Usually parallel lines are denoted by the symbol “//”. So, if you write parallel lines in the figure, you can use AB // BC.

8. Joint Lines

Composite line is a combination of two or more line types in art. The line model usually forms a more complex line structure.

9. Wavy Lines

The next line is a wavy line which is included in the category of compound lines that are curved and continuous. This line is sometimes called the S-curved line which often describes rhythm and movement.

Types of Lines in the Field of Engineering Drawings

1. Thick Continuous Line

Thick continuous line is a type of line that is used as shape lines, object lines and border lines.

2. Bold Spot Stripes

Next is the dotted solid line, which is a type of line used to indicate the inner surface of an object that requires special handling.

3. Thin Continuous Line

The continuous thin line is the line used for auxiliary, measuring, guiding, imaginary, short axis and hatching lines.

4. Dotted Line

Dotted line is a type of line that has a function as an object line or an obstructed edge line.

5. Bold Dotted Dotted Line

Dotted solid line is a type of line used to indicate the inner surface of an object that requires special handling.

6. Dotted Line Thin Dots

The thin dotted line is a type of line used for track lines, axis lines, symmetry lines. If this line thickens at the end and bends, then its function changes to a secant line.

7. Free Continuous Line

Free or thin continuous line is a line that is used to delimit parts of objects that are cut into pieces.

 

Line Formation Process

After knowing the meaning of lines, then we will discuss the process of forming lines. A line is a pattern whose shape extends from a point. In conceptual language, a line has length but no depth or width.

If a point is naturally static, then a line will be able to express movement, direction and growth, visually in providing an idea of ​​the path of movement of a point. Which means the line is the result of a known real streak or calligraphy.

The Benefits of Life Lines

1. Lines For Instructions

Lines in everyday life can be used as a guide. For example, guide lines that show directions, lines that connect information, and also lines used on maps to show cities, rivers, places where they are located, and so on.

2. Lines As Markers

Lines are also used in everyday life as markers. For example, lines on soccer fields and other sports fields, on carrom boards, road markings, and also vehicle parking marking lines.

3. Lines Form Letters and Numbers

Lines are useful for forming letters as well as numbers in many languages. There are letters that are only composed of straight lines, such as the letters I, A, H, K, L, and there are also letters that are composed of curved lines, such as C, U, O, and also S.

4. Mark important things in an article

Lines can also be used to mark sentences or words that are considered important in a piece of writing. A horizontal line can be placed just below the marked word or sentence. The line used to cross out a word or sentence shows that the word or sentence is wrong.

5. Lines Arranging Geometric Shapes

Lines are also useful for constructing various geometric shapes. For example, squares, rectangles, blocks, cubes, trapezoids, kites all use lines as their basic elements.

6. Lines as Art Elements

According to The Art of Education University, line is a design element and an important part of many art forms. This means that lines are needed to create various forms of art, such as painting, crafts, even dance, sometimes using lines in floor patterns.

7. Lines as Architectural Elements

Quoting from The Constructor , the line is the most expressive aspect and is a universal language for describing a structure to be built. Lines are used to draw building designs as well as objects by an architect. Examples of architectural drawings that use lines are designs for houses, buildings, inns, bridges, highways, city parks, toll roads, railroads, schools, sports facilities, swimming pools, and various regional infrastructure.

Thus a review of the meaning of the line to the benefits of the line in everyday life. I hope this is useful, all the discussion above is useful as well as makes it easier for you to group lines.

Definition of illustration images – When talking about images, of course there are many types of images. Of the many types of images, one of the types of images that many people like is illustrative images. Then, what exactly is meant by illustration? For those of you who want to know more about illustrative images, then you can see this article to the end, Readers.

Definition of Illustration

Drawing illustrations can be said as an activity that aims to clarify story ideas or narratives, where the main goal is to clarify, strengthen, reinforce and beautify the story both from the news and from the message. In creating an illustration, a graphic designer will certainly need a strong mind to combine design elements. So they can produce something different from the others.

Illustration comes from the Dutch language ( illustratie ) which means decoration with a picture or making something clear. The average use of this illustration is in the form of a book in cartoon form. Illustration as the highest element as an attraction in the design of a book. With an illustration, it will help readers imagine when reading a book. In other words, it is hoped that the meaning or message in the book can be conveyed more easily.

Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, an illustration is a picture to help clarify a book, essay and others. Then, the illustration is also an image, design or decorative diagram. In addition, the KBBI also says that an illustration is an additional explanation to explain an explanation.

Illustrative images are also images that provide explanations or tell the story or written text, so that illustrations are not only used as a means of supporting the story, but can also decorate empty space.

Examples include tabloids, magazines, newspapers and so on. Apart from that, illustrations can also take various forms such as painting, graphics, cultural, sketch artwork and even recently many have used bitmap images to work on a photograph.

With illustrations, it will be communicative, informative which is easy to understand, arouse feelings and desires, new ideas that are original are not plagiarism, have strong appeal and have good quality in manufacturing techniques and artistic value.

So, it can be said that illustration itself is a visual form of text and sentences by clarifying the scene description in a story. So that the picture in general will explain the character or the whole of the story. Not only that, illustrations also serve to attract readers so that reading interest increases.

Purpose of Using Illustration Images

The purpose of using illustrations is as follows:

1. Illustrations will make it easier for Readers who read to remember the ideas and concepts that have been conveyed through the existing illustrations.
2. Illustrations will provide variations on teaching materials, so that they become more motivating, interesting, communicative and better understand the Readers who are reading to be able to understand a message.
3. Illustrations are used to clarify information or messages conveyed.
4. In addition, illustrations can also save presentation. Because with illustrations, it can present a complex and broad concept in a limited space or place.

Types of Illustration Images

After discussing the meaning of illustration images and also their purpose, then at this point, we will discuss the types of illustration images.

1. Naturalist illustrations 

A naturalist illustration is an image that has the same color and shape as reality without adding or subtracting the image.

2. Figure decorative illustration

Decorative illustration image is an image that has a function to decorate something with a simplified form or vice versa, exaggerated. In this decorative illustration image made with a certain style as style .

3. Cartoon image

Cartoon images are images that have certain characteristic forms or are funny. It is usually used to decorate children’s magazines, illustrated stories and comics.

4. Draw a caricature

A caricature image is an image of satire or criticism or input which in its depiction has experienced a storage form of body proportions.

5. Illustrated stories

Picture story is a kind of comic or picture with text. The techniques for drawing comic strips are based on stories with various interesting depiction points of view.

6. Textbook illustration

In illustration, textbooks have a function to explain a text or a description of an event, both scientifically and in part pictures. The illustrations for this textbook have forms in the form of natural images, photographs or in the form of charts.

7. An imaginary illustration

As an image of the processing of creativity imaginatively or imaginatively. This depiction technique is commonly found in story illustrations, novels, romance and comics.

Illustration Image Function

Illustrative also has several functions, including:

1. Descriptive Function

The descriptive function is to replace a description of something narratively and verbally by describing or using long sentences. With the existence of illustrations can be used to describe so that it will be easier to understand and faster.

2. Expressive Functions

This function can express and show an intention, feeling, idea, abstract concept or situation to be real in a precise and striking manner so that it will be easily understood quickly.

3. Analytical or Structural Functions 

This illustration shows the details of one part with another in detail so that it will also be easy to understand.

4. Qualitative function

This function is used in commonly used illustrations, such as tables, lists, cartoons, graphs, pictures, sketches, symbols, and schematics.

 

Illustrated Figure Roles

Illustration is an art that has a role and purpose in conveying a certain purpose in order to explain the events that occur. The role of illustration, among others:

1. Can attract attention

In a magazine or book that is not accompanied by illustrations, it is less attractive, will be bland and the reader’s interest will decrease. However, if it is accompanied by an illustration, it will further invite the reader’s interest.

2. Make it easy to read the text clearly

The presence of illustrations in a story can cause the text to be read clearly, periodically then attention will also lead to illustrations. At the same time trying to find the relationship between the text and the illustration, during this process the two hemispheres of the brain are also involved in storing more memory of the newly incoming information.

3. Expressing the meaning of text or information

Provide a visual picture of what is in the content of a piece of writing related to the story being told and represent it in the form of an image. In addition, as a means of expressing the experience of an event that is expressed in an image. The characteristics of the image provide information in written form and then represent it with a representative visual image.

4. Make it easy to understand an explanation or description of an article

With illustrations, it will be easy for every reader to understand the meaning. Not infrequently, sometimes illustrations place positions as a form of understanding and explanation of an event. So, the benefit of having an illustration is to facilitate understanding of the text and describe the semantic process by providing connections for text elements in an image.

In addition to the four roles above, there are other roles of illustration, including:

5. As an information tool

With detailed, intricate shapes and black and white lines, illustrations are often used to record the physical and intellectual world. This can be found in educational books, knowledge and encyclopedias.

Illustrations are used as a tool to document and fully explain the subject being studied, from natural life to anatomy. In addition, illustration is also used as a means of reconstructing an important event in human history. For example, there is cooperation between experts and illustrators.

In general, illustration is a good medium of instruction, making information easily digestible visually. Illustrations can also explain simply to play musical instruments, sports or games to complex things, installation techniques, architectural structures and so on.

6. As an opinion 

This role can be seen Readers in the editorial world. This has the main function of being a symbiosis with journalism in a newspaper or magazine. The contents are themed such as lifestyle, politics and issues that are currently happening. Editorial illustrations will stimulate thought and debate, present questionable arguments and make provocative statements. For example, in writings with a lifestyle theme in a magazine, illustrations are made in a light form to make it more entertaining for readers.

 

7. As a tool to tell stories

This illustration is often found in children’s books, graphics, novels and comics. In adult books, illustrations are also often used for book covers that function as packaging and point of sale.

This illustration style depends on the genre of a piece of writing. If Readers is going to make an illustration, it is necessary to pay attention to the balance between text and images. Readers also has to be careful whether the images created must show in detail part of the script or give a more mysterious impression to produce an interesting narrative.

8. As a means of persuasion

The role of this illustration is evident in the commercial world of advertising. For illustrations in advertising are also planned in detail. The concept of a product forms the basis of how the illustration is created. Planning communication so that the message from a product is conveyed to the audience.

 

9. As identity

The role of illustration as a product or company introduction context. So, illustrators will work closely with graphic designers for placement in below the line media, point of sale, packaging and others. Apart from being a brand recognition tool, illustrations also serve as the identity of a company or an organization.

In addition, the role of illustration itself is widely used in retail and promotional media, so that it will provide a visual impact related to information and promotion of a product or service. In companies, illustrations are often used to describe an abstract theme, such as products from financial companies, banks and others.

With illustrations, it will make a product more attractive and can increase interest in consumers. For example, in children’s food products. Not infrequently, at first children will be interested in the outer packaging because it has cute illustrations that make them interested in buying.

In addition to food products, illustrations are found on book covers with visual product packaging. Therefore, understanding the contents of the book is also very important in determining the visual cover of the book. Apart from being a point of sale, the function of the cover is also an existing identity and marketing strategy.

10. As design

The close relationship between design and illustration provides opportunities for illustrators to also act as designers. Some examples are toki oki, an illustration product by illustrator Simone Legno. This illustration with a fashion theme is applied to t-shirts, bags and so on. Illustrations form the basis for designing products and other visual communications.

Illustration Image Characteristics 

Besides having a role, illustration images also have characteristics. The following are the characteristics of the illustrative image.

1. There is communication

Illustration as an image that implements or provides communication of a concept or message. This illustration can be a comment or opinion on a problem.

2. There is a relationship between pictures and words

The initial function of the illustration as a complement to the text. With the interaction between text and images creates a harmony. In line with developments, illustration develops and has a broader role than just a complement.

3. As an arousing factor 

The existence of visual communication makes Readers feel something, present drama and evoke existing emotions. This factor makes people interested in an illustration and determines whether this illustration will be successful or not.

4. Mass production and print media

The purpose of creating illustrations is to ensure that the message is received or not. This production technique has advantages and disadvantages that can affect the visual appearance of an illustration. In addition, the influence of color must also be adjusted to the marketing strategy that has been implemented.

5. Displays 

Unlike the art of painting, illustrations are not to be exhibited or displayed. In general, original illustration works may differ from the final result due to the effects of print and scale issues. If Readers want to enjoy an illustration in the media, they can visit or buy such as in print media, magazines, books or where the entire virtual concept is seen in detail.

Well, that’s a discussion about the meaning of illustration images to the characteristics of illustration images. After reading this article to the end, are you interested in making illustrative images? In this all-digital era, it can be said that it makes it easy to make illustrations. Therefore, understanding the nature and role of illustration is very important, yes.

Types of Money – Money is one of the massive transaction tools used by the majority of people. Usually, the physical form of money is paper and metal. However, in this modern era, transactions can use other than physical money, such as payments via Qris.

In Law Number 7 of 2011 concerning Currency, money is a legal means of payment. Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), money is defined as a valid medium of exchange or a standard measure of value (unit of account), issued by the government of a country in the form of paper, gold, silver or other metal printed with certain shapes and images.

To understand more about money, Readers can listen to the opinions of several experts about money. In the view of Albert Gailort Hart, money is a wealth by its owner that can be used in making transactions or paying debts immediately and without delaying.

Meanwhile, according to Arthur Cecil Pigou, money is anything that is used as a medium of exchange. Meanwhile George N. Halm argues that money is a tool used to facilitate exchange and overcome all forms of difficulties in bartering or transactions.

Dennis, Holme Robertson also argues that money is considered as anything that can be accepted to make payments in order to obtain money. Meanwhile, Frederic S. Mishkin defines money from an economic standpoint as something that is generally accepted in payment for goods and services or payment of debt.

From the several expert opinions above, it can be concluded that money is a type of transaction tool used to obtain goods or services with the basic ingredients of making paper, silver, gold, or other metals.

Money Function

Launching from the Cnnindonesia.com and Id.wikipedia.org pages, money has several functions as follows.

1. Original Function of Money

Money has three original functions, namely as a legal medium of exchange, a unit of account, and a store of value. The legal medium of exchange means that the person who will make the exchange does not need to exchange it for goods, but only uses money.

Money as a calculating tool means that money can be used as a pointer or giver of value to various kinds of goods or services that are traded. Money can also show the amount of wealth. As well as calculating the loan amount.

Money as a store of value means that money can be used as a transfer of purchasing power from the present to the future. When someone receives money for the sale of goods or services, the money can be saved and reused in the future.

 

2. Money Derivative Function

In addition to the main function, money also has a derivative function as written in Id.wikipedia.org as follows.

• Money as Legal Instrument of Payment

Complex human needs cannot be met simply by bartering. Therefore, money appears as a transaction solution to make it easier and more efficient.

• Money as Debt Payment Instrument

Money can be used as a measure of payment in the future, one of which is for debt payments.

• Money as a Tool for Hoarding Wealth

When the money is left by the community, it will usually be saved. Or they deliberately set aside money for future needs.

• Money as a Transferring Tool for Wealth

Money can be used as a means of transferring wealth, for example land or other property is sold to be transferred in the form of money. The money can be used for various purposes, such as education, health, and so forth.

• Money as a Driving Tool for Economic Activity

When the value of money is stable, people will be more enthusiastic or passionate about investing. Investment can encourage economic activity to increase.

History of Money

In the beginning, humans fulfilled their daily needs by utilizing natural resources. They try to meet their needs with their own efforts. For example by making their own clothes, looking for their own fruit, and so on.

Gradually, people realize that their own products or efforts to meet their daily needs are not enough. Therefore, to meet their daily needs, they barter or exchange goods to complement each other’s needs.

However, this method is also not effective. Because of the difficulty finding people who have the desired goods and are willing to barter. Not only that, barter does not have an equal or nearly equal exchange value. The bad political situation also caused fear to barter.

From this anxiety, came the idea to use certain objects to barter. Objects designated as a medium of exchange are objects that are generally accepted, have high value (do not have magical or mystical value), or are different objects that are primary needs.

For example, salt was used by the Romans as a medium of exchange or wages. The Roman influence is still visible from the British people who call wages as salary which comes from the Latin, salarium which means salt.

Then, coins appeared in 1000 BC in China. Metal was chosen because it has a high value and is popular in general, is easy to break without reducing value, is durable, easy to move around, and is not easily damaged.

Gold and silver are used as a medium of exchange because they fulfill these conditions. Silver and gold money is also referred to as full money ( full bodied money ). Full money means the intrinsic value (material value) of money is equal to its nominal value (the value stated on the currency).

At that time, everyone had the right to forge money, sell it, melt it, or use it. Also has unlimited right to save it. Over time, the notion emerged that the need for coins was getting higher. but the amount of precious metals (gold and silver) is very limited.

Large transactions are also difficult when using coins. Therefore, paper money appeared. Paper money was first used by Chinese people in the Tang Dynasty. In the beginning, paper money was used as proof of ownership of gold and silver as a tool or intermediary for making transactions.

Simply put, banknotes (as proof of transactions) in circulation at that time were money guaranteed by 100% gold or silver kept at a gold or silversmith which could be exchanged at any time in full with the guarantee. Gradually, people no longer use gold as a medium of exchange, but use the evidence as a medium of exchange.

 

Types of Money

Money can be grouped based on four categories, namely the material it is made of, the institution that issues it, the value it has, and the area where it is used. The following details the types of money.

1. Types of Money Based on Materials Made

Based on the material it is made of, money can be grouped into several categories as follows.

• Paper Money

Paper money is made from paper with certain images and stamps. According to Law No. 23 of 1999 concerning Bank Indonesia, paper money is money in the form of sheets made of paper or other materials that resemble paper.

• Coin

Coins are usually made of gold or silver. The two types of metal were chosen because they met the requirements for efficient money. Not only that, the relatively high prices of gold and silver made these two materials more acceptable to people.

However, currently, the type of coin is not seen from the gold or silver weight, but the nominal value. Coins also have their own exchange rate. Among them are the intrinsic value or the value of the materials it is made of and also the exchange rate.

2. Types of Money Based on Institutions That Issue It

Based on the issuing institution, money can be categorized into several groups as follows.

• Currency

Currency is usually issued by the Central Bank. For example, in Indonesia, currency is produced by Bank Indonesia which is used throughout Indonesia. Currency consists of coins and paper money.

Following are the characteristics of currency which can be used by all Indonesian people; the nominal value of the currency has been stated and is limited; currency value guaranteed by the government; there is certainty of payment in accordance with the existing nominal.

• Giral Money

Demand deposits in the form of banknotes and coins issued by commercial banks. Not only that, the form of money issued was in the form of a check or giro. To better understand demand deposit, Readers can examine its characteristics, including that it can only be used in certain circles.

Not only that, the nominal must be written according to the desired needs, besides that the nominal of the demand deposit is not limited; the value is only guaranteed by the issuing commercial bank; there is no certainty of payment.

 

3. Types of Money Based on Value

Money can be categorized based on its value as follows.

• Full Value ( Full Bodied Money )

Money’s full value is intrinsic value and face value is the same. Usually applies to precious metal money made of gold or silver.

• Not Full Value ( Full Bodied Money Representative )

Incomplete value means that the intrinsic value is less than the nominal value. Money whose value is not full is usually found in banknotes.

4. Types of Money Based on the Area of ​​Use

Based on the area of ​​use, money is categorized into three groups as follows.

• Local Money

Local money only applies in one particular country. For example, the Rupiah currency is only valid in Indonesia.

• Regional Money

Regional money is money whose use is wider than local money. For example, the euro currency can be used in several European countries, such as Germany, Spain, Austria, and so on.

• International Money

International money applies all over the world. It can be used as a means of payment in any country. The international currency used and the standard for payment is US Dollars.

Money Terms

Launching from the Ruangguru.com page, an agreement regarding money must meet at least the following 7 conditions.

• There is a guarantee, meaning that it must be guaranteed by the government so that its use for various purposes can be trusted by the public.
• Generally accepted ( acceptability ), namely its use must be accepted as a medium of exchange, hoarding wealth, or paying debts.
• Its value is stable ( stability of value ) meaning it does not fluctuate (fluctuate) so that people want to use it as a medium of exchange.
• Easily stored ( storable ) means the physical form should not be too large.
• Portability means that it must be easily transferred from one hand to another.
• Not easily damaged ( durability ) so that it can last for a relatively long period of time.
• Easy to divide ( divisibility ) means that if the nominal amount of money only consists of one type of denomination, it does not allow us to make transactions. Imagine if you wanted to buy clothes for Rp. 80,000, but the nominal denominations available were only Rp. 100,000. Then, what about the return? It’s difficult if there is no other nominal?

Definition, Functions and Distribution of State Institutions – In managing a country, there will definitely be state institutions. The existence of these state institutions can help carry out their functions, with the aim of advancing the nation and state.

Therefore, the existence of state institutions is an important element in the establishment of a state.

Different countries have different state institutions. This is adjusted to the needs of the people in the country concerned.

Then, what exactly is the meaning of state institutions? What is its function for the survival of a country?

Come on, see the explanation about the following state institutions!

Definition of State Institutions

According to Dewi Oktaviani, state institutions are government institutions located at the center whose duties, functions and authorities are expressly regulated in laws.

Simply put, state institutions are government institutions ( Civilized Organizations ) created by the state, from the state, and for the state, in order to achieve the goals of the state.

In state institutions, its members also help maintain the stability of their performance in order to achieve the country’s goals.

According to George Jellinek, state institutions are divided into two major parts, namely 1) direct state equipment ( unmittebare organs ), and (2) indirect state equipment ( mitterbare organs ).

There are several state institutions in Indonesia, namely the legislative, executive and judicial institutions. However, the existence of state institutions in a country is not only limited to these three institutions.

The existence of state institutions in Indonesia is fully regulated by the 1945 Constitution and other laws and regulations. Thus, the position of every state institution in Indonesia depends on the authority, duties and functions granted by the 1945 Constitution.

Duties of State Institutions in General

1. Maintain security, political, legal, Human Rights and cultural stability in the country concerned.
2. Creating a conducive, safe, and harmonious country environment.
3. Maintain liaison between the state and the people.
4. Become a source of inspiration and aspirator of the people.
5. Help run the wheels of state government.
6. Eradicate acts of corruption, collusion and nepotism (KKN).

Distribution of State Institutions in Indonesia

Indonesia as a democratic country, runs the government by applying the trias politica theory . Trias Politica is the division of government power into three areas with equal positions. The three fields are Executive, Legislative and Judiciary.

1. The executive, in charge of implementing and implementing legislation, namely the President and vice president, along with the ministers.
2. Legislature, tasked with making laws, namely the People’s Representative Council (DPR)
3. Judiciary, tasked with maintaining the implementation of legislation, namely the Supreme Court (MA) and the Constitutional Court (MK).

Functions of State Institutions in Indonesia

Previously, it was written that the existence of state institutions is one of the important elements in a state. Based on the application of the trias politica , there are three state institutions in Indonesia, namely the Executive, Legislative and Judiciary institutions.

What are the duties, powers and functions of the three institutions?

Come on, see the following explanation so that you understand it better!

Executive Agency

The executive branch is a governmental institution whose function is to implement the laws stipulated by the legislature. In countries that adopt democratic government, usually the executive branch consists of the head of state, either the king or the president, accompanied by ministers.

In Indonesia, the executive branch is the MPR (People’s Consultative Assembly), the President and Vice President, and the ministers.

1. MPR (People’s Consultative Assembly)

Prior to the Amendment to the 1945 Constitution, sovereignty in the hands of the people was fully exercised by the MPR, therefore the MPR was often referred to as the “highest state institution” with authority under the Constitution.

However, after the Amendment to the 1945 Constitution, people’s sovereignty was no longer exercised by the MPR, but carried out “according to the Constitution”.

Members of the MPR are a combination of members of the DPR (People’s Representative Council) and DPD (Regional Representative Council) who are elected by the people through an election process. Provisions regarding the number of members have been regulated in the Act.

The MPR holds a session at least once in five years. The most “visible” authority of the MPR is to inaugurate the President and Vice President who have been elected by the people through an electoral process.

Based on Article 3 Paragraph 1 of the 1945 Constitution, the MPR has the following duties and powers:

• Amend and establish legislation
• Appoint the president and vice president
• Dismissing the president and vice president during their term of office according to the Constitution

MPR members in carrying out their duties and powers, have certain rights, namely:

• Submit proposals related to amendments to articles in the law
• Determine attitudes and choices in the decision-making process
• Choose and be chosen
• Self-defense
• Immunity (the right to carry out their duties and authorities without being prosecuted in court)
• Protocol (the right to obtain respect in relation to his position)
• Financial and administrative

 

 

 

2. President

Prior to the Amendment to the 1945 Constitution, the president was elected by the MPR. However, after there was an amendment to the 1945 Constitution, the president and his deputy were elected by the people through elections.

The president and his deputy serve a five-year term and may be re-elected only once in the next general election.

The president is the head of state as well as the head of government. As a head of state, the president has the authority regulated by the 1945 Constitution, namely:

• Make agreements with other countries with the approval of the DPR (People’s Representative Council)
• Appoint ambassadors and consuls to be stationed in the capitals of other countries and the state of Indonesia.
• Receive ambassadors from other countries.
• Giving titles, decorations, and honors to citizens, both Indonesian citizens and foreign citizens who have contributed.

Meanwhile, as the head of government who administers state government, the President has the following rights and obligations:

• Holds government power based on the 1945 Constitution
• Submitting the Draft Law (RUU) to the DPR
• Establish government regulations
• Uphold and implement the Constitution
• Granting clemency (pardoning convicts) and rehabilitation (restoration of the accused person’s good name) based on the considerations of the Supreme Court (MA)
• Provide amnesty (reduction of prison sentences) and abolition (cancellation of criminal charges) based on the DPR’s considerations.

Apart from acting as the head of state and head of government, the president is also the commander-in-chief of the armed forces, so he has the following powers:

• Declare war, make peace with other countries on the basis of the approval of the DPR
• Making international agreements based on the approval of the DPR
• Declare a state of danger to a situation and condition that takes place in the country.

Legislative Institution

The legislature is a government institution that has a general function in making laws. This legislative body has several legislative functions and control functions.

In Indonesia, the legislative body is the People’s Representative Council (DPR).

1. DPR (House of Representatives)

Members of the DPR come from political parties that are elected by the people through an electoral process. The DPR is located at the central level, while those at the provincial and district/city levels are the DPRD (Regional People’s Representative Council).

The duties and authorities possessed by the DPR are as follows,

• Forming legislation that is discussed with the President
• Provide approval of regional regulations in lieu of laws
• Receive and discuss the Bill (Draft Law) submitted by the DPD
• Considering the DPD on the draft APBN Law relating to taxes, education, and religion
• Establish the APBN (State Income and Expenditure Budget) with the President by taking into account the considerations of the DPD
• Select members of the Audit Board of the Republic of Indonesia with consideration of the DPD
• Choose three candidates for members of the constitutional justices and submit them to the President
• and others

In carrying out these duties and authorities, the DPR has certain rights, namely:

• Right of Interpellation, namely the right to ask for information from the President
• Right of Inquiry, namely the right to conduct an investigation of a government policy
• Right of Initiative, namely the right to submit a Draft Law to the government
• Amendment Right, namely the right to make changes to the Draft Law
• Budget rights, namely the right to submit a RAPBN (Draft State Revenue and Expenditure Budget)
• Right to Petition, namely the right to ask questions about government policy

Article 20A of the 1945 Constitution states that the DPR holds the highest authority in forming legislation. Therefore, the DPR has 3 important functions, namely:

• Legislative function, namely the DPR as a legislature maker with the President
• The function of the Budget, namely the DPR as the holder of authority in determining the APBN proposed by the President
• Oversight function, namely the DPR supervises the running of government.

The DPR holds a meeting at least once a year.

2. Regional Representative Council (DPD)

DPD members consist of representatives from the provinces who have been selected through an electoral process. DPD membership is inaugurated by presidential decree and takes place in his constituency.

DPD members are not from political parties, but from social organizations. The term of office for the DPD is five years.

Based on Article 22D of the 1945 Constitution, DPD members have the following powers:

1. Submitting draft laws to the DPR relating to regional autonomy, central and regional relations, formation, expansion and merger of regions, management of natural resources, and central regional finance.
2. Provide consideration to the DPR on the draft law on the state budget and bills related to taxes, education and religion.
3. Supervise the implementation of these matters and report it to the DPR.

Judicial Institution

The judiciary is a government institution authorized to interpret the contents of laws and provide sanctions for violations of their implementation.

In its implementation, the judiciary must be free from the interference of the executive branch. This is so that law enforcement and justice are not one-sided or too partial.

1. Supreme Court (MA)

The Supreme Court (MA) is the holder of the highest judicial authority in all judicial environments. The MA institution is chaired by a Supreme Court Justice who is assisted by several other judges.

The Supreme Court justices were proposed by the DPR from the Judicial Commission’s proposals. MA institutions have their own obligations and authorities, namely:

1. Tries at the cassation level, examines laws and regulations, and other powers granted by law
2. Nominate three members of the constitutional justices
3. Give consideration to clemency and rehabilitation proposed by the President

2. Constitutional Court (MK)

The Constitutional Court has the authority to exercise judicial power within the general, military, religious and state administration courts. The Constitutional Court has the authority to try at the first and last levels.

In the Constitutional Court, there are 9 constitutional judges who have been appointed by the President. The following are the duties and functions of the Constitutional Court:

1. Examine laws against the Constitution
2. Deciding disputes over the authority of state institutions whose powers are granted by the Constitution
3. Decide the dissolution of political parties
4. Resolve disputes regarding election results

 

 

 

3. Judicial Commission (KY)

This Judicial Commission (KY) institution was formed to oversee the behavior of judges and dirty practices in the process of administering justice.

In the 1945 Constitution (amended), the position of the Judicial Commission is independent, whose existence is formed and dismissed by the President with the approval of the DPR.

 

 

 

New Independent Institutions

1. The Supreme Audit Agency (BPK)

The BPK institution is a state institution that holds power in the field of auditors. BPK certainly has the main task of examining and managing state finances.

The results of the inspection of BPK institutions will be submitted to the DPR, DPD and DPRD in accordance with their authority. Members of the BPK are elected by the DPR and inaugurated by the President.

The BPK institution is based in the national capital and has representatives in each of its provinces.

2. Corruption Eradication Commission (KPK)

This institution was formed through the 1945 Constitution No. 30 of 2002 concerning the eradication of criminal acts of corruption.

The establishment of the Corruption Eradication Committee (KPK) is the government’s response to public pessimism about the performance and reputation of the prosecutor’s office and the police in eradicating corruption.

3. National Commission on Violence Against Women (Komnas Perempuan)

This Komnas Perempuan institution was founded in 1998 based on presidential decree No. 181 of 1998. This institution is independent as a form of national effort to eliminate violence against women.

Komnas Perempuan is a form of the government’s answer to the demands of civil society, especially women, in dealing with issues of violence.

In carrying out their duties and authorities as well as obtaining certain rights, members of state institutions still have the obligation to practice Pancasila and the 1945 Constitution. In addition, they are also obliged to prioritize the interests of the people over their personal interests.

Definition of Exothermic and Endothermic – Especially for Readers who have graduated from high school or are still in high school, chemistry is one of the subjects that must be studied. For most people, chemistry is a difficult subject to understand.

Although chemistry itself is very easy to find in everyday life. In fact, there are also many chemistry that can explain various phenomena in human life.

Just a reminder, you should know that in this chemistry subject there is a learning material that discusses the heat of a substance that accompanies a chemical reaction which is known as thermochemistry.

An example of a discussion in thermochemistry is the process of burning firewood. In the burning process, the wood that is burned and the environment around it have different temperatures. This difference eventually causes the transfer of energy from objects with higher temperatures to objects with lower temperatures.

This energy transfer will continue until the wood and the environment are at the same temperature. This transferred energy is also known as heat. The heat change will be expressed in an enthalpy change (∆H).

Now, if you look at the enthalpy change, chemical reactions can be divided into two parts: exothermic reactions and endothermic reactions.

thermochemistry

In order for you to understand more deeply about exothermic reactions, it is important for you to know thermochemistry. In short, thermochemistry is a science that discusses changes in heat (heat) of a substance that involves physical and chemical processes.

Thermochemistry enters into the section on thermodynamics which discusses energy changes in a chemical reaction and is manifested as the heat of reaction. The particles that make up the substance continue to move consistently resulting in kinetic energy. And this kinetic energy is directly proportional to the absolute temperature.

In other words, when an object is hot, its constituent atoms and molecules move quickly so that the kinetic energy generated is also large. The potential energy of the substance comes from the attractive and repulsive forces that occur between the particles that make up the substance. The most common form of energy is heat energy.

While heat itself is a form of energy that can be exchanged between the environment and the system. While the heat of reaction is the change in energy in a chemical reaction in the form of heat.

In general, to be able to detect heat in an object, you can measure the temperature of that object. If the temperature is high then the heat inside is also large, conversely if the temperature is low then the amount of heat is also small.

The tool that can be used to measure it is called a calorimeter. This tool utilizes the technique of mixing two substances in a container. The calorimeter is usually used to determine the heat of a substance. There are two types of calorimeters that you can use, namely the constant pressure calorimeter and the constant volume calorimeter.

Thermochemistry itself is an example of applying the laws of thermodynamics to chemical events that study heat in chemical reactions. Thermochemistry can also be interpreted as a science in chemistry that studies changes or dynamics in chemical reactions by simply observing heat.

An example of the application of this science in everyday life is the chemical reaction that occurs in the human body when producing energy needed for all daily activities. Or burning coal which is used to generate electricity.

You can find and also learn other terms in chemistry easily through Manihar Situmorang’s Environmental Chemistry book. Especially those related to chemicals, the composition of water and eels, drinking water treatment, water pollution, and so on.

Definition of Exothermic and Endothermic

1. Definition of exothermic

The term exothermic itself is taken from the Greek, namely exposed (outside) and also term (heat or heat). Therefore exothermic can be interpreted as a chemical reaction that can produce heat. This reaction occurs because of the transfer of heat (heat) from the system to the environment which causes the environment to become hotter.

Exothermic reactions can occur naturally (naturally) and also artificially (intentionally). Examples of natural exothermic reactions that occur in nature are burning wood, running water, or rusting iron.

While artificial (deliberate) exothermic reactions usually occur in the laboratory which are the result of an experiment. For example, a mixture of water and concentrated acid, the reaction of water and sodium peroxide, the reaction that occurs between HCl and zinc powder, or something else.

Even so, generally exothermic reactions occur just like that or spontaneously. Such as glucose fermentation or ethanol manufacture. Another example is the reaction that occurs in the formation of NaCl.

HCl(aq) + NaOH(aq) → NaCl(aq) + H2O(l)

In this sequence of reactions, the reactants are HCl and NaOH solutions. While the products are a solution of NaCl and H2O.

2. Definition of Endotherms

Just like exothermic, the term endotherm is also taken from the Greek words endon (in) and also term (heat). In other words, an endothermic reaction means a reaction in which heat from the environment enters the system. In short this is a reaction that absorbs heat.

In this endothermic reaction, heat is transferred from the environment to the system causing the temperature of the region to decrease and become colder. Because this endothermic reaction absorbs energy, it can cause the energy of the system to increase. Therefore the enthalpy also increases so that the change has a positive sign.

One example of an endothermic reaction in everyday life is photosynthesis. In this event, the trees absorb heat from the sun which then increases the enthalpy of the reaction.

System and Environment

In the discussion of the terms exothermic and endothermic above, you will find the terms “system” and “environment”. So what exactly is meant by the system and the environment itself? Here’s an explanation.

The term system is generally used in the process of analyzing energy changes associated with chemical reactions. The system is defined as that part of nature that is of concern to humans.
Meanwhile for chemists, systems are generally substances involved in physical and chemical changes. The remainder of nature that exists outside the system is then known as the environment or surrounding.

For example the reaction between water and calcium metal in a beaker. Water and calcium metal are part of the reaction system while the beaker, air pressure and air temperature are the environment.

Kinds of systems

Based on interactions with the environment, systems in chemistry can be classified into three types, namely open systems, closed systems, and isolated systems.

1. Open System

An open system is a system resulting from the transfer of energy and matter that occurs due to the interaction of the system with the environment. An example is the process of dissolving table salt in an open beaker.

2. Closed System

In a closed system, material transfer is not possible, but energy transfer can still occur between the system and its surroundings. For example, when observing the dissolution above, in this situation the material cannot get out or enter the glass beaker because the glass beaker is closed.

Even so, energy can still enter and leave the glass beaker. This is usually indicated by the presence of heat attached to the walls of the glass beaker. Or it could also be that the heat energy is channeled into the system by heating it over a burning fire.

3. Isolated System

While an isolated system is a system that does not support the transfer of matter or energy between the system and the environment. Like for example hot water in a thermos. The water is put in a thermos so that the heat does not dissipate and the volume of water remains constant. In other words, neither the heat nor the water undergoes a change.

Readers can also find a complete discussion of systems and the environment in chemistry in the book Fundamentals of Physical Chemistry by Don Shillady. This book has quite a lot of advantages such as a more interesting presentation, can be used as a guide to understand the principles of mathematical derivatives, and easy-to-understand explanations.

 

 

Characteristics of Exothermic and Endothermic Reactions

To identify an exothermic reaction, you can rely on its characteristics as follows:

• The system absorbs heat from the surroundings
• The surroundings absorb heat from the system
• The surroundings and the system have the same amount of heat
• When the ambient and system heats are added together, the result is zero
• At the end of the reaction, the heat in the environment is always less than the heat in the system
• Usually the sum of the enthalpies in the product value is less than the enthalpy of the reaction.
• The enthalpy change has a negative value
• When the system is releasing energy, the temperature increase can be seen by increasing temperature or fire. and when the heat is stopped, the reaction will still go on.

Like exothermic reactions, endothermic reactions also have their own characteristics. Here are some of its features:

• The products have more energy than the reactants
• The formation of chemical bonds can release energy
• The bond energy in the products is greater than in the reactants
• The enthalpy change is negative

Exothermic Reaction Theory

Combustion, fermentation or other chemical reactions date back to ancient times. The ancient Greek philosophers were figures who developed theories about these chemical reactions.

For example, Empedocles with his theory of the four elements. He said that every material has four basic elements namely earth, air, water, and fire. In medieval times, chemical transformations themselves were usually studied using alchemists.

An example is turning lead into gold by utilizing the reaction that occurs between lead and a mixture of sulfur and copper.

Many scientists are also trying to produce non-earthly chemical compounds such as nitric acid, and sulfuric acid synthesis. This process was carried out by the alchemist Jabir ibn Hayyan. He tried to heat sulfur and nitrate minerals.

Then in the 17th century, Johan Rudolph Glauber succeeded in producing hydrochloric acid and sodium sulfate by reacting sodium chloride with sulfuric acid. Later in 1746, a development of the lead chamber process was carried out and also the Leblanc process was able to produce large quantities of sodium carbonate and sulfuric acid. So that chemical reactions become possible in industry.

In the 1880s, advanced sulfate-origin technology was first introduced and from 1909 to 1910 the Haber process was developed for the synthesis of ammonia.

In the field of organic chemistry, it is believed that it is impossible for any compound found in living organisms to be obtained by chemical synthesis processes. Based on the concept of vitalism, these organic compounds have been endowed with “essential skills different from organic matter.”

Then Friedrich Wohler succeeded in solving this concept in 1828 with his urea synthesis. Other chemists who also contributed to the field of organic chemistry were Christopher Kelk Ingold with the Subs reaction mechanism and also William Williamson with the synthesis of ethers.

Examples of Exothermic and Endothermic Reactions

The easiest example of an exothermic reaction is a campfire. When you burn wood to make a bonfire, the heat released into the environment can make your body warmer when you are around the firewood.

Besides that, there are also other examples that can be found in everyday life, such as the eruption of fireworks which always celebrate the turn of the year.

While the most common and widely used example for defining an endothermic reaction is the process of frying tempeh in cooking oil using a frying pan. In this process, the system is tempeh, while the environment is cooking oil and air. While the type of system is open.

As time goes by, the fried tempeh will gradually get hotter. This means that tempeh gets heat from its environment, namely cooking oil, although some of the heat escapes into the air.

In this process there is a transfer of matter and heat from the system to the surroundings, therefore the system is an open system. The flow of heat transfer is that the fire transfers the heat to the pan, then the pan gives the heat to the cooking oil, and the cooking oil transfers the heat to the tempeh.

Difference between Exothermic and Endothermic Reactions

The first difference between exothermic and endothermic reactions is the enthalpy change. In an exothermic reaction, the change is negative. These changes are usually calculated by Hess’s Law. The law says that enthalpy is directly proportional to the change in temperature.

The temperature drop that occurs in an exothermic reaction can change the temperature to negative. As a result, the enthalpy change will also have a negative value. While the change in enthalpy in an endothermic reaction is positive because there is an increase in temperature resulting in a positive temperature change.

Other differences regarding exothermic reactions and endothermic reactions that you should know are as follows:

Exothermic Reaction:

1. There is liberation of heat
2. The system temperature level is higher than the environment
3. The position of heat is transferred from the system to the surroundings
4. The enthalpy of the system decreases
5. There is an increase in temperature

Endothermic Reaction

1. Requires heat to be absorbed
2. Ambient temperature level is lower than system temperature
3. The position of heat is transferred from the surroundings to the system
4. There is a drop in temperature

Thus a complete explanation of the meaning of exothermic, system and environment, characteristics of exothermic reactions, theory and examples. By knowing these things you will automatically increase the knowledge you have. Mainly in the field of chemistry. One of the subjects that is considered difficult to learn by students and students. See you in the next article, okay!

The Excretory System in Humans – Hello Readers friends , do you know the excretory system? There is a biological process in the human body called the excretory system. The excretory system is the process of removing metabolic waste products that are no longer used by the body. These substances can be carbon dioxide, urine, urea, sweat, and other toxic or toxic compounds.

If poisons or toxins are not removed immediately, all these substances accumulate in the body and can cause health problems. To get rid of this poison, there are several organs in the body that help excretion.

These organs include: organs namely the lungs, skin, liver, large intestine and kidneys. Each of these excretory organs has a different function and way of working to remove waste products and toxins from the body.

In general, the excretory system can be understood as the process of removing metabolic waste products that are no longer used by organisms. The remnants of this metabolism are in the form of toxic compounds or poisons, if not disposed of it can interfere with the function of organs in the body.

Definition of Excretory System

The excretory system is the system responsible for processing and metabolizing waste products and toxins and then removing them from the body. Indeed, these waste products and toxins can cause health problems if they are not removed from the body.

In the human excretory system, there are several organs responsible for the cleansing process such as the skin, lungs, liver, large intestine and kidneys. Each organ has a different function and way of working to remove metabolic waste and toxins from your body.

Understanding the Excretory System According to Experts

Excretion is the process of removing waste products of metabolism, either as liquid or gas. Residues in the form of urine are excreted by the kidneys, sweat is excreted through the skin, bile is excreted by the liver, and CO2 is excreted through the lungs.

These substances must be removed from the body because if not removed they can interfere with and even poison the body. Apart from excretion, there are also defecation and secretions. Defecation is the removal of waste products from the digestive process in the form of feces (feces) through the anus.

Meanwhile, the secretions released by cells and glands are in the form of latex and are still used by the body for other processes such as enzymes and hormones (Pratiwi et al., 2009: 58).

The urinary system consists of: The kidneys excrete urine. The ureters carry urine from the kidneys to the bladder. The bladder functions as a reservoir. The urethra drains urine from the bladder (Pearce, 2002: 25).

Functions of the Excretory System

As previously mentioned, there are several organs in the body that function for the excretory system. Below is a complete review of how the body’s system works to remove metabolic waste from the body. The following is an explanation of each organ in the body:

 

 

1. Liver

A rather large excretory organ is the liver, weighing about a kilogram. This organ is very important for the body’s metabolism because it acts as a defense organ and the immune system. Located in the upper right part of the abdominal cavity, just below the diaphragm.

In the body’s work system, the liver converts ammonia into urea. Then, urea which is processed in the liver will be excreted through the urinary system to the kidneys through urine. Apart from ammonia, other substances secreted or excreted by the liver are toxic substances in the blood, such as from drinking alcohol or drugs.

2. Kidneys

The kidneys are organs located below the back of the rib cage, near the middle of the back on either side of the spine. Kidney is one of the most important organs in the human body.

The kidney has the following characteristics, consisting of two parts (left and right). Simply put, the kidneys are a pair of organs that measure 10 to 12 centimeters or the size of a fist. Furthermore, the kidney has about a million nephrons which are very small and filter blood relatively small, but have enormous benefits.

The first organ responsible for the performance of the excretory system is the kidneys. This organ is located on both sides of the spine, precisely at the back of the abdominal cavity. Kidneys are shaped like kidney beans and have a reddish-brown color. Humans have a pair of kidneys located on the right and left sides of the body.

The function of the kidneys is to filter food waste, drugs or toxins from the blood. In addition, the kidneys also play a role in controlling fluid balance and electrolyte levels in the body. If your body has excess salt or minerals, your kidneys will excrete them. The collected waste will then be converted into urine and will come out when you urinate.

3. Colon

The next organ that acts as the excretory system is the large intestine. The large intestine is responsible for absorbing water and any remaining nutrients that the small intestine cannot digest. Once absorbed, the remaining food and drink is converted into feces and then excreted through the anus when you have a bowel movement.

4. Lungs

The next organ with an excretory system is the lungs. Its existence is the main support for the human respiratory system. During breathing, the lungs are responsible for transferring the oxygen obtained from the air into the blood.

Oxygenated blood will be distributed to all tissues and organs of the body to function properly. Upon receiving oxygen, every cell in the body produces carbon dioxide as a metabolite which is then excreted.

Carbon dioxide is a toxic substance that can be harmful to health if it accumulates in the blood. During the cleansing process, carbon dioxide is carried by the blood to the lungs and exhaled when you exhale. Coughing or sneezing is also a natural mechanism of the body that involves the lungs and respiratory tract to expel harmful chemicals or gases, dust, germs, viruses and foreign objects into the respiratory system.

In the excretory system, the lungs have the function of removing carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O). This carbon dioxide and water vapor are then released and expelled from the lungs through the nasal passages. Instead, oxygen is taken.

The amount of oxygen absorbed by the air varies with demand and is often affected by many different things. Call it the type of work, body size, amount and type of food consumed. As a result of metabolic waste, CO2 is transported by blood in three ways, namely:

1. Carbon dioxide dissolves in the plasma and forms carbonic acid with anhydrase enzymes (contributing 7% of total CO2);

2. Carbon dioxide is bound to hemoglobin as carbomino hemoglobin (23% of total CO2)

3. Carbon dioxide is bound to a bicarbonate ion group (HCO3) through a chloride exchange chain process (70% of total CO2).

In the body, the main function of the lungs is actually the respiratory organ, but because this organ also excretes metabolic waste, the lungs also play a role in the excretory system. Carbon dioxide and water from metabolism in the tissues are carried by the blood through the blood vessels to the heart.

From the heart, it is pumped to the lungs to diffuse into the alveoli. In addition, H2O and CO2 can diffuse into or be secreted into the alveoli of the lungs because the alveoli open many thin membrane capillaries.

5. Skin

Human skin contains three to four million sweat glands. These glands are scattered throughout the body, but are most numerous on the palms, feet, face and armpits.

Sweat glands are divided into two types, namely eccrine glands and apocrine glands. The eccrine glands are in direct contact with the surface of the skin and secrete a watery, odorless sweat.

Meanwhile, apocrine glands secrete sweat which contains fat and is concentrated and is found in hair follicles, such as the armpits and scalp.

There are several types of toxins that are secreted through the sweat glands in the skin, including metals, bisphenol A, polychlorinated biphenyls, urea, phthalates, and bicarbonates. Not only remove toxins, sweat glands in the skin also kill and eliminate bacteria.

The process of breaking down toxic compounds is called liver detoxification. As an organ that plays a role in the excretory system – because it secretes bile and urea, the liver has several functions, including:

Production of bile: Bile is a product of the breakdown of red blood cells. This resin consists of two components, bile salts and bile dyes. Bile salts emulsify fats, while bile dyes form faeces and urine, which are excreted with the yellow latex.

Urea and Ammonia Products: Urea and Ammonia are protein breakdown products that must be excreted from the body because they are toxic. This amount of urea will be absorbed into the blood, filtered by the kidneys and excreted from the body through urine.

Meanwhile, ammonia will be bound to ornithine and then excreted through the urine or into the bile. Ammonia is what makes urine smell sharp.

Breaking down old red blood cells: The products of this breakdown of red blood cells are called globin, iron and heme. Because the iron and globin itself will be reprocessed to make new hemoglobin, which can be reused by the body.

While heme will be converted into bilirubin and biliverdin in the intestine will be oxidized to urobilin, which is used as a urine and feces dye.

Synthesis of several substances: Apart from acting as a place to produce bile, the liver also functions to synthesize substances. Indeed, the liver secretes several enzymes, one of which is the enzyme arginase. This enzyme has the effect of converting arginine to urea and ornifi can increase NH3 and CO2.

6. Epidermis (Ari Skin Layer)

The epidermis is the outermost and very thin layer of the skin. The epidermis consists of the stratum corneum and a layer of scales. The stratum corneum is a layer of dead cells that sloughs off easily and doesn’t contain blood vessels or nerve fibers, so it can’t bleed when it’s detached.

While the squamous layer is the layer below the stratum corneum, which consists of living and dividing cells. The scab contains pigments that determine skin color and protect cells from sun damage.

7. Bronchus

The bronchi, commonly known as the tracheal branches, have the function of removing foreign bodies and debris that enter the respiratory tract. This function is performed by cilia on the walls of the bronchi.

The main bronchi are the first branches of the trachea, consisting of the right main bronchus (the bronchus leading to the right lung) and the left main bronchus (the bronchi leading to the left lung). Moreover, bronchial branches will become bronchioles.

8. Dermis

The dermis is the layer of skin beneath the epidermis. This layer is thicker than the epidermis and is made up of several tissues, including capillaries that deliver nutrients to the hair roots and skin cells.

Sweat glands are responsible for the production of sweat, sebaceous glands will produce oil so that the skin and hair do not dry out, blood vessels to circulate blood to all cells or tissues, nerve endings including taste, touch, pain, heat, and touch nerve endings; and hair follicles, which contain the hair root, shaft, and sebaceous glands.

9. Underlayer Skin

This layer is located beneath the dermis, between the layers of connective tissue under the skin, and the dermis is lined with fat cells. And this fat plays a role in protecting the body from shocks, as a source of energy and maintaining body temperature.

With so many components in the human body, from muscles, senses, brain, heart and much more, each with a function, my favorite Encyclopedia: The Human Body is here to help Readers find it all!.

10. Trachea

The trachea is the continuation of the airways from the larynx and serves as an intermediary between the larynx and the rest of the lungs. The trachea is also the boundary between the lower and upper respiratory systems. The upper respiratory system includes the nose and larynx.

Excretory System Disorders

1. Kidney Stones

Kidney stones are a disorder in which calcium salts are deposited in the cavities of the kidneys, renal tract or bladder. Kidney stones appear as insoluble crystals. These deposits are formed because a person consumes too much mineral salt and consumes too little water.

2. Jaundice

Jaundice is an illness caused by a blocked bile duct that prevents bile from flowing into the duodenum. Bile and also then in the blood and the color of the blood becomes yellow.

The skin of people with jaundice will be pale yellow. Then the whites of the eyeballs and nails are also yellowish.

3. Diabetes Mellitus

A person can get diabetes because the pancreas does not produce insulin or produces little insulin. Insulin is a hormone that controls the amount of sugar (glucose) in the blood. In this condition, the concentration of glucose in the patient’s urine and blood is very high, so care must be taken not to affect other diseases.

4. Prickly heat

Prickly heat is a disorder that attacks the skin organs. Prickly heat occurs due to clogged sweat glands. This condition causes the skin to appear red and accompanied by itching.

5. Albuminuria

Albuminuria is a kidney disease characterized by high levels of albumin in the urine. Albumin is protein, you guys. This condition occurs because there is too much albumin because part of the glomerulus plays a role in filtering blood.

6. Nephritis

Nephritis is a disorder of the glomerulus. Nephritis is caused by infection with the Streptococcus nephritis bacteria. This infection can cause acidic urine and urea to back up into the veins, as well as water retention in the feet due to poor water absorption.

7. Urethral

Apart from the kidneys, organs that can interfere with the excretory system are the ureters. The ureter itself is a tube-shaped organ. The ureters are also known to have muscles that are used to help the passage of urine from the kidneys to the bladder.

One of the diseases that can attack the ureter is urethritis. Urethritis can be defined as inflammation of the ureter caused by a bacterial or viral infection.

For patients, men and women have very different symptoms. Symptoms of urethritis in men are usually manifested by the appearance of blood in the urine and semen. Not only that, when you urinate, you also feel a burning sensation. While the symptoms of urethritis in women that can be observed are lower abdominal pain, pain when urinating, fever.

8. Pneumonia

Pneumonia is a disease of the excretory system in which the lungs function as a place for exchanging carbon dioxide and oxygen. Pneumonia is caused by a bacterial, viral, or fungal infection in the alveoli. As a result, oxygen becomes difficult to enter because the alveoli where exchange is filled with fluid.

9. Asthma

One condition that often attacks the lungs is asthma. Asthma is a lung disorder that may be familiar to many people. Asthma is caused by narrowing of the air passages in the lungs. People with asthma often experience shortness of breath or even chest tightness.

Asthma is a non-communicable disease, it can only be transmitted to children. Asthmatics are often caused by a bad air environment. Therefore, the first way to treat someone who is experiencing an asthma attack is to give medication to relieve the respiratory tract.

Some of these medications include injections (hydrocortisone), ventolin syrup (salbutamol), or nebulizers (salbutamol gas). Also discuss the function of the excretory system in humans. There are five human excretory systems, namely the kidneys, liver, colon, skin and lungs. By always maintaining the health of your internal organs, you can have a healthy body.

Definition of Phrases – In Indonesian, a sentence certainly consists of words, phrases, and clauses. Each of these elements has its own meaning. Likewise with the understanding of the phrase. Well, on this occasion, we will explore further about the phrase. So, see the review until it’s finished, Readers.

Definition of the Phrase

Phrases are one of the materials in Indonesian subjects. In addition, phrases can also be said to be the lowest syntactic units. Syntax is the study of sentences. However, the phrase is not the smallest unit in the group. Because, the word is still the smallest unit of syntax.

The phrase is used frequently in everyday speech, even though you may not realize it. Some opinions on the meaning of the phrase as follows:

1. The definition of a phrase according to the book Translation Skill by Kadaruddin is a combination of two or more words that form a single unit. However, these words do not form subject-predicate and do not form new meanings. In other words, it can be said that the new form does not have a different meaning from the meaning of the previous word.
2. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a phrase is a combination of two or more words that are non-predicative (for example, the high mountain is called a phrase because it is a non-predicative construction).
3. According to several sources, a phrase is a unit consisting of two or more words that occupy one sentence function. Phrases cannot form a perfect sentence because they do not have a predicate or are non-predicative.

From the several meanings of the phrase that have been mentioned, it can be said that the phrase is a combination or grouping of two or more words, but cannot form a perfect sentence because it does not have a predicate.

Phrase features

After discussing the meaning of phrases, it feels incomplete if you don’t discuss the characteristics of phrases. Here are some characteristics of the phrase you need to know.

1. Phrases must consist of at least two words or more.
2. Occupy or have a grammatical function in a sentence.
3. Phrases must have a grammatical meaning.
4. Phrases are nonpredicative.
5. Phrases always occupy one sentence function.

Phrase Types

1. Verb Phrases

A verb phrase is a phrase that has a core verb in its formation and can also function as a substitute for the position of a verb in a sentence. Verb phrases have a core verb and other words as modifiers.

It should be emphasized that the elements that fill in the subject, object and complement are not included in the verb phrase. Syntactically, verb phrases can be given the word ‘is’ for active verbs and the word ‘already’ for conditional verbs.

Verb phrases can be grouped into three, namely:

• Modifying verb phrase
• Coordinating verb phrase
• Appositive verb phrases

Examples of verb phrases in the following sentences:

• Two students are reading a book in the classroom
• Two students reading a book in the classroom

The phrase is reading in the sentence is a combination of the word being and the verb reading. So, the phrase is reading is included in the category of verb phrases. An example of a verb phrase with more than two words but a unit of language with a verb as its core is as follows:

• The ship has sailed
• My mother is cooking

2. Nominal Phrases

A nominal phrase is a phrase that has a noun core in its formation and can also function as a substitute for a noun. Noun phrases can consist of several nouns, but there are also noun phrases consisting of nouns and words from other word classes.

The essence of a noun phrase is a noun, while other accompanying words are delimiters or explanations of these nouns. Noun phrases can consist of nouns with nouns or nouns with words from other word classes.

The following forms of noun phrases are as follows:

• Noun + Noun, namely all the words contained in a phrase in the form of words from the noun word class. For example:
• My sister doesn’t know where the fish pond is.
• Serena looks for blotting paper.
• Noun + Verb means that noun phrases are composed of nouns accompanied by verbs as modifiers. For example:
• Jodi brought a lunchbox.
• Andi is a new student in his class
• Noun + Adjective is a noun phrase formed from a noun followed by an adjective as a modifier. For example:
• Budi came with a beautiful girl.
• Santi studies diligently so she doesn’t become a stupid child.
• Noun + Numeral is a noun phrase formed from a noun followed by a number. For example:
• Dani brings three candies.
• Sintia is the second person to enter the final.
• The noun is preceded by the article si or sang. For example:
• Redhead is my favorite character
• The King has arrived.

3. Adjective Phrase

An adjective phrase is a phrase that has a core in the form of an adjective in its forming element. This phrase consists of a core and a delimiter. Adjective phrases have a core in the form of adjectives or adjectives and delimiters in the form of other word classes, usually adverbs or adverbs, verbs or verbs, and nouns or nouns.

The construction of adjective phrases can be distinguished as follows:

1) Coordinating adjective phrases

Coordinating adjective phrases are composed of two main words that complement each other.

Adjective + Adjective , this construction has a grammatical meaning of ‘choice’.

• good bad
• far near

Adjective + Adjective , this construction has a grammatical meaning ‘very’.

• old age
• young young

Adjective + Adjective , this construction has a grammatical meaning ‘set’.

• tall skinny
• safe and peaceful

Adjective + Adjective , this construction has the meaning of ‘opposite’ so that the word but can be inserted.

• hassle but fun
• cheap but good

2) Subordinating adjective phrases

Subordinating adjective phrases are composed of two words, each of which functions as a core and a delimiter.

Adjective + Noun , this construction has a grammatical meaning ‘like’. The first element has a meaning component (+color), while the second element has a meaning component (+comparison).

• blood red
• blue sky

Adjective + Verb , the first element has a meaning component (+inner attitude) and the second element has a meaning component (+action or event).

• embarrassed to ask
• dare to die

Adverb + Adjective , this construction has a grammatical meaning ‘deny’. The first element has a meaning component (+ denial), while the second element has a meaning component (+ inner state or attitude).

• not afraid
• not angry

Adverb + Adjective , this construction has a grammatical meaning of ‘degree’. The first element has a meaning component (+ degree or level), (+ necessity), (+ completion), (+ limitation, or (+ denial), while the second element has a meaning component (+ situation or nature).

• not good
• smarter
• pretty good
• kinda smart
• getting fed up
• must recover
• not ready
• just sad
• do not like

Adjective + Adverb , this construction has a grammatical meaning ‘very’. The first element has a meaning component (+state), while the second element has a meaning component (+most), (+repetition), (+inclusion), or (+limitation).

• long time
• sick again
• not bad
• just lazy

The construction of adjective phrases in the form of idioms has neither lexical nor grammatical meaning. Some idioms of adjective phrases, among others:

• stubborn
• persistent
• thick face
• helpful
• topic

4. Adverb phrases

Adverb phrases are phrases that contain the core elements of adverbs and can be substituted for adverbs in a sentence.

The function of the adverb phrase syntax is to modify sentences or other expressions which include verbs or verbs, adjectives and adverbs or adverbs.

Adverb phrases are divided into two types, namely complementary adverbs and modifier adverbs. For example:

• He ran very fast, the adverb very fast is an adverb phrase that modifies the verb to run. If examined more deeply, the word very fast also consists of two adverbs, namely very and fast, where the word fast modifies the verb to convey information about how to run (for example, he runs fast or he runs slowly).

Meanwhile, words greatly change the degree of information conveyed, regarding the extent to which the act of running fast is achieved (for example, he doesn’t just run fast, he runs very fast).

5. Numeral Phrase

Numerical phrases are phrases formed from number words. This phrase expresses the amount, quantity, and order in a series.

6. Prepositional Phrases

Prepositional phrases are phrases that contain prepositions and prepositional objects that can act as adverbs in a sentence.

Basically, prepositional phrases show several meanings, including:

• ‘place’, as in the market, to the house and against the wall.
• ‘origin of direction’, such as from the village and from school
• ‘origin of materials, such as (rings) from gold, (cakes) from rice flour
• ‘destination’, such as to Lampung, to Campus
• ‘shows a turn’, as I say, (belief) in God
• ‘regarding’, such as about the economy, (remembered) the goodness
• ‘purpose’, as for you, for me
• ‘because’, such as because, since, because, because of (you)
• ‘becoming, as because of, for that
• ‘participation’, as with you’, with him
• ‘way, as well, with pleasure
• ‘tools’ such as with hoes and with tractors
• ‘continuation’, such as since yesterday, from earlier, until tomorrow, until later
• ‘equal’, as in tune with, in accordance with, in line with
• ‘comparison’, as like him, in comparison.

7. Conjunction Phrases

Conjunctional phrases are phrases that contain conjunctions or conjunctions.

8. Endocentric Phrases

Endocentric phrases are phrases that have the same distribution that have a relationship or equality, so that when one of the elements is omitted, the phrase will still be used.

The location or position of the core components can be located in front, for example in the phrases loyal husband, good house, fast runner, and diligent student; it can also be located at the back, for example in further phrases, very diligent, a memory, currently teaching, and really like it.

In addition, this phrase also has one part called the superior component and the subordinate component. These two components are due to the fact that endocentric phrases have the same distribution and one of them acts as a support or limit.

9. Coordinating Phrases

Coordinating phrases are phrases whose constituent components consist of two or more equal or equivalent components. Because of the equivalent form, this phrase can be connected with a single coordinating conjunction such as and, or, but, nor and other conjunctions.

Therefore, the elements can be connected by coordinating conjunctions, for example the word and, or, but (single conjunction) or divided conjunctions such as either…good, more…more, good…nor. For example husband and wife, education and training, parents, the sooner the better, and both now and in the future.

In general, there are three types of endocentric phrases, namely attributive, appositive, and coordinating endocentric phrases.

10. Attributive Phrases

Attributive phrases are phrases that consist of a main and a modifier. So, this phrase contains only one body which can be preceded or followed by a modifier. The core and the modifier can consist of one of the word classes, such as nouns, verbs, adjectives or adverbs.

So, there is only one central element or core element, while the other elements are unequal attributes because they cannot be connected by conjunctions and or. For example, diligent students, public libraries, good kids, beautiful girls, big houses.

11. Appositive Phrases

Phrases that have added or clarified information. This phrase is synonymous with a noun (noun). The interesting thing about phrases is that they always consist of free morphemes.

In a sense, when a word combination consists of a combination of free morphemes such as, the neighbor’s grass or has eaten, the word combination can be said to be a phrase.

The building blocks of a positive phrase have the same position so they can replace one another. For example:

• Siti Sunarsih, daughter of the Regent of Serang, yesterday afternoon gave birth to her fifth child at the Serang General Hospital.
• new teacher phrases on sentences,

“Mr. Ahmad is a new teacher at our school,”. The new teacher’s phrase serves to explain Pak Ahmad’s identity.

12. Exocentric Phrases

Exocentric phrases are phrases that do not have a core element. Because it does not have a core element, this sentence cannot be separated or differentiated.

In general, there are three forms of exocentric phrases that are commonly used in words. The three forms of these phrases are directive, non-directive, and connective exocentric phrases.

13. Equivalent Phrases

Equivalent phrases are phrases that have equivalent elements between them.

14. Stratified Equivalent Phrases

Equivalent multilevel phrases are phrases that have elements that are not equivalent or have certain levels.

15. Common Phrases

Ordinary phrases are phrases that are formed from denotative meanings (true meanings).

16. Idiomatic Phrases

Idiomatic phrases are phrases that have no real meaning or have certain connotations.

17. Ambiguous Phrases

Ambiguous phrases are phrases that have multiple meanings that can raise doubts. Therefore, ambiguous phrases generally require more explanation.

18. Subordinating Phrases

A subordinating phrase is a phrase whose elements do not have an equal position. This resulted in the elements being unable to replace each other and the word and or could not be inserted. For example, long short phrases can be inserted coordinating conjunctions into long and short and long or short.

From the definition of the phrase above, it can be concluded that the phrase is a part of the syntax that is written after the word. In other words, a phrase is a collection of words. Even so, phrases don’t have a predicate or are non-predicative, so sometimes phrases are only connected by conjunctions.

Thus the discussion about the meaning of the phrase to the types of phrases. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you and makes it easier for you to make phrases.

Photosynthesis is – Photosynthesis is a natural phenomenon that occurs in plants to get their food substances. This process is also very necessary so that plants or plants can develop and survive in all conditions. Every plant that lives on planet Earth can then generally carry out photosynthesis. In addition, this process also requires sunlight to convert carbon dioxide and water into carbohydrates.

According to a number of experts, photosynthesis is a reaction that will occur in plants in order to obtain glucose and oxygen with the help of sunlight. In short, this process is then the same as how other living things get energy intake.

Lessons about photosynthesis are usually given when someone enters junior high school (SMP). However, there is nothing wrong if this material is studied again because it is closely related to everyday life. Compiled from a number of sources, below is an explanation of what photosynthesis is and how this natural process occurs in plants. So, see the explanation about photosynthesis until it’s finished, Readers.

Definition of Photosynthesis

Photosynthesis as a natural event that occurs repeatedly in plants. Leaves are the main organ in plants where photosynthesis takes place. Apart from plants, photosynthesis then becomes a natural process that plays an important role in the life of organisms, such as in humans and animals. This is because when the process of photosynthesis occurs, it will produce oxygen which is needed by living things to breathe.

After that, photosynthesis will also help recycle carbon dioxide (CO2) produced in the respiratory system. That way, air pollution can be reduced thanks to photosynthesis.

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the word photosynthesis means the utilization of light energy in plants or bacteria to then convert carbon dioxide and water into carbohydrates. In the process, photosynthesis will then result in net photosynthesis if the amount of this photosynthetic product has been reduced by respiration. Materials regarding photosynthesis are also often discussed in plant physiology.

By knowing this knowledge, we can know more deeply how important sunlight is in the process of photosynthesis, especially in producing carbohydrates from an inorganic raw material in the form of water and carbon dioxide. Later, these carbohydrates will then become nutrients as well as a source of energy for plants. These carbohydrates will be stored as food reserves. When plants are consumed by humans or by animals, there will be a transfer of energy.

Photosynthesis Process

In the process, this chemical change then really needs these 4 things, namely water, carbon dioxide, chlorophyll, and sunlight. The following is the process of photosynthesis that you need to know:

1. Plants will obtain water from the soil which is then absorbed by the roots, and from these roots it is distributed using a transportation system, namely xylem tissue and phloem tissue which are then distributed to all plant organs including leaves.
2. Carbon dioxide will be obtained from the air which then enters through the stomata. The location of these stomata is on the underside of the leaf.
3. Then, photosynthesis occurs in the leaf area. This photosynthesis process will also occur when the chlorophyll in the leaves has captured sunlight, which is then used to convert water and carbon dioxide into sugar and oxygen.
4. Sugar produced from photosynthesis can be directly used by plants, or can be stored in other organs in plants, for example in fruit.
5. In addition to sugar, the oxygen produced will later exit through the stomata and then into the air. This oxygen is also used by humans and animals to breathe.
6. Through polymerization reactions, the glucose or sugar produced through this process will be arranged into a starch or starch substance. This starch substance will then be stored in the roots of plants

The Occurrence of Photosynthesis

According to the Supercomplete Middle School Biology book , green plants will then obtain food by producing it themselves. This process is then called photosynthesis. Green plants are also producers which can then convert inorganic substances into organic ones. Considering that only green plants can carry out photosynthesis, animals and humans then need these plants to be used as their own food.

As mentioned above, photosynthesis can then only occur in an organism that has chlorophyll. Chlorophyll as a plant pigment found in chloroplasts. This natural green dye then functions to absorb energy from sunlight. Humans can also experience the health benefits of chlorophyll by consuming a variety of green leafy vegetables, for example, in spinach or wheatgrass .

This process of photosynthesis then consists of two series which are divided according to the need for light and where it occurs. The following is a complete explanation of the series of photosynthetic processes in plants and organisms that have natural green pigments:

Light reaction

In the light reaction there is a hill reaction which then really needs light in the process of making sugar and oxygen. The light energy captured by chlorophyll functions as a breaker for water molecules. This splitting of water molecules is also known as photolysis.

Meanwhile, different types of chlorophyll pigments can only absorb wavelengths with different magnitudes of photons (light energy). The grana are where the light reactions take place. These grana are stacks of thylakoids. The light energy in the grana will then help accelerate the release of electrons from the photosystems inside the thylakoid membrane.

Thylakoids, proteins, and other molecules in the leaf cells will then form a photosystem. The photosystem is the site of hundreds of photosynthetic pigment molecules. This photosystem is divided into two, namely photosystem 1 and photosystem II. Then, the two will work together to produce ATP and NADPH2 as the main products of the light reactions.

Dark Reaction

The dark reaction is known as the Calvin-Benson cycle. In the dark reaction or in the Calvin reaction, sunlight is not required in the process of producing sugar and oxygen. This dark reaction phenomenon then occurs after the light reaction.

The dark reaction is the process by which ATP and NADPH are fertilized by CO2 and then become sugar. The stroma is also where the dark reactions take place. In the stroma fixation, reduction, and regeneration occur. The phases that occur in the stroma, namely:

• CO2 binding (fixation).
• reduction
• Formation of RuBP (Ribulose Bisphosphate).

This dark reaction is then divided through several processes, including carbon dioxide which is bound by RuBp to give rise to phosphoglycerate (PGA). PGA is reduced giving birth to PGAL (phosphoglyceraldehyde) . PGAL will then be regenerated into glucose and RuBp.

Conditions for the Occurrence of Photosynthesis

The place where photosynthesis occurs is in the leaves. Then, so that plants can produce carbohydrates more quickly in the photosynthesis process, there are a number of conditions that must then be met, such as the following:

1. This leaf consists of cells that are arranged regularly so that sunlight can then be received efficiently.
2. These regularly arranged cells must contain chloroplasts within them.
3. Between the cells that are arranged in an orderly manner, there are spaces between the cells so that air and the outside can enter through the spaces between the cells.
4. These tightly arranged cells must be protected by epidermal tissue so that they are not scattered later.

Factors Affecting Photosynthesis

The success of plants and autotrophic organisms in a process of making food through the process of photosynthesis is influenced and requires several factors. As for the factors of photosynthesis, among others?

Light

Light as a main component so that photosynthesis can take place properly:

Light intensity

Each plant has different light requirements. C3 type plants (ie legumes, cotton, soybeans, potatoes and wheat) have very low light tolerance, so when they are exposed to high light intensity, they will not increase their photosynthetic intensity. Meanwhile, C4 plants (sugarcane, corn, and sorghum) have very high light tolerance. At high light intensity it will then help increase the intensity of photosynthesis.

Light Wavelength

Each color spectrum then has a different wavelength. However, chlorophyll can absorb more red and blue colors, because the wavelength of light is very effective.

Temperature

All plants will require different temperatures. For C3 plants, the optimal temperature then needed is around 20-26℃. Meanwhile for C4 plants the optimal temperature needed to photosynthesize is around 35-40℃. When the plant is mature, all the tissues in the plant or plant will then be formed more perfectly, so that it can help increase the effectiveness and rate of the photosynthesis process.

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and Oxygen (O2) Concentrations

Carbon dioxide will greatly affect a photosynthesis. The higher the concentration of carbon dioxide in the air, the rate of photosynthesis will increase. In contrast to carbon dioxide, the more O2 concentration, the lower the intensity of photosynthesis.

Water and Nutrient Content

The process of photosynthesis will then be disrupted if a plant lacks water. Likewise with abundant water, this will also interfere with the process of photosynthesis. Chlorophyll also really needs the elements Mg (magnesium) and N (nitrogen). When these two elements are deficient, the rate of photosynthesis will decrease.

Benefits of Photosynthesis

The benefits of the process of photosynthesis and the chemical processes that occur in autotrophic organisms are not only beneficial for plants, but also beneficial for all living things. Some of the benefits of photosynthesis that you need include:

Producing Oxygen for Living Things

In the process of photosynthesis, plants will also help remove by-products, including oxygen. This oxygen itself is needed by living things to breathe. In addition, when this chemical change occurs, plants will then absorb carbon dioxide that comes from pollution. When carbon dioxide is absorbed, the air around the plants will then feel cleaner and fresher.

Forming Fruits and Tubers in Plants

Fruits and tubers are food reserves resulting from this chemical process. Fruits and tubers can also be used by humans and animals as a food source. These fruits and tubers contain vitamins and compounds that are beneficial to the human body.

Produces Glucose

Besides oxygen and fruit, there is also glucose. Glucose in plants is then used as fuel in building other food substances, such as fat or protein. Both of these substances are needed in animals and humans, especially protein is also very good for the body. This is because protein can repair cells and help boost human immunity.

Humidify the Air in the Surrounding Environment

Natural 10% air humidity comes from plants. This increased humidity will then have an effect on humans, namely a calming effect, overcoming fatigue, and making sleep more restful.

Producing Foodstuffs

The main function of a photosynthetic process, is its ability to produce food. For example, fruit, tubers and glucose. The content of nutrients in this plant itself is very useful for consumption by humans and animals. Therefore, the ability of plants to convert sunlight energy into chemical energy (food substances) is then always a link in a food chain.

Closing

Based on all the explanations above, it can be concluded that photosynthesis is a process of compiling simple compounds to become complex compounds, in plant parts which then contain chlorophyll.

The process of photosynthesis will also help produce the main product in the form of carbohydrates which are stored as a food reserve including fruit. This process will also really need the help of sunlight. When fruit is eaten by other living things, a phenomenon of energy transfer has occurred.

Definition of fiscal – The government uses fiscal as a form of state revenue that is collected from the public, for example obtained from taxes paid by its people. Thus it can be said that this policy is one of the factors that shape a country’s economy.

Does the word fiscal sound familiar to you? So what exactly is fiscal? Check out the explanation of the article below so that you know more about what fiscal is.

Fiscal & Monetary Policy: Theory & Empirical

Fiscal Definition

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary

Fiscal / fis·cal / a relating to matters of tax or state income.
The word fiscal itself comes from the Latin word fiscus which is the name of someone who has or holds power over finances in ancient Roman times.

Then, in fiscal English it is called fisc which means treasury or regulation of the entry and exit of money in the kingdom.

According to the Financial Services Authority (OJK)

Matters concerning finance, especially with regard to matters of tax or state revenue (fiscal) .

In general

Fiscal is all matters relating to taxes or state income, Fiscal comes from the community and is considered by the government as income that is used for spending various programs. Fiscal is used to produce achievements on national income, production and the economy and is used as a balance device in the economy.

Definition of Fiscal Policy

Fiscal policy is an economic policy carried out by the government in managing state finances. Fiscal policy is limited to sources of state revenue and state expenditure allocations, which are listed in the State Revenue and Expenditure Budget (APBN). The purpose of fiscal policy is to make the country’s economic conditions better

According to the Financial Services Authority (OJK), fiscal policy is a policy on taxation, revenue, accounts payable, and government spending with specific economic goals.

For developed countries, the role of fiscal policy from the government will be even greater in the mechanism for establishing the level of national income. Meanwhile, in developing countries, the role of fiscal policy is more directed at efforts to increase investment through capital formation.

Fiscal Policy Objectives

Broadly speaking, the objective of fiscal policy is to influence the course of the economy with the following objectives:

1. Increasing GDP (country GDP and GDP per capita)

Fiscal policy will affect various lines of the economy, so that every time the government makes changes or updates to fiscal policy, it is expected to be able to stimulate growth in various sectors. In this case, various economic lines are meant, i.e. customs and excise, land and building taxes, income taxes, foreign exchange, imports, tourism, and others.

The more state income grows, the industrial sector will grow as well, so that a country’s economy can continue to experience growth. To measure the level of the country’s economy usually uses the calculation of the Gross Domestic Product (GDP) or commonly called the Gross Domestic Product (GDP). Currently, Indonesia is one of the countries with the largest GDP in Asia, namely 15,434 trillion rupiah in 2020.

The greater the country’s GDP value, the more fiscal policies issued by the government will also affect the level of GDP per capita or per capita income of the people which is also increasing.

2. Expanding Employment and Reducing Unemployment

Unemployment is a problem that is a scourge in a country. In Indonesia, due to the COVID-19 pandemic, the Central Statistics Agency (BPS) noted that the number of unemployed people in Indonesia in the February 2021 period was 8.75 million people.

This number continues to grow and even rises 26.26% compared to the same period last year and the number of poor people in March 2021 reached 27.54 million people. This number has also increased compared to March last year which amounted to 26.42 million people.

As the economy develops, the industrial sector and the business world also develop, the labor market will also be boosted. The greater the economic growth in the country, the demand for labor from the labor-intensive sector will also increase. Therefore, fiscal policy will also affect labor conditions.

3. Stabilize the prices of goods/ Overcome Inflation

Government policies in regulating inflation will then affect economic and social conditions. When the government decides to increase fuel or food prices, many people will be affected economically, so demand will also decrease.

The response from the public will affect the condition of the oil and gas industry which will then have wider implications for various other economic sectors. Meanwhile, inflation can provide benefits such as creating full employment opportunities.

The problem of unstable inflation has the potential to reduce public trust in the government. Fiscal policy, ideally issued by the government with the aim of fixing prices, for example increasing prices when the value is too low or controlling prices and lowering them when prices are too high.

Through fiscal policy, it is hoped that the level of national income, employment opportunities, the level of national investment, and the distribution of national income will increase and run well.

Introduction to Fiscal Policy

Types of Fiscal Policy

Fiscal policy is basically divided into two kinds, namely according to theory, according to the amount of income and expenditure, and according to its application. Here is the full explanation:

Theoretical Fiscal Policy

1. Functional Fiscal Policy

Functional policy is to improve the quality of the economy at the macro level, the effect of which can only be seen in the long term, such as looking at the indirect effects on national income, especially to increase employment opportunities. For example, by awarding college scholarships, initial financial assistance, and others.

2. Intentional or Planned Fiscal Policy

This policy is a policy in overcoming the economic problems that are being faced by deliberately manipulating the budget, either through changes in taxation or changes in government spending.

The function of this fiscal policy is to deal with certain problems, such as epidemics and economic crises. For example, the state budget allocation for the health sector during a pandemic.

There are three forms of intentional fiscal policy, namely first, making changes to government spending. Second, make changes to the tax collection system. Three, make changes simultaneously either in government management or the tax collection system.

3. Accidental Fiscal Policy

Unintentional fiscal policy is a policy in controlling the speed of the business cycle so that it is not too volatile. This policy protects the economic stability of the non-government sector in the form of decisions or rules, such as fixing maximum retail prices. Types of involuntary fiscal policies, such as proposals, progressive taxes, minimum price policies, and unemployment insurance.

Fiscal Policy of Total Receipts and Expenditures

1. Surplus Fiscal Policy

This fiscal policy is oriented towards the goal of creating a surplus in income, or the value of income that the government records is more than expenditure. The purpose of this surplus fiscal policy is to avoid a spike in the inflation rate.

To achieve this, it can be done by reducing the budget for spending. In addition, it can accelerate a number of revenue components, such as taxation and excise. Intervention on taxation and excise policies will affect the realization of government revenues.

2. Deficit Fiscal Policy

Deficit fiscal policy is the opposite of the type of surplus fiscal policy, this type is oriented towards the goal of making the value of spending greater than the value of income.

Usually, this policy is taken to inject the economy so that it is more vibrant, in the sense that the state government is usually willing to experience a deficit by increasing budget spending so that the economy can be boosted more.

One of the advantages of this policy is overcoming the sluggishness and depression of economic growth. As for the drawback, the country is always in a state of deficit.

3. Balanced Fiscal Policy

Balanced fiscal policy is a policy that makes revenue and spending the same amount. There are positive and negative impacts of this one fiscal policy. On a positive note, the state does not need to borrow a certain amount of funds, both from within the country and abroad. Negatively, economic conditions will deteriorate if the country’s economy is in unfavorable conditions.

4. Dynamic Fiscal Policy

This type of policy is a fiscal policy that is looser in nature or easy to regulate when conditions change significantly. The purpose of this policy is to provide revenue that can be used to meet the growing needs of the government over time.

Application Policy

1. Expansive Fiscal Policy

This type of policy is usually used when the unemployment rate is higher and or during periods of a low business cycle.

The purpose of expansionary fiscal policy is to provide money to the public. That way, people can use the money to carry out economic activities, so that it will stimulate the country’s economic rate.

2. Contractive Fiscal Policy

Contractive fiscal policy is generally used rarely. The goal is to slow economic growth and stamp out inflation. The long-term impact of inflation can damage people’s living standards due to recession. This policy is carried out by tightening or reducing state spending or spending activities and increasing taxes.

Fiscal Policy Instruments

Practically, financial (fiscal) policy instruments can be divided into several types, such as:

1. State Income

According to Law no. 17 of 2013, State Revenue is money that enters the state treasury. the main sources of state revenue are tax revenues, Non-Tax State Revenues (PNBP) and Grants, from these three sources which are commonly used as active instruments are Tax Revenues.

Tax revenue can be regarded as the main source of state revenue. Tax revenue itself can be categorized into two types, namely Domestic Tax and International Trade Tax. Domestic Tax is divided into several types, namely Income Tax (PPh), Value Added Tax and Sales Tax on Luxury Goods (PPn and PPnBM), Land and Building Tax (PBB).

With an optimal tax ratio measure, it will encourage the country’s development without burdening the economy as a whole. Taxes can also support overall economic growth, the ability of taxes to stimulate the economy is called tax buoyancy.

Another source of state revenue is Non-Tax State Revenue (PNBP). PNBP consists of Revenue from Natural Resources (SDA) which consists of oil and gas natural resources and non-oil and gas natural resources, profit share of State-Owned Enterprises (BUMN) which is specified based on banking and non-banking SOEs, Revenue from Public Service Agencies such as Hospitals , Universities and others as well as other PNBP Revenues such as payment of ticket fines, results of auctions of confiscated goods and so on.

2. State Expenditures

According to Law no. 17 of 2013, State Expenditure is an obligation of the central government which is recognized as a deduction from net worth. there are 2 types of state spending namely Central Government expenditure and Transfer Expenditures to Regions and Village Funds (TKDD).

Central Government Expenditure is generally divided into two categories, namely Expenditure Based on Organization and Expenditure Based on Function. When viewed based on the organization, Central government spending can be subdivided into spending for ministries or institutions and spending on non-ministerial institutions (such as subsidies and debt interest payments).

State spending can be said as a form of government commitment to the economy as a whole. The amount of state spending on the economy is the government’s contribution to growth. Therefore, state spending is expected to be used as an instrument to achieve development goals, such as reducing poverty, reducing inequality, increasing growth and so on.

3. Financing

According to Law no. 17 of 2013, Financing is any revenue that needs to be repaid and/or expenses that will be received back, both in the relevant fiscal year and in subsequent fiscal years. Financing is an implication that occurs when State Expenditure is greater than State Revenue (based on Law no. 2013 article 12 paragraph 3). Financing consists of Debt Financing, Investment Financing, Lenders, Borrowing Obligations, and other financing.

Debt financing can be done by issuing government securities and making loans. Furthermore, loans can come from domestic sources and foreign sources. The government always maintains the quality of its credit in order to obtain optimal debt financing.

Examples of Fiscal Policy in Indonesia

The following are examples of fiscal policies in Indonesia:

1. Tax Incentives During the Covid-19 Pandemic

The government provides relief in the form of eliminating a number of taxes for corporations during the Covid-19 pandemic. This affects the performance of the government’s revenue from taxes, which in terms of the percentage portion in the state budget is quite high. When tax incentives are implemented, it means that the government will give up less and less value of tax revenue to be received. But on the other hand, this step was taken as an effort to keep the economy stable.

When the corporate tax is abolished, the company’s burden will be smaller, so that it can help the company’s activities in carrying out production. In this way, it is hoped that the tax relief stimulus will be able to stimulate the economy so that the effects of the pandemic on the economy are not too severe.

2. Increasing the Budget for Handling Covid-19

The government has also again increased the value of the budget for handling Covid-19 through the 2021 national economic recovery program (PEN) to more than IDR 700 trillion, this is up from around IDR 690 trillion last year.

This large budget certainly sucks up a lot of the government’s budget which was originally allocated for certain programs and then diverted to deal with the pandemic. In addition, this increase in the value of the budget makes the need for funds even higher which, at the same time, the government experiences a decrease in revenue. To finance the budget deficit, the government will be more diligent in withdrawing debt.

Closing

Well Readers, that’s an explanation of the meaning of fiscal, to examples of fiscal policy in Indonesia. Hopefully all the discussion that has been explained can be useful for Readers.

 

Understanding Physics – When studying the nature of physics, maybe Readers will like it, because he is really interested in that science. Even so, there are those who are guaranteed to feel otherwise, because they are not really interested in physics. Physics itself is almost the same as mathematics, which many say is a science that is difficult to understand.

If pure mathematics contains numbers with calculations, then physics contains a combination of theory with calculations. Physics is a subject that has been known since sitting on the bench class VII junior high school. If Readers at the high school level enters the science major, then physics lessons will also become friends because this subject will appear more frequently in the lesson schedule every day.

In certain departments or study programs, students at tertiary institutions will also get physics courses. So, check again the types of courses that will be obtained. If you have avoided physics all this time, then also avoid study programs that provide these courses.

Although, few people like physics, but this one lesson is actually interesting to learn. After understanding the formula and how to calculate each material, it is guaranteed that the calculation process will become easier and the same goes for the process of understanding word problems.

Therefore, it never hurts to learn about the nature of physics which is one of the most useful lessons in everyday life. This means that physics is an important science to understand because it is from this knowledge that many useful things can be found.

What is Physics?

Learning about physics can begin with understanding the meaning of physics itself. Physics according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) has a definition as a science that discusses and studies matter and energy, which includes light, heat, and sound energy.

The definition of physics continues to develop and is put forward by many experts. Among them are:

1. Efrizon Umar

According to Efrizon Umar, physics has a definition as one of the most basic sciences of all sciences. So that physics becomes a basic science that is useful for understanding, studying, and developing other knowledge from various fields.

2. Young Hugh D

Meanwhile, according to Young Hugh D, physics is said to be one of the sciences which is the underlying science of other sciences. This definition is of course no different from the definition stated by Efrizon Umar.

3. Bambang Ruwanto

Bambang Ruwanto also expressed his opinion regarding the understanding and nature of physics. Physics is characterized by Ruwanto as basic sciences (science) and is included in the fundamental sciences. So Ruwanto also mentioned that physics is a science that forms the basis of various other sciences.

4. Osa Pauliza

Osa Pauliza also expressed his opinion related to the understanding of physics. Pauliza said that physics is a science that studies something that can be measured and has a value expressed in a certain unit. This unit varies according to the type of substance or object being measured.

5. Goris Seran D

Goris Seran D also explained the meaning of physics. According to Goris, physics is a branch of natural science and is one of the foundations for advanced and modern technological developments now and in the future.

6. Ari Damari

Ari Damari also conveyed the understanding of physics as a science that studies various phenomena and natural phenomena. So that all events and phenomena in nature will be studied in depth through physics.

History of the Development of Physics

After understanding the meaning of physics in terms of the definition in the previous explanation, Readers also needs to know the history of physics from birth to development and becomes the basis of other sciences.

Since ancient times, people have been curious about the nature of matter on earth. For example, why can fruit fall from a tree and then fall not far from the tree? Then, the question is why every different material has different properties?

Another thing that makes human curiosity and curiosity arise is about various things that exist on earth. For example, with the shape of the earth, the appearance of the sky during the day and night. the process of rising and setting the sun in the afternoon, and so on.

Various things and events as well as all kinds of objects around humans basically attract human interest. So that this encourages the birth of basic knowledge in science, namely physics.

Dikp from various sources, the nature of physics continues to grow rapidly since the Egyptian people began to do various kinds of research which then gave birth to a lot of practical knowledge. This physics was then used by the ancient Egyptians to create pyramids.

Because, in physics, all the processes of calculating inclined planes and the mechanical advantages of pyramid construction are studied. These two things then encouraged the construction of the pyramids and is one of the wonders of the world.

Then, the Greeks also had a high interest in physics and made the Greeks widely known as a society that admired physics. In the end, many physicists or scientists emerged from Greece and Egypt.

The theory of physics then continued to develop, starting from the 17th century, when many theories of physics were still wrong. Entering the early 17th century, Galileo Galilei conducted experiments to find out more about physics. Research conducted by Galileo later became the key to the scientific method to the present.

For example, being the originator of Newton’s Law of Motion and then also sparking the theory of Newton’s Law of Gravity. Since they were first released and published, these two basic laws of physics are still relevant and studied today by many people.

The theory and development of the nature of physics then continues and finds various things in the scientific field of physics. In his time scientists Robert Boyle, Thomas Young, and others were the forerunners of the presence of the best physicists and physicists around the world.

Properties of Physics

The next point to be discussed is regarding the various properties of physics. What is meant by the nature of physics is all the properties of matter that can be seen directly by the sense of sight, namely the eye. In addition, physical properties can also change shape.

For example changes in shape from liquid to solid, from solid to gas, from gas to liquid, and so on. All these changes indicate the existence of physical properties of an object that is being treated in a special way. Whether it’s warmed, frozen, and so on to observe the results.

1. Physical Form of Substance

The first type of physical property is the state of matter, which is the study of all states of matter that exist in nature. The form of this substance is then divided into three, namely:

A. Solid

The first state of matter in physics is solid, that is, a state of matter that has a fixed shape and volume. Solids are composed of particles that are arranged regularly and close together, so that their shape and volume are always the same.

B. Liquid

Next is liquid, which is a form of a substance that has a fixed volume, but its shape can easily change. The particles that make up liquids are close together, but are loose and arranged in an orderly manner like solids, but the attractive force is weak.

The state of the liquid is easy to change, but the volume is fixed because the particles in the liquid cannot leave other particles. So even though the shape is easy to change, the volume will remain the same.

C. Gas

The last form is gas. Gas is a form of matter that has shape and volume properties that can easily change. The particles that make up the gas are far from each other, irregular, and the attractive force between the particles is also weak.

This makes the gas form easy to change because the particles that compose it can move freely without being bound by anything. In addition, the volume is also easy to change.

2. Substance Turbidity

The second physical property is turbidity or what can be said to be the degree of turbidity of a liquid. Because the term turbidity is only owned by liquid substances. Turbid liquid can deflect light or light that is shot at it, while clear liquid will continue the light.

3. Substance Boiling Point

In the essence of physics there is also a physical property called the boiling point. The boiling point is the temperature of a liquid when it boils (is heated). Some people after knowing the definition of the boiling point may feel confused about the difference between yawning and yawning.

So, boiling and evaporating are two different things. Boiling means the temperature at which a substance comes to the boiling point. While evaporating means the temperature at which a substance is below the boiling point. For example, clothes that are dried in the sun, the water inside the cloth will evaporate and not boil.

However, when boiling water on the stove, the water will boil and not evaporate. Boiling does not change the structure and volume of liquids. However, when it evaporates, it changes state, from liquid to vapor or gas.

4. Substance Solubility

The next property is the solubility of substances, or what is often referred to as a solution. Solution is a condition in which a homogeneous mixture is formed between two substances or two different components. One of these two substances has a role as a solvent, and the other becomes a solute.

Substances that are solvents generally have a greater amount, and vice versa. In substances that have a role as a solute has a smaller amount. For example, when dissolving detergent in a bucket of water, the amount of detergent is generally only one or two tablespoons, while the amount of water can be up to one liter.

The solubility process is also known to be influenced by various factors, for example:

1. Temperature, because it dissolves substances at high temperatures faster than substances dissolved at room temperature. For example, stirring sugar dissolves faster in warm water than in cold water.
2. The volume of solvent, the greater the amount or volume of the solvent, the faster the dissolution process. For example, dissolving a teaspoon of sugar in 100 ml of water will be slower than dissolving it in 500 ml of water.
3. The size of the solute, because the larger the size of the substance, the more difficult it will be for the substance to dissolve. For example, dissolving granulated sugar in 100 ml of water will be faster than dissolving rock sugar in 100 ml of water. Because the size of rock sugar is bigger when compared to granulated sugar.

5. Viscosity

The next characteristic in the nature of physics is viscosity or what is more familiar with the name viscosity. Viscosity itself is the resistance of a liquid to flow, so that a dilute liquid will flow faster when compared to a thick liquid. An instrument for measuring the viscosity of liquids is known as a viscometer.

Branch of Physics

Physics is included in the basic science of all sciences and then has many branches of science. Some of them are:

1. Mechanics, namely the branch of physics that specifically studies motion.
2. Quantum Physics, which is a branch of physics that studies atoms and sub-atoms.
3. Electronics, namely physics that studies about the flow of electrons in a device. For example on TV and various electronic equipment.
4. Thermodynamics, namely the branch of physics that studies heat energy or temperature transfer.
5. Astronomy, namely a branch of physics that specifically studies about the stars or about objects in outer space.
6. Medical Physics, which is a branch of physics that studies medicine.
7. Biomechanics, namely studying the forces and laws of fluids that exist in the human body.
8. Biooptics, namely studying the organs of the eye and also its use of various optical devices such as glasses and contact lenses.
9. Bioelectric, namely studying about striated cells in cells in the body.
10. Geometric Optics, namely a branch of physics that studies light and various tools that can be used to help human vision.

Benefits and Role of Physics in Life

Physics for most people is a science that is difficult to understand, understand, and so on. Even so, physics has been taught since junior high and even elementary school and is still integrated with science lessons. This is inseparable from the benefits of physics in everyday life, such as:

1. Physics will help humans to always think logically, because they can think about everything and all events in a systematic and explainable manner.
2. Helping to understand all natural phenomena that are good for the development of human civilization, so that they can understand which natural phenomena can be enjoyed and which ones are classified as dangerous.
3. Make it easy to learn science from other fields because physics is very relevant to all fields of science.
4. Supporting technological progress, because all technology until now is based on physics.

 

Definition of Firma – In running a business, there are several business entities that can be selected. You can choose it according to your needs. Because choosing the right business entity will affect many things in the future.

These business entities include limited liability companies (PT), firms, limited liability companies (CV), and other business entities. The most frequently found business entities in Indonesia are firms. If you want to know the meaning of a firm further, then there’s nothing wrong with reading all of the following articles about firms.

Definition of Firm Business Entity

Where each member has full responsibility for the progress of the company. So, in Indonesia, firms have entered and are regulated in the Commercial Code (KUHD) and the Civil Code (KUHPerdata).

The definition of a firm in the Indonesian Criminal Code is any association established to run a company under one common name. Then the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) also mentions the definition of a firm, namely a trade association established to run a joint business under one name in which each member has full responsibility. So when running a firm, each member must play an active role for the progress of the company. Then for business activities that can be run on a small scale or large scale.

It should also be noted that in a Firm Alliance there is only one type of partner, namely complementary or pledge. Complementary partners or the firm are in charge of running the company. This also includes entering into legal relations or cooperation with third parties. So partners are personally responsible for the progress of the company.

Furthermore, it should also be noted that in establishing a firm, its members will hand over all personal assets in accordance with the provisions stated in the deed of establishment of the company. So if the established firm suffers a loss or goes bankrupt, all members of the firm are obliged to take responsibility.

So, this firm cannot be said to be a business with a legal entity. Because there is no separator between the wealth of one member and another. So each member has full responsibility for the firm.

In addition, a firm cannot be called a legal entity because it fulfills the material requirements but does not yet have formal requirements, namely ratification or recognition from the state in the form of legislation.

What Are the Requirements for Establishing a Firm?

1. Founded by a minimum of two people

The first requirement for the establishment of a firm is the minimum number of members consisting of two people. If you want to set up a business independently with your own members, then set up a trading business or UD.

2. Determine the name to be used and registered

Both you and the members have to come up with a name for the firm. Do not decide the name of the firm yourself, because the firm is not privately owned. So have discussions with other members openly to decide on a name.

3. Have a governing body and members who are actively involved

Third, each member of the firm must have their respective positions and responsibilities. With this division of tasks, it is expected that the operational and management activities of business entities can run smoothly and in a structured manner.

4. Having clear and directed business goals

The fourth requirement is to have a clear business establishment objective. That way, the firm will be easier to run. Without a goal, of course the company cannot run well.

5. Has determined the domicile of the firm’s business

Before setting up a firm, of course you must already have a domicile or place of business. Because this domicile will be the address for your business and members. In addition, this address is also a requirement for registering a firm as a business entity and making a deed of establishment of a business entity later.

What are the characteristics of a firm business entity?

1. Use a name that is approved by all members

The firm’s business entity has members who all must be responsible and take part in the progress of the firm. Therefore, everyone will influence the sustainability of the firm. So that the name used must also be the result of discussion and approval of all its members.

2. Have members who are active in managing the company

The second feature is that each member must be active in managing the company. Because the responsibilities of each member are the same, all members must actively participate in making decisions and running the firm.

3. Liability liability is unlimited

The third feature is unlimited liability. That is, if there are dependent obligations such as debts that must be repaid by the firm, then all members are legally obliged to spend money to pay off these debts.

4. Has a limited time period

Fourth, namely the establishment of a firm business entity in general has a limited period of time or age. That is, if a member decides to leave, then the firm is considered legally dissolved. However, if later a new member joins, the firm is considered to be still operating.

5. Profits and losses are shared over a number of members

The next feature of the firm is the distribution of profits or profits, namely proportionally according to the activeness of the members. So all members, without exception, are entitled to receive profit sharing from the company. The provisions for the distribution of profits and losses are all stated in the deed of establishment of the business entity at the beginning.

6. Wealth belongs together

The final characteristic is that the firm’s assets are shared property. Any wealth owned by members invested in the firm will automatically become shared rights. So every member when they want to use firm funds must obtain approval from all members. The responsibility of a member is also not limited to the amount of investment.

Because all investments in the firm are no longer owned separately. Then the rights of members to the assets of the firm will appear in the final capital balance, which consists of investing in the initial and additional balances, taking prive, adding to profit sharing and deducting from sharing losses.

What Are the Types of Firm Business Entities?

1. Trading firm

The first type of firm is a trading firm, which operates in the trading industry. The main activity is the buying and selling of goods. Examples of trading firms are Nike, Crocks, Diadora, and others.

2. Service or non-trade firms

Then the second type of firm is a non-trade (service) firm that operates in the service sector or focuses on selling services based on expertise. Examples are accounting firms (public accounting firms) and law firms (legal consultants).

3. General firm (general partnership)

That is a firm whose all members have unlimited power. So all members are responsible for the operational activities and accounts payable of the company.

4. Limited Partnership

Fourth is a limited firm, where all members in this firm do not have free powers like a public firm. So the responsibilities and obligations of each member are also limited.

What are the Firm’s Strengths and Weaknesses?

1. The amount of capital that can be obtained is far greater than that of an individual. Because capital is a combination of each member, making it possible for firms to obtain large amounts of capital. That way, expanding the network of cooperation and business will be easier to do.
2. If you still need additional capital, then a fairly large initial capital can be used to seek credit. In addition, applying for credit will also be easier because there is a notarial deed.
3. Because it has several members, the division of tasks can be done more evenly. Management within the firm has also become more organized, because everyone will play a role according to their expertise in their respective fields.
4. Each member has a genuine concern for the company. Because in the firm, all members have responsibility for the progress of the company.
5. The procedure for establishing a firm business entity can also be said to tend to be easier and less complicated.
6. Distribution of profits or profits is based on the initial capital, so the system is almost the same as investing in shares. The difference is, every member of the firm who invests has the right and responsibility to manage the company.

Besides having advantages, firms also have disadvantages. By knowing the firm’s deficiencies, you will be able to map out a strategy to overcome these deficiencies. So that when running the firm, all the problems that arise have a solution. The deficiencies of the firm are as follows:

1. All members of the firm have responsibility for the firm’s debts. So each member must participate in paying off the debt that is the obligation of the firm.
2. There is no separation between ownership rights and company-owned assets.
3. Because the company is run by more than one person, it is also prone to conflict between members. Especially when their respective opinions for the betterment of the firm conflict.
4. Because all members are fully responsible for the firm, if one day the firm goes bankrupt, the assets owned by its members can be confiscated to serve as collateral for the company’s losses.
5. If one member gets into trouble with the law or whatever, the other members will get involved.
6. The survival of the company is not guaranteed, because if a member leaves, the firm will automatically disband.

So, those were some of the firm’s advantages and disadvantages. By knowing both, you can make judgments when choosing a firm as a joint venture. If each member understands the above matters, then the firm’s journey after its establishment will certainly be much better.

This is because all members are well aware of the ins and outs of a firm and what the consequences will be if they choose to set up a firm. Apart from that, you and your allies can also make an agreement in advance to prevent as well as find alternative solutions if you encounter problems that were previously known.

What are the Procedures and Conditions for Dissolving a Firm Business Entity?

1. The term of the firm has expired in accordance with the deed of establishment
2. One of the partners or members has resigned or left
3. The destruction of merchandise or the completion of the business carried out by the firm
4. There is a will to dissolve the firm by one or several partners
5. If one of the partners dies or is declared bankrupt.

Apart from things that can dissolve a firm, Articles 31-35 of the Criminal Code also explain the following matters:

1. Changes to the firm must be stated in the deed
2. Changes to the deed must be registered with the Registrar of the District Court
3. Changes to the deed must be announced in the state news
4. As for changes to the deed that are not announced, they will be binding on third parties
5. Settlements made by the company are other parties that have been mutually agreed upon or have been appointed by the court.

It should also be noted that the documents that will be needed to dissolve the firm include a deed of dissolution, a court decision declaring the dissolution of the firm, as well as other supporting documents declaring dissolution. Then, after the dissolution process is complete, it is necessary to carry out a settlement or liquidation. So, in Article 32 of the Criminal Code it is stated that the election of a liquidator can be carried out under the following conditions:

1. The first step is to look back at the provisions in the partnership establishment agreement that existed at the beginning of the establishment
2. If it is not listed in number 1, then the management’s partners are obliged to make arrangements
3. In the establishment agreement, one person who is not a partner can be appointed to be the liquidator.
4. The partners may jointly discuss and appoint one partner who is not an administrator to make arrangements.
5. If the majority of votes from the results of discussions or deliberations have been obtained, the partners can ask the court for help to determine a liquidator.

That was the meaning of the firm and various other things about this business entity. There are various types of business entities that can be established. But of course it’s much better when you understand the ins and outs of each business entity, because that way the business you run will be more optimal. 

What is Firm? The word firma comes from the Dutch language, namely vennootschap onder firma or VOF which can be interpreted as a trade union between several companies.

In general, the firm itself is usually called a form of partnership between two or more companies to run a business using a common name. In the distribution of ownership, a firm is owned by several people or companies that are allied with the provisions that each member of the partnership surrenders personal assets according to what is stated in the deed of establishment of the company.

Definition of Firm According to Experts

1. Willem Molengraaff

According to Willem Molengraaff, a firm is an association, association or association established to run a company under one common name and where its members are not limited in their responsibility to the company’s engagement with third parties.

2. Wery

Meanwhile, Wery argues that a firm is a company operating under a joint name, but not as a limited liability company.

3. Slagters

Furthermore, Slagter revealed that the word is a cooperation agreement between two or more people with a common name to carry out the activities of a company, with the aim of obtaining benefits from shared property rights. This is done so that the company can achieve the objectives of the parties between them which require them to bind themselves by entering money, goods, good name, rights or a combination thereof into the association.

4. Indonesian Commercial Law Law

In accordance with the Commercial Law of the Republic of Indonesia, a firm is any company established with the aim of running a company under one common name.

In conclusion, a firm is a business entity established and run by two or more people (called Firmant) using a common name or one name used together to develop the company.

According to Article 16 and Article 18 of the Criminal Code of the Ministry of Finance, a Firma Company is each company (maatschap) that is established to run a company or business under one common name, where each member immediately gets full responsibility for all actions carried out by third party people.

Even so, the firm is not a legal entity. Conceptually, the firm does not recognize the term separation of assets between its members, each member is personally responsible for the overall and sustainability of the company. In addition, the reason why a firm cannot be said to be a legal entity is because the firm has met the material requirements but does not yet have the formal requirements in the form of ratification or recognition from the State in the form of legislation.

What is Theory of the Firm?

The Theory of the Firm or commonly called Firm Theory contains several economic theories that describe and imagine the nature of a company (company), from its structure, relationship with the market, behavior, to its existence.

The theory aims to answer the following questions:

1. Presence

Existence is important because it is the basis for why companies emerge.

The question that usually arises is: Why aren’t all transactions in the economy mediated in the market?

2. Limits

Boundaries become indispensable as to why the boundary between the market and the firm lies exactly there. It is closely related to the variety and size of the output.

The usual questions that arise are: Which transactions are negotiated in the market and which are carried out internally?

3. Organization

The existence of an organization can be a picture of a firma so that it can answer the question, why is the company structured the way it is, with a hierarchy, a central point, etc.?

4. Heterogeneity of Corporate Actions/Performance

Company performance serves to answer the question why companies do things, what drives them?

5. Evidence

Evidence is crucial because what tests are currently available for each theory?

A Scottish moral philosopher who pioneered the science of political economy, Adam Smith. Adam Smith is still known by many as the ‘father of modern economics’, in his monumental work – The Wealth of Nations. He emphasized that in the world of manufacturing, they can work more efficiently in production than workers or craftsmen when working alone.

Adam Smith revealed that a manufacturing company employs a more intense form of division of labor than can be arranged through market exchange. His perspective on the firm in terms of different types of division of labor was widely shared by classical economists.

Firm Features

Some of the characteristics that can be the characteristics of a firm business entity compared to other business entities. Understanding the characteristics and characteristics of a firm can provide knowledge about the various types of business entities in the business world. This insight can certainly be a provision if you want to set up companies and firms. Following are the characteristics of firms in Indonesia:

• Firm members are generally familiar with each other and know each other so they trust each other.
• Firm agreements can be made entrusted to a notary or privately.
• Using the same name in business activities.
• Has unlimited liability and risk of loss.
• If there is an unpaid debt, then each owner is obliged to pay it off with personal assets.
• Every member of the Firm has the responsibility and right to be a leader.
• As a member of the Firm, you are not entitled to admit new members without the permission of other members.
• Firm membership is valid for life.
• Firm members have the right to dissolve the firm.
• Increasing capital from business loans is easier.
• Firm establishment does not need a deed of establishment.

What are the Firm Types?

After understanding the meaning of a firm, the next is knowledge of the types of firms in Indonesia.

1. Trading Firm (Trading Partnership)

A trading firm is one of many types of firms engaged in trading. Trading activities that primarily focus on the buying and selling of products.

Examples of trading firms in Indonesia are: Nike, Diadora, Crocs, and so on.

a. Nike Firm Company

Nike company is well known in almost all parts of the world. Nike company comes from Uncle Sam’s country, United States of America. Nike does not only provide sports equipment such as clothing, Nike’s flagship product is shoes. Nike has become a brand for sports fans, the application of technology in each of its products makes people really like Nike products. As a result, it is very fast for Nike to develop and expand its market to various countries, one of which is also Indonesia.

Until now, the Nike company has quite a lot expanded its branches in Indonesia. This development is carried out from the start of the production process and its management. However, not only that, Nike continues to use standards for its implementation and management procedures according to Nike’s central company in the United States.

b. Diadora firm company

Firma Diadora has the activity of producing sporting goods. Various sports equipment produced for sports such as rugby, sports shoes, athletes, football, tennis, cycling, and so on. The Diadora company was founded by an Italian businessman named Marcello Danieli along with several other people.

c. Crocs Firm Company

Types of firm companies that are also engaged in the fashion sector in Indonesia, one of which is the Crocs firm which has fashion products with the types of shoes and sandals.

This proves that the Crocs firm is one of the many types of trading firms that have succeeded in producing goods that people need. Crocs produces rubber sandals and shoes to make various shapes and colors that attract the public.

2. Non-Trading Firms (Service Firms)

The opposite of a trading firm, a non-trade firm is engaged in services. The company’s main activities focus on selling a product by relying on certain expertise or commonly called services or services.

The following are examples along with explanations regarding non-trade firms in Indonesia, including law firms, accounting firms, management consulting, and many more.

a. Law Firm

As we often see, lawyers’ offices and legal consultants’ offices are usually called law firms. Law firms are included in the category of firms whose activities are non-trade because their activities are related to legal institutions.

The law firm is an example, one of many firms in Indonesia because it was founded and run by a group of people. Law firms exist from active and passive partners with the aim of providing legal services to the community.

b. Accounting Firm

Not only law firms, there are also accounting firms which are a type of non-trade firm in Indonesia. The formation of this accounting firm aims to provide accounting services outside the accounting institutions of a company.

This accounting firm is coordinated by a small group of people who aim to provide accounting services, both services needed by individuals, legal entities, and companies.

4. General Firm (General Partnership)

Different from trading and non trading firms. A public firm is a type of firm where each member has unlimited responsibilities or powers. This means that every member in a public firm must be fully responsible for the survival of the company.

If the company has a debt and is unable to pay it off, then each member of the public firm is obliged to pay the debt with his personal wealth.

5. Limited Partnership

Almost the same as a public firm, it’s just that a limited firm limits the powers of its members. If in a public firm the company members have unlimited power, in a limited firm each member holds a limited power.

Examples of limited firms in Indonesia include Sumber Rezeki Firm, Multi Marketing Firm, Indo Eternity Firm, and so on.

Firm advantages

• The firm’s business entity management system has proven to be more professional due to clear coordination regarding the division of tasks for each organizational structure.
• The initial capital to build a firm is relatively large because the source of funds comes from the cooperation of each member who is a member of the firm.
• Leaders are selected based on their expertise, skills, abilities and skills, thereby minimizing the selection of leaders due to excess power. In addition, there are many firms that have more than one leader in their firm’s business entity.
• Profit sharing is fair because it is based on the initial paid-up capital so that the system resembles investing in shares. The difference is, all members who provide capital in the firm have the active right to manage the running of the company.
• The existence of a notarial deed can make it easier for firms to get capital loans if they really need a very large additional capital.
• Firm decisions depart from the considerations and decisions of all members.

Lack of Firm

• When a company goes bankrupt, as a result the personal wealth and assets of the company owner can be confiscated as collateral to compensate for the company’s losses.
• Firm members are not only responsible for capital. Members of the firm as owners of the company are also responsible for their personal wealth or property.
• If one member of the firm suffers a loss, all members who are members of the firm are obliged to share in the loss. In short, the firm’s losses are shared by all company owners, including if it requires the use of personal wealth to cover losses.
• The firm does not recognize the term separation between personal wealth and company assets.
• Threats of dispute will usually arise if there is an unfair distribution of benefits.

Difference between Firm and Company

Registering your business as a company or firm is more important than developing the right product to be able to meet business needs and provide growth in the coming years.

In the business world, the terms company and firm are often used interchangeably, but conceptually they have different meanings, properties and characteristics. The most prominent differences between companies and firms are as follows:

1. Number of Members

The most important difference between a company and a firm is the number of members. Firms themselves must have a minimum of two people in the company and a maximum of 20 people required to register a firm. Meanwhile, a company only has a maximum number of people or employees when it registers itself.

2. Accountability

Another difference between a company and a firm is responsibility. Each member of the firm has unlimited liability and may be personally liable for the company and its personal assets. As a result, if the company fails to pay debts, the company members are obliged to pay off debts from the firm. This is one of the main weaknesses of the firm, but all can be overcome if based on fairness and professionalism.

Unlike a corporation, in a business entity in the form of a company, founders or partners only have limited liability. That means they are limited to shares due to their investment in the company, but have no personal obligation to the debtor’s affairs. In short, they have no responsibility if the company goes bankrupt or is corrupt.

3. Share Ownership

A registered company is a shareholder in the company, it does not include company employees. In contrast, the firm is owned by many members in partnership. It can distinguish between stakeholders and shareholders who may differ slightly

In a membership firm, members who have a lower number of individuals, partners have greater power to influence decision making in the company when compared to company operations.

4. Annual and Financial Reports

Business actors who have registered as a public limited company are required to follow the public company policy and are required to disclose results and issue an annual report to investors and public shareholders.

Meanwhile, business entities that are registered as firms have no obligation to report their financial information to external parties or third parties and they are not required to publish any reports or maintain their business in discretion.

Firm Establishment Procedure

The procedure for setting up a firm with a group, then what you need to do is understand the process of establishing a firm properly and carefully. The regulations and procedures regarding firm business entities are already listed in article 22 of the Criminal Code. Article 22 of the Criminal Code explains that the establishment of a firm must be based on an authentic deed without the possibility of being denied by a third party.

In accordance with articles 23 and 28 of the Criminal Code, it is also explained that the deed must be registered at the Registrar’s Office of the District Court. This means that the deed is made and then the deed is mandatory to be announced in the News of the Republic of Indonesia.

The deed can contain everything about the firm such as the business agreement, the type of business, when the business was founded, and when the business will end. As a result, establishing a firm business entity is closely related to the legal court process for registering firm deed. If you set up a firm but do not have an authentic deed from the court, then your firm is deemed to have run various businesses and for an unlimited period of time.

• International Organization
• Meaning of Summons
• Example of a column balance
• Example of Bank Reconciliation
• Economic Principles
• Definition of Scarcity
• Definition of Macroeconomics
• Microeconomics
• Economic Recession
• Economic Globalization
• People’s Economy
• Economic agents
• Economic Problems in Indonesia
• Economics
• Types of Economic Systems
• People’s Economy

Referring to the previous understanding of the firm, a business entity can be said to be not a legal entity if the company has met the material requirements and does not meet the formal qualifications. The firm business entity has the obligation to register a NPWP which is separate from the obligations of its owner members, in this case including taxpayers.

Definition of Fintech – Does Readers know about the definition of fintech? Ever heard of but don’t know what fintech is? Currently, we can do almost all activities using our mobile phones , such as transacting online with mobile banking or even opening an account.

The definition of Fintech or financial technology is an innovation in the field of financial services that has been on the rise in Indonesia in recent years. This fintech can provide services in a practical, efficient and economical way. So, in the explanation below, we will discuss further about what fintech means.

Definition of Fintech

The definition of Fintech is an innovation in the financial services industry that utilizes the use of technology. Fintech products are usually in the form of a system built to carry out a specific financial transaction mechanism. Fintech is here for those of you who want to access financial services in a practical, efficient, comfortable and economical way.

The existence of fintech greatly influences the lifestyle of the economic community. The combination of effectiveness and technology has a positive impact on society in general.

Development of Fintech in Indonesia

Along with the rapid development of technology and the growth of startup companies, the greater the development of fintech in Indonesia. In Indonesia, fintech itself started in 2006, but unfortunately at that time there were still companies that used this technology little.

In 2015, the Indonesian fintech association was then established and then public trust started to grow after that. Fintech companies in Indonesia are also experiencing rapid growth, with up to 140 companies listed on the OJK fintech list.

Then, in 2017 sharia fintech began to develop. Sharia fintech is a type of fintech that operates on the basis of Islam. After that, the Indonesian Sharia Fintech Association was formed which oversees Islamic fintech in Indonesia.

Legal Basis for Application of Fintech in Indonesia

Then, the application of fintech in Indonesia has also been regulated by the government through the issuance of Bank Indonesia regulations. The following is the Legal Basis for Fintech in Indonesia

1. Bank Indonesia Circular No. 18/22/KSP regarding the Implementation of Digital Financial Services.
2. Bank Indonesia Regulation No. 18/17/PBI/2016 regulates matters related to Electronic Money
3. Bank Indonesia Regulation No. 18/40/ PBI/2016 stipulates the Implementation of Payment Transaction Processing.

Benefits of Indonesian Fintech

The development of fintech in Indonesia brings many benefits to its users. The following are the benefits of fintech:

1. Financial Transactions Are Easier

The first benefit is that financial transactions become easier. When you make financial transactions, you don’t need to go to a bank or an ATM to make a transaction. You can do this using your smartphone . Therefore, fintech also makes it easier for the community.

2. Better Access to Funding

Thanks to fintech, financial technology is developing rapidly, so that it can reach various groups of people. This also causes more and more people to understand how to get financial assistance to support their daily activities.

3. People’s Standard of Living Has Improved

After the benefits of getting better access to funding, then the community can use these funds to finance the consumptive and productive activities they want. Then, the standard of living and welfare of the community will increase.

4. Supporting Financial Inclusion

Financial inclusion is community involvement in economic transactions, from buying and selling contributions to savings and loans. The ease with which fintech exists bridges various economic accesses, so that financial inclusion is increasing.

5. Accelerating Economic Turnover

Access to finance and ease of transactions will encourage faster and more practical economic circulation. In addition, fintech can help business people to get capital with low interest through online loans, which are a form of fintech product.

6. Helping MSMEs for Business Capital

Before the emergence of financial technology, all MSMEs used to rely on bank loans for their business capital. Bank loans usually have quite high interest and quite difficult procedures and requirements.

For fintechs that have received OJK supervision and are registered with OJK, this fintech can provide solutions for MSME business capital.

Types of Fintech in Indonesia

There are several types of fintech in Indonesia that have helped people solve various problems. The following are types of fintech in Indonesia.

1. Crowdfunding

This type of fintech can also be interpreted as fundraising. Crowdfunding is a fintech model that is currently popular not only in Indonesia but in various countries.

With this technology, people can raise funds or donate to an initiative or social program that is of concern to them. An example of a fintech startup with this model that is currently popular in Indonesia is Kita Bisa.com

2. Microfinancing

Microfinancing is a fintech service that provides financial services for the lower middle class to help with their daily lives and finances. Usually, people with a middle to lower economy will experience difficulties in obtaining venture capital to develop their businesses or livelihoods.

Therefore, micro financing seeks to bridge this problem by channeling business capital directly from lenders to prospective borrowers. This business system is designed so that returns are competitive for lenders and remain attainable for borrowers.

An example of a startup engaged in this field is Amartha, which connects rural micro-entrepreneurs with online investors.

3. P2P Lending Services

This type of fintech is known for lending money. This fintech helps people who need access to finance to meet their needs. With this fintech, consumers can borrow money more easily to meet various needs of life without having to go through the long and convoluted process that is often found in conventional banks.

One example of a fintech engaged in the field of money lending is AwanTunai, which is a start-up that provides safe and easy digital installments.

4. Market Comparison

With this fintech you can compare various kinds of financial products from various financial service providers. This fintech also functions as a financial planner. With the help of this fintech, users can get several investment options for their future needs.

5. Digital Payment Systems

This type of Fitech is engaged in providing services in the form of paying all bills such as credit and postpaid, credit cards, or PLN electricity tokens. One of the fintechs engaged in this field is Payfazz which is agency-based to help Indonesian people, especially those who do not have access to a bank to make monthly bill payments.

6. Payment Gateways

The increasing number of e-commerce platforms in Indonesia will also trigger fintech payment gateway companies. This company has a function as a bridge between customers and e-commerce fintech companies.

You no longer need to go to a bank or ATM to make transactions because by writing a nominal amount of money, the payment transaction process via virtual can be done immediately.

This fintech is also based on a legal umbrella from Bank Indonesia, so all transactions made are of course safe. From a technological standpoint, the payment gateway is equipped with 3 tracking systems to protect against data theft, namely the Address verification System (AVS), Card Security Code (CV2) and 3D Secure password.

7. Insurtech

The development of insurance in Indonesia is growing rapidly. One proof of the development of insurance is the number of e-commerce platforms that trade insurance products. The existence of this fintech makes it easy for the public to be able to access insurance services, starting from products, evaluating customer data to buying policies that can be done via a smartphone.

8. Asset Management

Managing finances is something that is still difficult to do. However, with this type of fintech, you can manage your finances and can track where your money has gone and how much you have used.

For those of you who are still having trouble managing personal money, this type of fintech really helps you. What’s more, it’s not just individuals, you can manage money on a large business scale with this type of fintech.

9. Remittances

This type of fintech provides money transfer services between countries. Remittances aim to help people who do not have domestic or foreign bank accounts to make transfers.

The existence of this fintech helps TKI, TKW or those who have family who are abroad to send money easily and cheaply.

10. Investment

Currently, investment is in great demand by young people, this is because investing is no longer difficult to do. Many investment applications provide online services. There are also many products that you can choose for investment, such as online mutual funds to bitcoin.

Characteristics of Illegal Fintech to Watch Out for

The presence of fintech companies makes it easy for people who need fast funds. Thus causing illegal fintech to also emerge and increasingly harm people who do not have any knowledge.

This is because illegal fintech will ask its victims to pay loan bills and the interest will increase. The following are the characteristics of illegal fintech that you need to be aware of.

1. Illegal fintech does not have legality, meaning that illegal fintech is not registered and does not have an official permit from the OJK.
2. Provides very high interest, fines and other fees and tends to be unclear in the billing process.
3. The billing process is carried out unethically and tends to be abusive and even threatening
4. Illegal fintech will access consumer data such as contacts, cameras, microphones and others.
5. Illegal fintech also lacks services such as complaint contact.

Referring to the OJK website , recently the Financial Services Authority (OJK) has again blocked 3,193 illegal online loans because they were caught using customer data to collect debts in an intimidating way.

Features of Legal Fintech

To find out the list of legal fintech companies, you can see them on the OJK’s official website. So, here are the characteristics of a legal fintech company, namely:

1. Licensed and registered with OJK

Legal companies are companies that have official licenses and are registered with the OJK. So that in running its fintech business, companies must follow the regulations set by the OJK.

If fintech commits a violation, the OJK has the authority to revoke the license or even block the company. That way, people are also calmer when making loans.

2. Information about the company is clear

Obtaining a permit from the OJK is not an easy thing to do for an ordinary company that is not clear. OJK will definitely ensure that the company really exists and is not as fraudulent as illegal fintech services.

As you know, to create a company that is a legal entity, you must attach a clear office address. OJK will check whether the office address listed is correct.

Make sure you look for clear information about fintech companies before applying for a loan, starting from the company address, assessments from other people who have borrowed funds, so that the website or application is guaranteed to be safe.

Also find out whether the company has a consumer contact service that can be contacted so that you can easily get help if a problem occurs.

3. Fees charged are in accordance with OJK

As explained above, a legal fintech company is definitely obliged to follow all the rules that have been given by the OJK, including those related to the issue of interest rates. Fintech companies that already have licenses and are registered with the OJK are only allowed to charge consumers a maximum interest of 0.8 percent per day.

There are several advantages for you if you trust a fintech that is licensed by the OJK. Borrowing money from legal fintech is certainly cheaper with a more transparent process.

In addition, the security of your data has been guaranteed by ISO. Legal fintech is also directly monitored by OJK, as well as handling restructuring when needed. Socialization activities are also continuously pursued so that people are no longer entangled in unlicensed fintech.

Examples of Popular Fintech Companies in Indonesia

Here are the most popular Fintech companies in Indonesia

1. My Capital

This platform is of the peer to peer lending type which allows MSME owners to apply for loans of as much as 50 million to 500 million rupiah within three to twelve months. Modalku will receive a commission of 3 percent from the loan and 3 to 4 percent from the investor.

2. My finances

Finansialku (PT Solusi Finansialku Indonesia) is a financial planning company that has educational channels, financial applications, and financial consulting. As of August 2020, this Indonesian fintech company has collected seed funding with a total of US$3.3 million.

3. Kredivo

Kredivo is an example of fintech in Indonesia with a loan concept without a credit card with a fast registration and disbursement process. Kredivo also offers convenience in cash loans with the lowest interest compared to similar companies.

4. GO-PAY

To support the various services owned by the GO-JEK on demand application, GO-JEK finally created a service called GO-PAY to support non-cash payment services. Currently, the majority of GO-JEK users have used this service because many customers are spoiled with various tempting discounts and prizes that can be exchanged for points earned.

5. OVO

OVO can be said to be a strong competitor for GO-PAY. OVO, like GO-PAY, is a digital wallet application that makes it easy for users to make non-cash transactions. With promos that attract customers, one of the largest fintech companies in Indonesia also collaborates with many merchants and has even worked with more than 200,000 SMEs across Indonesia.

6. TaniFund

TaniFund is a fund loan service that is different from loans for businesses or businesses only. However, this platform provides solutions for farmers, ranchers and fishermen in Indonesia to gain access to finance in an effort to develop their respective sectors.

 

Understanding Finance – Surely many of us are familiar with what finance is. Because, almost everywhere, this term is often used. Especially by people who are struggling in the economic field. So, finance is a term that exists in the economic sector and also in discussions about finance.

Many define finance as finance. Indeed, this is not wrong, the definition of finance in a broader sense is an economic field that focuses on finance. In this article, we will discuss what finance is and the importance of finance in everyday life. Here is a full explanation:

Financial Definition

Finance is a word that comes from English. When interpreted, financial means finance. However, in the KBBI dictionary, finance is defined as something that deals with finance. If we examine more deeply, to discuss our own finances is not only about financial conditions that are in a large scope. Finance is how we study the financial condition of a business, individual, organization, and also a country. Starting from how it is managed, increasing, allocating, empowering, calculating risks, as well as future prospects related to finance.

Even within a company or institution, finance can enter into the administration aspect. In an administrative context, finance itself can be interpreted as an activity of managing an incoming and outgoing money transaction within a company or institution.

This activity is defined as financial management, namely a series of activities that begin with obtaining money and managing the finances as a whole. Not only are financial conditions in good condition, often financial conditions are also in a difficult position. This can happen due to improper financial management, be it individually, organization, institution or business.

Financial Types

When studying finance, of course we will also know the various types of finance itself. Here are some types of finance that need to be understood:

1. Individual Finance

Individual financial conditions can be seen based on the income or salary they have. Then, how their financial condition can meet all aspects of that person’s needs. Individual finances will usually also look at a person’s financial condition in the short, medium and long term.

How do they spend the budget they have to meet their living needs. An individual who has a healthy financial condition, will have greater income than his expenses. Meanwhile, those who do not have a healthy financial condition will generally have large amounts of debt, have a consumptive lifestyle, and have no savings.

2. Company Finance

The next type of finance is the finance of a company. Where this type of finance is the financial condition that exists in a company, be it a company that is still small, medium, to large companies. The same goes for government owned companies. A company that has a healthy financial condition will have a stable financial condition.

If the company has large enough cash and has relatively little or no debt. That is a sign that the company has a healthy financial condition. The development and growth of the balance which is always positive every month is one aspect of the company’s excellent performance.

3. Government Finance

The next type of finance is government finance. One of the factors that can determine the financial condition of a country is the level of welfare of the people in that country. Benchmarks for assessing the state’s financial condition are very complicated and also complex. This is due to the many assessment factors of unemployment, poverty, currency exchange rates, and also the purchasing power of the people in that country.

Financial Function

From the explanation above, we already understand what finance is and also the types. In the following we will discuss the function of finance. Both for companies, individuals, and other institutions. Because finance is one of the most important aspects in the life of an individual, business or country. Below is a full explanation.

1. Planning

The main function of finance is as a means of financial planning. When we have a large amount of funds. Whether it’s an individual, a company, or a business owner. We must still be able to plan our finances or finances. Because, it can not be done spontaneously. In planning good finances, we must have the main focus on meeting basic needs. Make it a balance between income and expenses. Everything must be well planned. So, we will not experience boncos or losses. Maximum budget management can be a sign that the finances we have are relatively healthy.

2. Control

As an ordinary human being who often still makes mistakes. This also includes mistakes in terms of financial use that are not properly controlled and according to plan. Even though all the financial posts have been done, things like that can still happen. Where we neglect to use funds that have been posted for things that are consumptive or something that is not too important.

3. Examination

Finances or finances also need to be examined. In the language of accounting this is usually referred to as an audit. Where the audit process must be carried out routinely and periodically. Starting from monthly, quarterly, semester, and also on an annual basis. Every time there are posts that seem suspicious, we can immediately carry out an evaluation to prevent the same thing from happening in the next period.

4. Reporting

Finances do require reports, especially for companies and governments. Everything must be reported to show transparency in the use of finance. For companies, the report is done by making financial reports according to the accounting period. Then the results will be reported to stakeholders and shareholders in the company.

Financial Goals

Of course, many are wondering what the actual purpose of financial existence is for individuals or companies. So, good financial management will help us to manage finances optimally and be more adept at managing finances in personal and business life. Here are some of the goals of financial existence in the life of individuals and businesses.

1. Instill a Disciplined and Organized Attitude

As previously explained that finance is all activities related to finance, carried out in a disciplined and orderly manner. That way, we can control, plan, and make good use of financial conditions. Every thing we want to buy must be planned in advance. Even though the price of the product to be purchased is relatively cheap. In a business, discipline and regular financial management will greatly impact the stable financial condition of the business and also avoid the threat of loss.

2. Maximizing Profits or Profits

As an individual, when the financial process is carried out in a planned manner. Then it will help us to achieve financial success. We can better prepare something bigger for our own future. Then we can also plan for old age, so that we feel safer without having to think about debt and other financial problems.

Meanwhile for the company itself, financial management will greatly impact profits which have the potential to always increase or can guarantee financial security in the future. Because, we all never predict with certainty the economic condition of a company in the future.

3. Avoiding Debt

Some people think that humans can never be separated from debt. At first glance, this is indeed true, humans cannot live without debt. Whether it’s a debt of money or debt of goods or services. Especially with increasing needs, sometimes it’s easy for someone to go into debt to meet those needs.

Even though sometimes the desired needs are types of needs that are actually not important or not urgent. Likewise, when running a business, business owners who want fast-paced business usually find it easy to get into debt. Even though this can actually disrupt the financial condition of the business. It’s better if you want to owe it, try to think it over carefully, before you have trouble paying it off.

4. Optimal Planning

By understanding what finance is, benefits, types, and purposes, we will have optimal planning. With careful planning, we can plan for the future better. We can live more frugally without thinking about debt. As for business owners, optimal financial planning will help maintain maximum profits. Thus making the future of the business more focused and the use of company cash can also be used wisely.

5. Successfully Achieve Financial Goals

With regular and disciplined financial planning, of course it will make it easier for us to achieve financial goals. Whether it’s by collecting emergency funds, preparing for retirement funds, marriage funds, and also financial freedom. We will also have no more difficulties in managing finances.

6. Develop Owned Money

With finances, we will be more easily encouraged to develop the money we now have. This is because we understand that relying on income alone will not be enough to fulfill future needs. From there, we will be compelled to build a business to earn additional income. We can also start utilizing investment instruments to gain profits.

Signs Someone Is Financially Independent

Being financially independent is a process of developing, both emotionally and spiritually, to become a successful and happy person according to our wishes. That means, being financially independent doesn’t just have abundant wealth and assets. But also we can achieve anything we want. The following are some signs of someone who can be said to be financially independent:

1. Have Health Insurance

One of the things that must be owned by someone who is financially independent is self-protection. Therefore, insurance is very important because it can minimize risks that may occur in the future. Without protection through insurance, this risk could have a negative impact on our financial stability. For example, health insurance can help us pay for hospital fees without burdening our finances.

2. Start Investing

The sign of someone who is financially independent is that they will think ahead by making the money they have work and make a profit. To obtain this, one thing that can be done is to invest. Investment is one way to achieve financial independence. We can invest in any form. But most importantly, the investment we make can provide a return above inflation. If we can manage investments well, then we will achieve financial freedom more easily.

3. Have a Pension Fund

Who doesn’t want their old age to be safe and secure? Everyone certainly wants that right? Retirement is one of the most important periods in people’s lives. The amount of income and savings while still working will affect one’s retirement. The sooner we think about retirement, the bigger the savings we will have when we are old. Therefore, preparing for a retirement fund should be done early when we are still in our productive period. In addition to saving, retirement can also be prepared by investing.

4. Owe For Productive Things

Debt can be a very dangerous thing if it is used for consumptive things. However, life will never be separated from debt, both for personal debt and debt to financial institutions. One of the conditions for achieving financial independence is to free our lives from consumptive debts. People who are financially independent will certainly be wiser in debt. Usually they will be in debt for something productive and productive.

5. Have an Emergency Fund

Emergency funds are one of the most important investment activities for our survival in the future. We can do this activity by saving half of the salary received each month. With an emergency fund, we no longer need to be confused and worried when there is a sudden need and require substantial funds. In addition, if there is no sudden need, emergency funds can also be used as future savings.

Being financially independent is certainly a dream of many people. Where in that period a person has succeeded in fulfilling all financial goals in life. Starting from the preparation of retirement funds, emergency funds, insurance, and others. With the fulfillment of these needs, it is certain that we are included in the group of people who are already financially independent. 

 

Definition of Philosophy –  Philosophy is a study of all human experience. What is in philosophy contains something that is used to build theories about humans and is served as a basis for belief. Besides that, philosophy also critically examines all things that can be used as the basis of a belief and attitude. However, what is the true meaning of philosophy?

Philosophy itself has many meanings, Readers , there are philosophical meanings that you can understand in general, there are also philosophical meanings conveyed by various experts. Even though they are different, all of these philosophical meanings have one thing in common. Apart from knowing the meaning of philosophy, Readers can also understand various branches of philosophy and their characteristics.

Well, for Readers who wants to know and understand the meaning of philosophy. Through this article. You can understand the meaning of philosophy both in general and from experts and you can also find out about the branches of philosophy and their characteristics. Come on, just look at the article about this philosophy, Readers !

The Meaning of Philosophy in General

Before Readers understands philosophy more deeply, you need to understand the meaning of philosophy in general first. Etymologically, the meaning of philosophy is the love of wisdom, while the person or actor who studies philosophy is called a philosopher. The person who first used the word philosophy, philosophy, or philosophy was Pythagoras (582-496 BC), a philosopher who came from Greece.

According to KBBI, philosophy or philosophy is knowledge and investigation with reason regarding the nature of all that exists, its causes, origins, and laws. Philosophy can also be interpreted as a theory that forms the basis of the mind or an activity, as well as a science that has the core of logic, aesthetics, metaphysics, and epistemology.

In general, this philosophy is a study of fundamental and general issues regarding various issues such as existence, knowledge, reason, values, mind, and language. In a broader sense, philosophy is an activity that people engage in when they are trying to understand fundamental truths about themselves, the world in which they live, and their relationship to the world and to one another.

Then not only that, according to Britannica the meaning of philosophy is a rational, abstract, and methodical consideration of reality as a whole or a fundamental dimension of human existence and experience. Philosophical inquiry is a central element in the intellectual history of many civilizations.

The Meaning of Philosophy According to Experts

Not only the meaning of philosophy in general, but Readers can also understand the meaning of philosophy that comes from the opinions of various experts. Yes, some experts reveal how philosophy is understood from their point of view that you can understand. The following is the meaning of the philosophy of these experts:

1. Plato

According to Plato (427-347 BC), philosophy is a science of nature. Philosophy is an attempt to gain knowledge and to know the real truth.

2. Aristotle

According to Aristotle (384-322 BC), the meaning of philosophy is a science of truth which includes logic, physics, metaphysics and also practical knowledge.

3. R. Berling

According to R. Berling (1968) the meaning of philosophy is a big thought inspired by the ratio of everything that comes from experience.

4. Bertrand Russell

The meaning of philosophy is nothing more than an attempt to answer various recent questions, not superficially or dogmatically as has been done by humans in everyday life and also in science.

5. WJS Poerwadar Minta

The meaning of philosophy is knowledge and investigation by using reason regarding various causes, all legal principles and so on of everything that exists in the universe or to know a truth and meaning of the existence of something.

6. Immanuel Kant

Immanuel Kant formulated philosophy as a science which is the base and culmination of all knowledge which includes four issues, namely:

1. What can we know? (Metaphysics)
2. What should be done? (Ethics)
3. Where is our hope? (Religion)
4. What is human nature? (Anthropology)

Philosophy Branch

It turns out that philosophy also has various branches that Readers can know and understand. This branch is useful for distinguishing one philosophy from another, such as for classifying types of philosophy. Here are the various branches in the world of philosophy:

1. Metaphysics

Metaphysics is a branch of philosophy concerned with the analytical process of fundamental nature and its accompanying existence and reality. The study of metaphysics in general revolves around fundamental questions regarding the existence and various properties that encompass the reality being studied.

The meaning of metaphysics has various variations in each era and each philosopher certainly has a different view. In general, the topic of metaphysical analysis includes discussions about existence, possibility, actual existence along with its accompanying characteristics, space and time, relations between existences such as discussions about causality, and also other metaphysical discussions.

2. Epistemology

Epistemology comes from the Greek word ἐπιστήμη epistēmē; meaning “knowledge”, and λόγος, logos, which means “knowledge”. Epiatemology is a branch of philosophy that is concerned with or focuses on the nature or theory of knowledge. In the field of philosophy, epistemology includes various discussions regarding the origin, sources, value validity, scope, and also the truth of existing knowledge.

Epistemology studies the nature of knowledge, justification, and the rationality of beliefs. Epistemology is the subject of discussion in various fields, epistemology has been centered into four areas, namely:

1. Philosophical analysis is concerned with nature and knowledge and how these relate to conceptions such as truth, belief, and justification
2. Various issues of skepticism
3. Sources and scope of knowledge and justification of beliefs
4. Criteria for knowledge and justification..

3. Methodology

Methodology is a branch of systematic philosophy that deals with methods. Method is a procedure, technique, or way that has been designed and used in the process of obtaining knowledge of any type.

Methodology comes from the Greek yaj = kni “methodos” and “logos,” the word methodos consists of two syllables, namely “metha” which means through or passing and “hodos” which means is there a way or way. Method means a path traversed to achieve a goal and logos means science.

Science consists of four principles:

1. regularity (order)
2. causation (determinism)
3. simplicity (parsimony)
4. observable (empirical) experience

With such scientific principles, it can be interpreted as there are many paths that can be taken to find the truth.

4. Logic

Logic is a branch of philosophy that deals with reasoning. Reasoning is a distinctive style of thinking possessed by humans from knowledge that is useful for obtaining other knowledge, especially as a means of solving a problem. Logic as a branch of philosophy that can be practiced in everyday life. In the field of philosophy itself, logic cannot be separated in the process of obtaining truth or validity.

Viewed from the side of logic as a science, logic studies the human ability to think in parallel, orderly, and precise ways. The material object used by logic is to think according to reason, while the formal object of logic is thought which is studied based on aspects of its accuracy.

5. Ethics

Ethics is a branch of systematic philosophy that discusses morality. Morality is a set of ideas about what is good and what is bad in human behavior and what is right and wrong in human action. Ethics is a science that studies good and bad, obligations, rights and responsibilities, both socially and morally, for each individual in his social life. It can also be said that ethics includes all values ​​that have a relationship with individual morals regarding right and wrong.

Ethics in general are rules, norms, rules, or procedures that can be used as guidelines or principles of an individual in carrying out actions and behavior. The application of this norm is closely related to the good and bad qualities of individuals in social life.

6. Aesthetics

Aesthetics is a branch of philosophy that deals with beauty. Aesthetics is the science that discusses how beauty can be formed, and how to feel this beauty. Further discussion of aesthetics is a philosophy that studies various sensory values ​​which are sometimes considered as judgments of taste and sentiment. Aesthetics is the branch closest to the philosophy of art.

History of Philosophy

The history of philosophy is a study of a particular period, individual, or school. This field is still related, but very different from the philosophy of history. The history of philosophy is a very broad field of knowledge and is the seventh branch of systematic philosophy and discusses the development of philosophy from the earliest times to the present.

The development of philosophy developed on the basis of philosophical thought that had been built since the 6th century BC. There are two philosophers whose style of thought can be said to have contributed to philosophical discussions throughout the history of its development, namely Herakleitos (535-475 BC) and Parmenides (540-475 BC).

Periodization of western philosophy is divided into ancient times, medieval times, modern times, and the present. The streams that emerged and gave influence to philosophical thought were Positivism, Existentialism, Marxism, Pragmatism, Phenomenology, and Neo-Kantianianism and Neo-tomism. Periodization of Chinese Philosophy is divided into ancient times, assimilation, Neo-Confucianism, and the last is modern times.

The main theme in Chinese philosophy is the problem of humanity. The periodical division of Indian philosophy is the Vedic, Epic, Sutra and Scholastic periods. As for Islamic philosophy, there are only two periods, namely the Muta-kallimin period and the period of Islamic philosophy. For the history of the development of science here the discussion refers to philosophical thought in the West.

The period of Greek philosophy is one of the most important periods in the history of human civilization because at that time there was a change in the human mindset from various myths to a more rational one. The myth-myth mindset is a people’s mindset that relies heavily on myths to explain natural phenomena, for example, earthquakes and rainbows. Earthquakes are not seen as an ordinary natural phenomenon, but rather as the Earth God shaking his head. However, when philosophy was introduced, these natural phenomena were no longer regarded as activities of the gods, but became natural activities that occur causally.

This change in mindset may seem simple, but the implications are not that simple because so far nature was initially feared and shunned and then approached and exploited at the same time. Humans who previously tended to be passive in dealing with natural phenomena became more proactive and creative, so that nature was used as an object of research and study. From this process, science develops from the womb of philosophy, which in the end we can enjoy in various forms of technology. Therefore, the period of development of Greek philosophy is an important point in entering a new civilization for mankind.

So, the development of science as it is today does not take place in a sudden or sudden way, but occurs gradually and evolutionarily. Because to understand the history of the development of science, we inevitably have to do a division or classification based on the periodical, because each period has a certain characteristic in the development of science. Theoretical development of thought always refers to the Greek civilization. The periodization of the development of science starts from the Greek civilization and ends with contemporary times.

Philosophical characteristics

Not only the meaning of philosophy and also branches of philosophy, you can also find out the characteristics of a philosophy. Yes, these characteristics can help Readers to understand a philosophy. And here are the characteristics of the philosophy:

1. It is universal or comprehensive, so it’s not just in one view or a certain aspect.
2. Radicals are fundamental. Philosophy is a thought that is carried out in depth to get to the roots so that fundamental results are obtained.
3. Systematic or sequential. In accordance with the pattern by using logic even though it can be interpreted as mere assumptions.
4. A philosopher always has the nature to question everything.
5. Philosophy describes all explanations accompanied by detailed descriptions, for example the reasons why something can happen.
6. His thinking uses studies that have been researched carefully and in detail, including the basic concepts so that from these concepts other ideas about the world and life can be developed.
7. Provide an assessment of all existing problems carefully and earnestly. Even from the results of the philosophy that has been made, it is necessary to re-evaluate with the aim of ensuring that it is closest to the truth.
8. The study of philosophy in the form of parables, suppositions, and fiction. It is used to explore issues more broadly and without any boundaries.

 

Definition of Exclusivism – Exclusivism in the characteristics of social groups actually has many meanings, but in several definitions there are similarities in interpreting the word exclusivism. This similarity is the attitude of individuals and groups isolating themselves from other parties.

Meanwhile, depictions of exclusivism on the other hand are very easy to find in everyday life. An example is the existence of a terrorist network that tends to think radicalism by participating in community activities in general.

It has been acknowledged that some forms of social groups have an ideology of exclusivity, so that it is very difficult for other members to become part of that group, due to their exclusive attitude. In fact, in many things and places, some groups often oppress other groups, causing aggressive and discriminatory attitudes to emerge.

Humans as social beings tend to live in colonies, groups by forming certain groups. Actually. The purpose of group formation is carried out by having good goals, namely as a forum for realizing group goals and as a forum for carrying out types of social interaction that help each other with each other.

The notion of exclusivism in its history has left a bad or dark historical track record, which is none other than wars and conflicts that are triggered by something (not standing alone). These conflicts are always supported by the existence of certain religious views, and the resulting consequences are religious understandings that do not have nuances of enlightenment and liberation, but instead have conflict and violence motives.

It is undeniable that within the notion of exclusivism there has been or has formed a religious understanding which is unable to then develop a culture of dialogue and tolerance. Let alone in the context of inter-religious, even intra-religious contests, this exclusivism has become a stumbling block in itself. All groups, both fundamentalists and liberalists alike, are trapped in their own truth claims, because this notion of exclusivism has created new anxiety and anxiety in the context of forming a peaceful and tolerant religious life.

Definition of Exclusivism

Exclusivism is an ideology that has a tendency or a desire to alienate itself from society. Visible signs of exclusivism can be seen directly by people who have an understanding of exclusivism, namely prioritizing personal interests and having a tendency to withdraw or separate themselves from specific or general norms agreed upon within the group. Therefore, exclusivism is a form of individual social relations that closes itself from the outside world or excludes certain groups or groups.

1. General Understanding

Exclusivism is an understanding that emphasizes the tendency to separate oneself from the surrounding environment. In other words, there is a desire to withdraw from all existing forms of interaction such as individualism. They will tend to do everything on their own, without asking for help from others.

In addition, people who hold this understanding often prioritize personal interests rather than group interests. That’s because, according to them personal interests are absolute interests that must be prioritized. In fact, not infrequently, they think that they can survive without the help of other humans.

He prefers to exclude himself. Most people who adhere to this view, will look for other people who also have the same principles as them. This, of course, is done to make it easier and support them to do what they already believe in.

2. Understanding According to Experts

To add to our insights about this notion of exclusivism. Here are some opinions of experts and trusted sources regarding the meaning of exclusivism.

• According to El Rais (2012), this exclusivism is a series of understandings that tend to separate themselves from society.
• According to Raimundo Pannikar, this exclusivism is not an instant understanding, because this understanding requires rationality and also the continuity of the existence of religious doctrines.
• According to Zamakhsari, exclusivism is a psychosocial condition that tends to choose, accept people who it deems appropriate and according to its wishes, both individuals and groups. Furthermore, he stated that exclusivism is an attitude that feels the most righteous of the others.
• According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), exclusivism is a tendency to separate oneself from society.

The characteristics or characteristics that adhere to this exclusivism are:

• Prioritizing personal or group interests.
• Tend to separate themselves with a special attitude that is agreed upon or approved within a class or group.

Factors Causing the Development of Exclusivism

The act of withdrawing from existing social interaction is not possible without the things behind it. The following are the factors that cause the rise of the notion of exclusivism.

• The emergence of social inequality is so sharp between layers of society.
• There is social jealousy between people.
• The assumption arises that the existing norms are not in accordance with one’s personality.
• There are differences in status and strata in the social environment.
• There is an assumption that what is believed is the most correct understanding.
• Pressure from the people around.
• There is a past trauma associated with the interaction between people.
• Technological developments that facilitate all forms of activity carried out by humans.

Characteristics of Exclusivism

The characteristics that describe the meaning of the notion of exclusivism make it easier for us to classify various social problems that are related to this exclusivism. These are the characteristics of exclusivism.

• There is a tendency to prioritize personal interests over group interests.
• Tends to avoid activities that connect many people.
• More apathetic towards the circumstances and conditions that occur around him.
• Withdraw slowly from the social circle.
• Respect their opinions and beliefs more.

Forms of Exclusivism

The following are types of exclusivism quoted from the book Introduction to Sociology by Trisni Andayani, Ayu Febryani, and Dedi Andriansyah (2020).

1. Religious Sector

It is a fanatical, exclusive, and discriminatory attitude towards certain religious groups, groups that despise other religious groups. Several views that underlie the attitude of exclusivism are the fault of several individuals or groups who are then judged with a low view of the group. There is an assumption that associating is only permissible with people of the same faith. This becomes a gap for humans who want to interact with other humans.

This act of exclusivism which is closely related to the field of religion is often caused by the emergence of boundaries. The boundaries that are made are of course related to whether or not an individual is allowed to associate with other individuals. Exclusivism in the field of religion certainly emphasizes intolerance.

In everyday life, an individual who has a different faith or belief is prohibited from making friends. The emergence of this separation causes a religion to tend to exclude itself from the differences that exist.

In the Christian context, it assumes that only those who hear the Gospel proclaimed and explicitly confess Christ are saved ( only those who hear the Gospel proclaimed and explicitly confess Christ are saved ). In essence, exculivism, as described by George Lindbeck, establishes solus Christus , salvation only through Christ, and also fides ex auditu , faith through hearing.

The theological argument for this exclusivism claim is supported by the text of the Bible: “ I am the way, the truth and the life. No one reaches the Father except through Me (John 14:6). “ And salvation is found in no one but in Him, for there is no other name under heaven given to men by which we can be saved ” (Acts 4:12).

This Christian exclusivism view is also supported by the understanding of the pre-Vatican II Roman Catholic Church which stated extra ecclesiam nulla salus (outside the Church there is no salvation). In addition to theological arguments, D’Costa presents phenomenological arguments. This exclusivism group in fact recognizes the differences between existing religions, but this recognition without having to acknowledge the truth claims of these religions.

More than that, the effort and dialogue of this exclusive group with other groups is in order to make the person or group repent. They want other people to become followers of Christianity, as the only religion.

In the context of the Islamic world, this exclusivism view also lives and grows strongly. The view that only one perspective or one way of interpretation is correct. And of course, the correct view is, as he claims, his own, while the other views are wrong and misguided.

The scriptural basis of this group is their understanding of the verses of the Koran, such as QS Al ‘Imrân/3:85 which reads:

“Whoever seeks a religion other than Islam, then it will never be accepted (that religion) from him, and he will be among the losers in the hereafter. “

Likewise the statement in QS Âl ‘Imrân/3:19

Indeed, the religion (which is acceptable) in the sight of Allah is only Islam. there is no dispute among those who have been given the Book except after knowledge has come to them, out of envy (which exists) among them. Whoever disbelieves in the verses of Allah, indeed Allah is very quick to reckon .

These verses of the Qur’an are understood by the exclusivism group as a normative argument that only the Islamic religion is the most correct and pleasing to God, while other religions are wrong and misguided. In addition to this scriptural basis, Islamic theology also often assumes that the arrival of Islam was to supersede (perfect) or even abolish ( naskh ) the previous religions.

In addition to the theological/normative arguments above, Sachedina presents phenomenological/empirical arguments. According to him,
this exclusivism claim is considered as an important instrument for the self-identification of a group to differentiate it from other groups. This claim also functions as a tool of legitimacy and integration for others in the group, and as an effective basis for aggression and resistance against other groups.

This is what embodies the concept of jihad against certain groups, as well as the formation of dâr al-Islam (Islamic areas, or areas controlled by Muslim groups) and dâr al-harb (war areas, or areas that must be subdued).

2. Cultural Sector

A group of people who live choose a remote place to separate themselves from the community, because if they later mingle with the general public they will be influenced by a culture that is outside themselves. This fear made him choose to separate himself from society in general so that his cultural elements would not be contaminated with other influences.

They choose to separate themselves from trusting others. They believe that the culture in their group is the best and the best, so they don’t need anything to change. What is most striking and obvious is that in terms of the cultural characteristics of certain groups or ethnicities, it is not permissible for people within that cultural group to marry outside their group. This is also an effort to maintain the cultural purity of the group.

Exclusivism in this cultural context often occurs in remote areas that are far from modern. These areas tend to maintain the culture and customs that have existed since ancient times. To maintain this culture, they prefer to close themselves off from various existing developments and modernization. They do not want all their original culture to fade due to globalization and other developments.

Examples of Exclusivism

Examples of the manifestation of exclusivism that have existed include:

1. German Society

In Germany there used to be a leader who was known for his dictatorial leadership style, this character was named Hitler. Hitler really hated the Jewish people, his hatred of the Jews led him to suppress the behavior of the Jews.

In another context it is stated that Hitler’s behavior was to get recognition and appreciation that he was the best among others, in order to get awards and power to become the number one leader of that era. This is an example of group exclusivism.

2. Indonesian

Let’s flash back to the past, do we still remember our memories of the bomb tragedy on the island of Bali which was carried out by a terrorist group. Amrozi and his friends launched their action on the island of the gods, Bali, under the pretext of fighting for the pure religion against disbelief.

This incident is a result of the notion of exclusivism, thus fostering fanaticism towards one’s own group and discrimination against other groups. The result is a feeling within him that his group is the biggest and most correct among the other existing groups.

3. Regionalism

The manifestation of exclusivism in the regional environment can be seen from several tribes and races that live side by side but greet and admonish one another. The reason is because they see that it will make them lower. Behavior like this of course will make someone think exclusivism.

4. Everyday Life

Closer to our daily life, is there a society that understands exclusivism that we can even find in our social environment. Of course there are, maybe we have even seen friends who only want to hang out with friends who are from the same social class, rich people only want to be friends with rich people, officials’ children who only hang out with officials’ children, or people who hang out with officials’ children.

People who only want to be considered that they are cool, have a higher education, have a high social status. This is the closest example to us people who have an understanding of exclusivism

Most of us hear the word exclusive and immediately have the image that exclusivism is a group with a class or type of high social status. It turns out that in our social life there are many examples and up to the individual level they are also infected with this attitude of exclusivism.

Impact of Exclusivism

The attitude of exclusivism clearly has two things in its development and the resulting impact. Exclusivism has both positive and negative impacts. The explanation;

1. Positive Impact

• The emergence of conditions in society whereby being closed to the rest of the world can still maintain the culture that is in the group.
• There is an assumption in individuals that their group is the best group and must be maintained.
• Has the ability to distinguish himself from others around him.
• There is a firm belief in the group, so it is not easily carried away by other groups.

2. Negative Impact

• There is an assumption in the individual that the interests of the group are the most important interests above other interests.
• Individuals tend to be closed to the outside world and difficult to be influenced by other cultures.
• Cultural development within the group tends to be static and stagnant, making it difficult to make gradual and progressive changes.
• It is prone to internal conflicts within the group, so that it can divide the unity within the group.

How to Overcome Exclusivism

Here’s how to overcome the development of exclusivism.

• Develop a pattern of thinking as a multicultural society.
• Open minds and views on all developments and changes that occur ( open minded ).
• Respect each other’s differences and also diversity.
• Do not be prejudiced against other people’s opinions, before getting an explanation.
• Build lots of relationships and interactions.
• Filter all forms of radical understanding that enters Indonesia to be adjusted first to Pancasila.

That is the description of the article that we can give you regarding the definition of exclusivism according to experts, types, impacts, and examples in society. Hopefully it can provide references for all people.

Definition of Fidyah – For Muslims, carrying out the fasting of Ramadan, the law is obligatory. Therefore, someone who leaves it must pay the fast. In paying the fast, it can be done by replacing the fast after the end of Ramadan fasting or you can also pay fidyah. Then, what is meant by fidyah?

Definition of Fidya

As Muslims must know about the pillars of Islam. The pillars of Islam are the five basic actions in Islam which are the conditions for becoming a perfect Muslim. These five actions are saying the two sentences of creed, performing prayers, fasting, paying zakat, and performing Hajj for those who can afford it. All of these pillars are mentioned in the hadith of Gabriel.

Whereas in the Hadith Gabriel is a hadith that contains definitions of Islam, Faith, Ihsan, and the signs of the Day of Judgment according to the Islamic creed. This hadith was narrated from the companions of Umar bin Al-Khaththab and Abu Hurairah. This hadith can be found in both Shahihain’s books, Sahih Bukhari and Sahih Muslim, as well as the 2nd Arbain Nawawi hadith.

Fasting that is obligatory for Muslims is fasting in the month of Ramadan, which is the ninth month of the Islamic month. A Muslim must intend to fast before dawn (dawn) light. Then refrain from eating, drinking and jima’ (going to the wife) until the sun sets and then breaking the fast. All of these things are done by Muslims during the month of Ramadan.

Therefore he wants to please Allah ta’ala and worship Him. There are countless benefits in fasting. Among the most important, such is the worship of Allah and carrying out His commands. A servant leaves his lust, eats and drinks for the sake of Allah. That is among the greatest means of attaining piety to Allah ta’ala.

The benefits of fasting from a health, economic and social point of view are numerous. No one can know except those who fast on the encouragement of aqidah and faith. As contained in the Hadith History of Bukhari, Muslim, Ibn Majah, Ahmad, Ibn Khuzaimah, Ibn Hibban).

Hadiths and Verses about Fasting whose Responses Come Directly from Allah SWT

Carrying out fasting in the month of Ramadan is mandatory for every Muslim who is mature, intelligent, and able to carry it out. However, there are times when a condition makes a person unable to fast so that they have to make up the fast (qadha) or pay fidyah.

Fidyah can be done directly on the day someone is not fasting, but it can also be done in a rappelling until the end of Ramadan so that you pay it all together. The main requirement is that you don’t fast before you can pay fidyah. For example, if someone is almost certain not to be able to fast during Ramadan, his fidyah cannot be paid before Ramadan of the same year.

In the Al-Quran surah Al-Baqarah verse 184, it is explained that it is permissible for anyone not to fast. Among them are sick, giving birth and breastfeeding, as well as the elderly. The following is Surah Al Baqarah verse 184 namely:

In language, fidyah means to redeem or replace. Meanwhile, according to the Shari’a, fidyah means a fine that is obligatory for a Muslim to pay when they do things that are prohibited or leave things that are obligatory.

One of the most common fidyah payments is to redeem the fast of Ramadan. The fasting fidyah is worth 1 mud and must be paid by those who cannot pay by fasting or have run out of time to pay the fast. Fasting is obligatory and there is a special door in heaven, as in the hadith narrated by Bukhari, Muslim, At Tirmidhi, Ibn Majah).

Hadith about Fasting and a Special Door in Heaven

Criteria for People Who Are Obligated to Pay Fidyah

Fidyah must be made to replace fasting by paying according to the number of fasting days left for one person. Later, the food or rice is donated to the poor, widows, orphans and so on.

According to Imam Malik, Imam As-Syafi’i, the fidyah that must be paid is 1 mud of wheat (approximately 6 ounces = 675 grams = 0.75 kg or the size of the palm that is raised when praying).

Meanwhile, according to the Hanafiyah Ulama, the fidyah that must be issued is 2 mud or the equivalent of 1/2 sha’ of wheat. (If 1 sha’ equals 4 mud = about 3 kg, then 1/2 sha’ means about 1.5 kg). This second rule is usually used for people who pay fidyah in the form of rice.

The criteria for people who can pay fidyah include:

1. Parents (Elderly)

Old grandparents who are no longer able to fast are not subject to the demands of fasting. His obligation is replaced by paying the fidyah of one mud of food for each missed fasting day.

The limitation of being unable here is if being forced to fast causes fatigue (masyaqqah) which allows tayammum. People in this type of category are also not subject to demands to make up for missed fasts.

Elderly who are unable to fast are not required to fast. This obligation is replaced by paying 1 mud fidyah multiplied by the number of missed fasts.

2. Seriously Ill People

Seriously ill people who have no hope of recovery and are unable to fast, are not subject to the demands of the obligation to fast during Ramadan. Instead, he is obliged to pay fidyah.

In contrast to sick people who still have hope of recovery, they are not subject to fidyah obligations. He is allowed not to fast if he experiences fatigue with fasting, but is obliged to make up for his fast at a later date.

3. Pregnant or Breastfeeding Women

Pregnant women or women who are breastfeeding are allowed to leave fasting if they experience fatigue with fasting or are worried about the safety of the fetus they contain. At a later date, he is obliged to make up for the missed fast, either for fear of his own safety or that of his child.

Regarding fidyah obligations, they are detailed as follows:

• If you are worried about your own safety or that of your child or fetus, then there is no fidyah obligation.
• If you are only worried about the safety of the child or the fetus, then you must pay fidyah.

4. The Dead

In Syafi’i fiqh, dead people who leave fasting debts are divided into two, namely:

• People who are not obligated to make fidyah due to old age and do not have the opportunity to make up qadha. For example, a person whose illness continues until he dies.
• People who are obligated to be given a fidyah without any excuse or due to old age, but have the opportunity to make up the fast but don’t do it. Therefore, the heirs must issue a fidyah for the deceased in the amount of one mud of staple food for each missed fasting day.

Regarding the second point, the guardian or heir may choose between two options, namely paying fidyah or fasting for the deceased.

5. People who Delay or End Fasting Qadha

People who delay making up the fasts until the next Ramadan comes, then he is sinful and is obliged to pay fidyah one mud of staple food for each day of missed fast.

This fidyah is obligatory as a reward for late making up the fast of Ramadan. Fasting debt must be paid off before the next Ramadan arrives. If you postpone it until it is not paid when Ramadan comes, then it is obligatory to pay fidyah in the amount of one mud multiplied by the amount owed on the fast.

According to Al-Ashah, this fidyah applies multiples. For example, the fasting debt in 2020 has not been paid until we meet Ramadhan 2022, so the fidyah obligation is doubled to two mud.

According to Imam Malik, Imam As-Syafi’i, the fidyah that must be paid is 1 mud of wheat (approximately 6 ounces = 675 grams = 0.75 kg or the size of the palm that is raised when praying).

Meanwhile, according to the Hanafiyah Ulama, the fidyah that must be issued is 2 mud or the equivalent of 1/2 sha’ of wheat. (If 1 sha’ equals 4 mud = about 3 kg, then 1/2 sha’ means about 1.5 kg). This second rule is usually used for people who pay fidyah in the form of rice.

Law of Paying Fidyah

How to pay fidyah for pregnant women can be in the form of staple food. For example, if he does not fast for 30 days, he must provide fidyah of 30 measures, each of which is 1.5 kg. Fidyah may be paid to 30 poor people or just a few people (for example, 2 people, meaning each gets 15 measures).

According to the Hanafiyah, fidyah may be paid in the form of money according to the prevailing rate, such as 1.5 kilograms of staple food per day converted to rupiah. Based on the Decree of the Head of BAZNAS No. 10 of 2022 concerning Zakat Fitrah and Fidyah for the Capital City of DKI Jakarta Raya and its surroundings, it is stipulated that the value of fidyah in the form of money is Rp. 50.000,-/day/life.

The way to pay fidyah fasting with money according to the Hanafiyah version is to give a nominal amount of money equivalent to the price of dates or grapes weighing 3.25 kilograms per day of missed fasting, and the rest follows the multiples of the fast. Fidyah is paid by giving one mud of staples to the needy or poor. One mud is equivalent to 675 grams, so to calculate it is 675 grams of rice x the number of fasting days left.

How to pay fidyah can be paid with money. That means, you pay for 675 grams of rice to the poor. In its distribution, one mud of staples/money equal to the price of one mud may only be given to one person, but one poor person can receive more than one fidyah. Like zakat, paying fidyah also starts with intention. The intention of fidyah varies depending on the payment criteria and is recited when handing over rice/money to the poor or to a trust.

The amount of Fidyah that must be paid

If you are included in the group that is allowed to pay fidyah, then how much is the fidyah that must be paid? There are different opinions about the size of the fidyah that must be paid. Following are the differences in the amount of fidyah:

1. Pay One Mud

A hadith narrated by Daruquthni, “from Ali bin Abi Talib and from Ayyub bin Suwaid, stated that the Messenger of Allah SAW commanded a man who had intercourse with his wife one afternoon in the month of Ramadan to carry out expiation or a fine of fasting for two months. consecutive.

If he cannot afford it, he must pay a fine of 1 araq (basket) containing 15 sha’ dates.” If roughly calculated, the fine or fidyah carried out in the hadith, 1 Sha’ is equivalent to 4 mud.

In the hadith, the fined dates are 4 x 15 = 60 mud, to be given to 60 poor people. The same amount to replace fasting for two months (60 days). In today’s calculations, 1 mud is equivalent to 0.6 kg or ¾ liter.

So, the payment of one mud fidyah is equivalent to the price of basic food, if in Arabia they used dates, in Indonesia they used rice. If the price of rice is Rp. 11,000 per liter, so ¾ costs Rp. 8,250.

2. Pay Two Mud

Giving food to the poor costs Rp. 8,250 seems less feasible. Moreover, maybe our daily food is more than twenty thousand rupiahs. Therefore, there is the opinion of other scholars such as Abu Hanifah, of the opinion that ½ sha’ or 2 mud of wheat, is equivalent to half a sha’ of dates or flour which the Prophet recommended.

Given for lunch and dinner until one poor man is full. half sha’ weighs the equivalent of 1.5 kg of staple food.

3. Pay One Sha’

There is also an opinion from the Hanafiyah, who thinks that one sha’ is equivalent to 4 mud. Its size is equivalent to zakat fitrah. When measured by scales, the weight of 1 sha’ is 2,176 grams. If the volume is measured, then 1 sha’ is equivalent to 2.75 liters.

From the comparison of the amounts above, we can see that the minimum amount of fidyah to be paid is 1 mud. However, it would be better to give a fidyah equal to one portion of the daily food we eat, to every poor person.

Prayer of Intention to Pay Fidyah

When they want to pay fidyah, many people do not understand that there is an intention. So, below will explain the intention to pay fidyah:

1. Intention of fidyah fasting for seriously ill people and old people

Meaning: “I intend to issue this fidyah because of breaking the fast in the month of Ramadan, fardu because of Allah.”

2. The intention of fidyah fasting for pregnant or breastfeeding women

Meaning: “I intend to issue this fidyah from the responsibility of breaking the fast of Ramadan because I am worried about the safety of my child, it is fardhu because of Allah.”

3. The intention of fidyah fasting for the dead (carried out by the guardian/heir)

Meaning: “I intend to issue this fidyah from the responsibility of fasting Ramadan for Fulan bin Fulan (mention the name of the corpse), fardhu because of Allah”.

4. The intention of fidyah for those who are late to make up the fast of Ramadan

Meaning: “I intend to issue this fidyah from being dependent on the delay in making up the fasting of Ramadan, fard for Allah.”

As previously explained that fasting in the month of Ramadan is obligatory, so for those who cannot fast in that month, it is obligatory to replace it by fasting or paying fidyah. From the definition of fidyah, we also know that fidyah should not be done casually. 

Understanding Invoices – In the transaction process, especially in buying and selling valuables, of course there will be important documents that serve as proof of the existence of these transactions. Keep in mind again that the existence of this invoice is only for buying and selling transactions of valuables, so if you buy and sell vegetables at the market, you will not get an invoice as proof.

Invoices are almost the same as receipts, the difference is that invoices are proof of transactions while receipts are proof of receipt of money from the buyer to the seller.

The use of invoices ( invoices ) is usually found in trading companies that have a sales system on credit. In this case, the invoice can function as a document proving debt or a credit sales transaction between the buyer and the seller.

Then actually, what is the invoice? What are the types of invoices in this trading world? Let’s look at the following review so that Readers understands it!

Definition of Invoice

According to KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), an invoice is a list of consignments accompanied by a description of the name, amount and price to be paid . Meanwhile, according to Mulyadi, these invoices are business documents used in business transactions, and can affect the efficiency and effectiveness of transaction activities .

In fact, an invoice is the same as an invoice, it’s just that “invoice” sounds foreign.

Furthermore, according to Sugeng Hariyanto, an invoice or invoice is a note that describes what items will be sent to the buyer along with the price. 

So, based on these definitions, it can be concluded that an invoice is an important written document that contains buying and selling transactions in the business world . Usually, this invoice is made in triplicate. The first copy is the archive of the company that has the sales system, the second copy is for the buyer, while the third copy can be used as a financial file.

Invoice Functions In The Business World

Previously, it was written that invoices are important documents related to buying and selling transactions, especially those using the credit system. Therefore, invoices certainly have many functions, especially in the business world.

• As legal evidence when you want to add transactions to the financial books
• Become evidence of a valid referral source if the related goods or services will be resold to other parties
• As a valid report for goods receipt and tax invoice
• As a guardian of legal certainty, especially for sellers and buyers
• As a storage container for financial records or sales. This is because the invoice has complete information about the buyer and the goods purchased
• As analytical material to see consumer buying patterns, so that it can be used as a promotional reference in the future

Invoice Function For Companies

The existence of invoices is actually an important document that cannot be omitted by the company, because it can be evidence that the sale and purchase transaction has been carried out before. So, here is the invoicing function for the company.

• As information regarding the amount of payment bills that must be made by the buyer
• As information on goods or services provided to the buyer
• As a basis for reference, if there is an error in the selling transaction, especially in calculating the total invoice

Invoice or Invoice Basic Components

An invoice is an important document that can be used as proof of a transaction, and therefore there must be several special components so that it can be considered a valid document. The following are the basic components that must be included in an invoice or invoice.

1. Written as “INVOICE”

As with other important documents, at the top there must be clear identification of the document. Therefore, the words “INVOICE” or “INVOICE” must be written on the top and front so that readers can understand that the document is an invoice.

2. Invoice Number

The existence of this invoice number is actually almost the same as other important documents. In invoices, this invoice number is a code number that is unique and not used haphazardly, because it can be used as a reference, both internal and external to the company concerned.

3. Seller Information

Previously it was written that an invoice is an important document containing a sale and purchase transaction using a credit system, so clear and detailed seller information is required. This is to minimize any confusion regarding invoices and when confirming with the buyer it will be easy.

4. Invoice Date

The date stated on the invoice shows the time when the sale and purchase transaction occurred and was officially recorded. Not only that, the date of this invoice also plays an important role in determining the payment due date.

Usually, the buyer will be given a deadline from the time he first received the invoice until he has to pay off the invoice.

5. Payment Terms

Not only the nominal amount of payment contained in an invoice, but also the terms of payment. Even if there is a discount or discount, it will also be included in this invoice. Including the down payment that may have been paid up to the amount of the fine (if the bill is late paid).

6. Product Details

It should be remembered again that an invoice is an important document that contains buying and selling transactions using a credit system, therefore this invoice can also be used as a billing tool.

Therefore, the invoice must contain clear product details, be it the price of the product per unit, the number of products purchased, handling fees, shipping costs, and the tax costs of the product.

Invoice Types

There are several types of invoice or invoice documents. Generally, all of these types are often used by entrepreneurs and business people (both class and middle class) for their buying and selling transactions. Following are the types of invoices:

Based on the Display Form

1. Invoice or Ordinary Invoice

This type of invoice is the most common debt collection document. It is usually used in simple product buying and selling transactions. Therefore, the interface looks simple, sometimes it only contains the product name and selling price.

2. Invoice or Proforma Invoice

This type of invoice or invoice is usually also called a temporary invoice. This is because the proforma invoice document will be provided when product supply is still incomplete.

Therefore, later this invoice will be given to the buyer in stages, or as temporary evidence to show that the product has been shipped.

3. Invoice or Consular Invoice

This type of invoice or invoice is the most exclusive, because it will also include proof of high-end buying and selling transactions, namely between countries. Transactions that most often use this type of invoice are export and import transactions, because they are buying and selling transactions between countries which of course cannot be arbitrary.

Even in the invoice document or consular invoice there must be written approval from the trade attache of the country (embassy) doing the transaction.

Based on the Parties Concerned

1. Sales Invoice

Sales invoice is proof of invoice issued by the seller (usually the entrepreneur) to the buyer (consumer) for the purchase transaction of a number of products (both goods or services). Usually, this type of invoice will be given after the product has been received by the consumer.

This sales invoice or sales invoice will contain detailed information regarding the type of product (goods or services) purchased, the amount of the purchase, the discount obtained by the consumer (if any), and the nominal price to be paid.

Therefore, the existence of this sales invoice can be a form of agreement in the process of buying and selling transactions, including the time lag given by the seller since the fulfillment of the product order until the time of payment.

Then, is this sales invoice very important, especially in the business world? Of course yes, here are some important functions of the existence of sales invoices.

• As legal evidence of tax reporting
• As billing information that must be completed by the buyer
• As a basis for filing a complaint by the buyer
• As written evidence regarding the quantity and price of products that have been purchased
• As a reference document, especially when the product will be resold to other parties
• As a tool to track products that have been sold along with the time and amount of the transaction amount

2. Purchase Invoice (Purchase Invoice)

If there is a sales invoice, then it must also be a purchase invoice because in a transaction there must be two parties, namely the seller and the buyer. As a buyer or consumer, you will not issue a purchase invoice, because this has been taken care of by the producer or seller.

Purchase invoice is an invoice document that will later be received by the consumer or buyer, originating from the producer or seller. Simply put, this purchase invoice is proof that you have purchased a product from the seller.

Please note, that Purchase Invoice and Purchase Order are different …

In a purchase order, it is a document sent by the buyer to the seller, when they want to order an item or service produced by the seller. In this purchase order document , there will be details of the order, date of delivery, to the price of the goods or services.

If a flow is made, the buyer will create a Purchase Order (PO) and send it to the seller. After that, the seller will confirm the existence of the Purchase Order (PO) and immediately prepare a product order based on the Purchase Order (PO) document.

As with sales invoices, this type of invoice also has many functions, especially for the consumer, namely:

• As written evidence that the product (goods or service) has been purchased and is in accordance with the order
• As valid proof if the product will be resold to other parties
• As billing information as well as the payment term that must be paid by the buyer
• As evidence of a complaint if there is a product that is not in accordance with the Purchase Order

Know What is an Electronic Invoice ( E-Invoice )

In today’s sophisticated era, of course invoices can be in electronic form. Similar to the National Identity Card (KTP), which has changed its form to become an e-KTP, invoices have also become electronic invoices or e-Invoices.

This electronic invoice has the same function as an invoice in the form of a physical document, the difference is only in the form.

Electronic invoices can be defined as means of transferring electronically, with information in the form of billing and payment information between business partners. This e-invoice system usually also has a digital signature to increase the validation of the existence of the electronic invoice.

Looking at the era that is completely digital, even money which is actually a means of exchange is also in digital form, so this e-invoice is also equipped with a QR Code. QR Code ( Quick Response Code ) is a two-dimensional symbol that can only be interpreted by a scanner.

Example of Using an Electronic Invoice (E-Invoice)

Please note that the invoice is not only used in buying and selling products, but also in paying taxes. Currently, tax invoices in electronic form have been developed and are widely used by the public in paying their taxes to the Directorate General of Taxes.

The beginning of the emergence of electronic tax invoices was because in 2008-2013, there were approximately 100 cases of fraudulent tax invoices. From this case, of course, the state lost around IDR 1.5 trillion. On this basis, the government then issued an innovation, namely the e-faktur application.

Interestingly, there are two reasons behind the Directorate General of Taxation as the tax administration agency to determine that this e-tax invoice should become part of the VAT administration system in Indonesia. The background is the abuse of PKP authority and tax invoices; and the administrative burden of tax invoices that continues to increase.

Even though this is a new breakthrough in terms of invoices, this e-tax invoice is also regulated by a legal basis, you know… One of them is the Regulation of the Director General of Taxes Number 17/PJ/2014 concerning Form, Size, Procedure for Filling in Information, Notification Procedures in the Context of Making, Procedures for Correction or Replacement, and Procedures for Cancellation of Tax Invoices.

The implementation of this e-faktur is a form of improving services from the Directorate General of Taxes to the public so that they are more tax compliant. This is because in this invoice innovation is intended to provide convenience, comfort, and security in carrying out tax obligations. In addition, the existence of electronic tax invoices also serves to minimize cases of the use of fictitious tax invoices and duplication of tax invoices.

Since 2014, the government has been promoting electronic tax invoices and all people are required to make e-invoices.

There are many benefits derived from the existence of this e-invoice, especially in terms of paying taxes. These benefits are felt by the PKP (Taxable Entrepreneurs) and the government. For PKP, one of the advantages of using this e-invoice is that they will be protected from efforts to misuse unauthorized tax invoices because this e-invoice has been protected by a QR Code. In the QR Code contained in the e-faktur, it will display information about the transaction up to the delivery of the DPP (Tax Imposition Basis) value.

Meanwhile, the benefits of the existence of e-faktur that can be felt by the government are the convenience in supervising tax validation, both output tax and input tax; and makes service easier because the process is fast with the issuance of a Tax Invoice Serial Number.

 

 

Fables: Definition, Types, and Examples – When we were little, we would often hear various fairy tales, be it from parents, teachers, or through animated shows with the theme of animals as characters from these fairy tales. Because, seeing the cute behavior of animals that can talk like humans is something that cannot be found in the real world and as small children we really like to hear stories or watch them through our television screens at home.
At school also in Indonesian lessons we will find material that intersects with stories, myths, legends etc. as teaching materials that we must learn at school. Through this lesson, we will find out that there is something called a fable in one type of fable that exists in a part of Indonesian literature.

In ancient prose, a fable is a unique type of story. Not only in Indonesia, fairy tales and fables have developed abroad. Several cartoons and animations also use this genre as their main plot.
But do you know or do you still remember about the lesson that discusses the fable? If you don’t know or have even forgotten how the form of the fable is in the discussion this time, we will try to discuss the topic of the complete meaning of fable along with its characteristics, types and examples below.

Fable definition

Fables are stories that tell about the lives of animals who behave like humans. Fables are fictional or fantasy (imaginative) compositions. Sometimes fables choose minority characters in human form. Fables are also often called stories that contain morals because they have messages related to morality. The characters in fables are all animals. Animals are told that they have reason, behavior, and that they can speak like humans. Human characters and souls are also depicted in this way through animal figures. The purpose of the fable is to provide a moral lesson by demonstrating human vices through animal symbols. Through animal characters, the writer wants to influence the reader to imitate good, not to imitate evil.

Surely we already know about the childhood animated show about a group of squirrels entitled Happy Tree Friends which is an animated series that accompanied us when we were little. The main story follows the daily life of a group of squirrels and their fun activities. The characters of these squirrels are squirrels who work like humans and are described as being able to move like humans. Having a unique and somewhat thriller plot , this series is very popular with many groups, from children to adults, and the Happy Tree Friends series , for example, is a cartoon genre featuring fables.

According to the definition in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a fable is a story that describes the character and human spirit that unites with animals as the actors of the story. In general, fables are a collection of stories featuring animal characters who can think and socialize like humans. Quoted from the Journal of Indonesian Language and Literature Education, fables are beautiful stories about animals who can speak well, act like humans, and are often interspersed with moral messages. Therefore, this type of story is widely used as a symbol and mirror of human life.

Always referring to the same source, in its structure allegorical text is a tool to insert advice or social criticism without demeaning anyone. The nature of fables that are easy for children to understand, makes this reading a way of conveying moral messages for character building. Meanwhile, fable explanations are also found in several children’s story books.

For example, the book Fables That Inspire and Change Your Life: Meaningful Stories from the Animal World for Success in Life. In this book it is explained that fables are short stories or fairy tales that describe the character and character of people who are likened to animals. The features found in these animals are considered representative of human nature. From all the descriptions above, in short, fables are stories that are full of messages about morality and character. All of these moral messages are embedded and equated with the behavior and interactions of animals which are described as being able to move like humans.

Fable Structure

Fables in general are stories that contain various messages of goodness by embodying the characters of animals that live like humans, from the way they speak to the way they act. According to sources regarding research on the origins of prose fables, the term fable first came from the Latin fabula, which has a similar meaning to the Greek term legend.
Fable itself can be interpreted as a story full of moral values ​​that describes the mind and character of humans using animals. As a text, fable belongs to the fictional or non-real genre. However, it is not uncommon for human figures to be presented in fables as supporting stories.

Like writing or other forms of literature, fables are structured as an integral part of the narrative. Some allegorical constructions, which begin with an orientation, continue through complication and completion, until they end with a coda.
What is a fable in its structure? Fables such as fairy tales are arranged in the form of text, animation or cartoon. Fables are said to have a different structure from other types of fantasy fiction. The following is the structure of the fable:

• Orientation

Fable is a story that starts from the beginning, aka orientation. This first paragraph will introduce the characters in the story, setting, place and time. Then introduce a theme or background and so on.

• Complications

Sequel is the complication or climax of the story. This part of the fable tells about the protagonist who faces a climax of trouble. This is the essence of a fairy tale.

• Resolution

The resolution allegory is part of the allegory that tells how to solve the problems faced by the protagonist. Usually in a fable, the main character will explain how to solve the problem in a unique and creative way.

• Code

The structure of the coda fable is the part of the story that explains the changes in each character. In this section, the moral message or message is conveyed to the readers.

Types of Fables

• Classic Fables

Classical fables are works of fantasy fiction that have existed since ancient times, but it is not known exactly when they started. Classical fables were often passed down orally from generation to generation. For example the story of the mouse deer and the crocodile, the crow and the eagle, the buffalo and the bird, the ant and the grasshopper, etc.

Characteristics of Classical Fables:

• Classical Fables is very concise and clear.
• The theme that appears is very simple.
• Classic fables that contain moral messages or advice to their readers.
• The animal nature of the classic fable remains.

• Modern Fables

Features of a modern fable:
– The plot of a modern fable can be short or long.
– Main stories tend to be more complex.
– Modern fables are sometimes epic or narrative, with prose telling the story of the hero.
– The character of every modern fable that is created is unique. For example, the shape of the animal has a big head, but the body is also big, but the legs are small.

Characteristics of Fables

In addition to the several structures above, another characteristic of fables is the use of animals as the main characters.

The following are characteristics of animal fables or allegories:

– The characters are animals with human personalities and behaviors.

– The theme of the story is social relations.

– The conflict in the story is taken from human life.

– Has a place framework, time frame, and plot.

– Often use third-person point of view.

– At the end of the story there is a message or mandate.

A detailed description of the characteristics of the fable is as follows:

• Theme

The theme is the main idea or story idea in a fable.

• Character

Characters are actors in fables who are presented in the form of animals as a picture of human life or its embodiment.

• Storyline

The plot or course of the fable story is a plot that follows one another and usually all events are connected by a causal event.

• Background

Setting is the time and place where events occur and describes the atmosphere in the story. The setting itself usually has 3 parts, namely setting the time, setting the place and setting the atmosphere.

• Point Of View

Point of View is essentially a technique used by the author to tell stories. For example, first person point of view or third person point of view.

• Message

The real fable is that it has a message or moral that can also be written in the story. Therefore, a parable can be understood as a good message conveyed by the author to the reader. Messages in fables are often presented clearly or expressed directly in written form. However, there are several authors who also convey the message either implicitly or implicitly.

Examples of Fable Stories

• Examples of Fable Stories About Diversity or Pluralism

This is an example of a fable story that tells about acknowledging diversity.

Goro, a wild boar, stands in the middle of the forest. It was a very dark and humid day which is Goro’s favorite kind of day. Immediately, water began to slowly descend in unison across the sky.
“The rain has come!” shouted Goro enthusiastically. Goro began to sing in the middle of the forest while dancing around the trees. He saw a little cub hiding behind the dense trees.
“Hey monkey, the rain has come, don’t hide!” Goro shouted at the monkey who was afraid of being stifled and was dodging the raindrops.

Beruk sighed and looked deeply at Goro: “Goro, I don’t like rain. Do you see how small I am compared to you? The streams of rainwater will wet me and make me cold because my feathers are soaked in the rain! I’m not a fat wild pig like you whose fur is thick and protected by fat that warms your body, I’m just a poor little ape cub that’s the reason I’m hiding, “said Beruk.
That’s why monkey, you have to face your biggest fear of water and can’t be less confident with your size! I have often been drenched when the rain came and got wet under the sky. Don’t be afraid of pain, rain is a blessing not a disaster.

While laughing, Goro was jumping up and down for joy enjoying the rain and left the monkeys behind.
Beruk can only look at Goro with annoyance and worry. Beruk cannot be exposed to rain because it is small and gets sick easily. Then Goro shouted again, “The rain is coming! The rain has come! Oh, hey all the animals come out! I love rain, how about you? Goro stopped under a shady tree and talked to a deer who was also enjoying the rain with his herd. The deer grinned and said to Goro.

“I’m not afraid of rain, Goro. Look, I live with my flock in the rainforest. How can I enjoy the rain like you, Goro? I’m bored. The deer left with the herd again.

“Humph! How sad is your life Deer! If you can, like me, live in this forest with joy, enjoy the rain that flushes this forest from drought, maybe you will be more grateful than feeling dry. Enjoy the rain as if this is the last rain in your life.

What Goro said really woke Deer’s heart. The deer stared at its entire herd, its body, then looked up at the sky like Goro. The deer was sadly running from one side of the forest to another. Goro danced merrily in the rain in the middle of the forest and hummed again.
When Goro went under a tree, he saw a bird perched on a branch and reprimanded it. Goro thinks that birds like monkeys and deer cannot be grateful for rain.

“Hey Bird, why don’t you want to go out and enjoy the rain? Afraid your fur will get wet? Or are you afraid of cold like a monkey? Or can’t you appreciate the beauty of the rain like a deer? After saying that, Goro laughed ugly and guffawed.
The bird looked at Goro who was still smiling “Hey Goro, can you come here? “
You mean Bird?”
“Could you come up here, Goro?”
“You mean Bird? I can’t!” Goro pouted and looked down at his stocky body and legs. Goro regretted his short legs and fat body so he couldn’t climb up a tree.
“Goro, did you know that the Creator makes us unique? I can’t enjoy the rain like you and the deer, but I can fly high in the sky.
The bird wisely said: “I mean Goro, we each have our strengths. Monkeys can’t get caught in the rain like you because their bodies are weak and get sick easily, but they can climb trees and swing from one branch to another which you can’t. Deer can’t be as grateful as you because they are bored and need something new, but they have a loyal herd of friends. You can’t offend them! Goro
started to realize that what he did was wrong. Goro secretly began to think that his actions were not good. He shouldn’t brag about his profits and offend his friends.
“I’m sorry, Bird,” said Goro, looking sadly at him. monkeys and deer from a distance also watched their conversation.
“I’m sorry monkey, deer, I have offended you all this time.”
Since then, Goro has started to like his friends and they are good friends together.
Moral: All living things were created in a unique way by God. As good beings, we must take care of each other’s feelings by using kind words and upholding diversity.

 

Conclusion

That’s a brief discussion of the meaning of fable. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of a fable, but also discusses the characteristics of a fable, the structure of the fable, its characteristics and examples of fable stories. Fables or fairy tales about animals are prose works that have existed for a long time and have been taken into account in the development of literature in Indonesia. As a fairy tale about animals, fables succeed in attracting young children’s interest in adding insight and as age-appropriate entertainment compared to small children who watch too many soap operas or adult films which can damage their morale because in fables there is also a message that is useful in life that can give good influence on children.
Thus a review of the meaning of fable. 

 

Evolution is a change in the body structure of living things that takes place slowly over a very long time. Evolution comes from the Latin word Evolvo which means stretching. An understanding of the concept of evolution can arise both naturally and logically from an understanding of genetics.

This concept emerged not from history but was put forward based on the results of research and observations of the similarities and differences in the structure and function of various parts of the world, including the results of research and observations of Charles Darwin. inspired by Charles Lyell with his book Principles of Geology and Thomas Malthus with his book The Principles of Population. Check out more about the discussion of evolution below, Readers.

 

What is Evolution?

Evolution in the study of biology means changes in the heritable traits of a population of organisms from one generation to the next. These changes are caused by a combination of three main processes: variation, reproduction, and selection.

The traits that form the basis of this evolution are carried by genes that are passed on to the offspring of a living thing and become varied within a population. When organisms reproduce, their offspring will have new characteristics.

New properties can be obtained from changes in genes due to mutations or gene transfer between populations and between species. In sexually reproducing species, new gene combinations are also produced by genetic recombination, which can increase variation between organisms.

Evolution occurs when these inherited differences become more common or rare within a population. Changes that occur in chromosomes and genes are the basic material of evolution, isolation usually causes the emergence of new species and natural selection by the existence of reproductive differences and mutations.

We can see this in the evolution that has occurred in humans from time to time which is discussed in the book The Britannica Education Series: Evolution which is packaged with various illustrations so that learning is fun.

Evolution also suggests that all kinds of living things actually come from the lowest creatures. In accordance with the circulation of the times and geological-astronomical changes, there have been gradual changes in living things until now. Based on evolutionary thinking, humans are classified as animals. Animals themselves experience the lowest level of development and form like creatures, ranging from viruses, bacteria, protozoa, worms, fish to mammals.

Evolution is still ongoing. Even faster the process than in ancient times. Evolution as a gradual and gradual change is divided into several types, namely geological evolution, astronomical evolution, biological evolution and cultural evolution.

Judging from the part that has changed, evolution can be divided into cosmic evolution and organic evolution. Besides that, there are other terms known as geological evolution, too:

• Cosmic Evolution : Is a continuous change that occurs in the universe (evolution universe).
• Organic Evolution : Changes that occur in living things or biotic components from generation to generation both morphologically and physiologically. This is also known as biological evolution.
• Geological Evolution : Known as the changes that occur on the earth’s surface due to weathering from time to time.
• Biological Evolution : Gradual changes that occur in living things on earth according to changing times.
• Inorganic Evolution : Planets, stars, world topography, chemical makeup of the earth, chemical elements and atomic particles can change gradually which is known as Inorganic Evolution. All types of animals and plants that exist today are derived from other organisms that occur simply, for example, gradual modification and accumulation in the current generation is called Organic Evolution. The main trend of the study of plant and animal evolution shows the occurrence of adaptation to environmental conditions which in fact often involve increased specialization and complexity of the structure and function of living things.

Definition of Evolution According to Experts

Reported by the Encyclopaedia Britannica (2015), all human cultures have developed their own explanations about the origin of the world and of humans and other living things. Many figures who contributed thoughts on the theory of evolution. Such as Aristotle, Plato, Jean Baptise de Lamarck, Charles Robert Darwin, Alfred Russel Wallace, and August Weisman. Check out the various theories of evolution in Ernst Mayr’s book below.

A number of classical Greek philosophers believed in the evolution of life. The following is an explanation of the theories of the characters:

• Plato (427-347 BC) Plato stated that he believed in the world, namely an ideal and eternal world and an imperfect virtual (imaginary) world. Both worlds can be understood using the human senses. It is said that evolution will change the world whose organisms are already ideal and perfectly adapted to the environment.

 

• Aristotle (384-322 BC) Aristotle adhered to the theory of natural scales. Quoted from the website of the Ministry of Education and Culture (Kemendikbud), the theory presented by Aristotle discussed that all life forms are arranged according to a scale or ladder whose complexity increases upwards. According to him, every form of living being has a ladder with the rungs of each being at different levels.

 

• Jean Baptiste de Lamarck (1744-1829)In Lamarck’s theory of evolution there are two main ideas, namely: Having two ideas about evolution. The first idea relates to the parts of the body that are and are not used by living things. Through this idea, he assumed that the parts of the body that living things constantly use in dealing with certain environments will become bigger and stronger than the parts of the body that are rarely used. Meanwhile, limbs that are rarely used will experience a setback. Lamarck’s second idea relates to the inheritance of traits or characteristics acquired by living things in adapting to their environment. Inheritance of these traits or characteristics that modify the organism it acquires during its lifetime. For example, giraffes are called short-necked, but because its neck is constantly stretching out to get leaves on tall trees, the giraffe’s neck starts to get long. This long neck is passed on to all descendants.

 

• Charles Robert Darwin (1809-1882)Darwin considered that evolution occurs through a process of natural selection. Living things that are able to adapt to nature can survive. While living things that cannot adapt to nature will not survive or die. Darwin is the pioneer of modern theory. The theory of evolution is what he observed while sailing on the Beagle to the Galapagos Islands. Through in-depth observations and studies, Darwin finally put forward his theory of evolution through a book entitled On The Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection. The book was published on November 24, 1859. There are two theories in Darwin’s book, namely the species that are alive today came from species that lived in the past.

 

• Alfred Russel Wallace (1823-1913) Russel Wallace’s theory of evolution is developing a theory of natural selection put forward by Charles Darwin. Russel Wallace’s thoughts were obtained from the results of expeditions in Malaysia, then Borneo (Kalimantan), Sulawesi and Maluku. The results show that the fauna in West Indonesia is different from East Indonesia. Wallace and Darwin, argue that the giraffe crew has a variety of necks, there are long and short. As a result, natural selection favored giraffes with long necks. Because it can reach high leaves, it can survive. For giraffes with short necks they can’t. Giraffes who have long necks are passed on to their offspring.

 

• August Weismann – On August Weismann’s theory that changes in body cells due to environmental influences are not passed on to their offspring. Evolution involves the inheritance of genes through sex cells. This means that evolution is related to the symptoms of natural selection on genetic factors. Weismann proved his theory by using mice. Where to mate two mice whose tails are cut off. Furthermore, the adult rats cut their tails and mated with each other. The result is tailed rat children. He carried out the experiment for up to 21 generations of mice and the results were the same.

 

Principles of Evolution

Evolution is driven by two main mechanisms, namely natural selection and genetic drift. Natural selection is a process that causes inherited traits that are useful for the survival and reproduction of organisms to become more common in a population and conversely, traits that are detrimental to them become less.

This happens because individuals with favorable traits are more likely to reproduce, so that more individuals in the next generation inherit these beneficial traits. Over many generations, adaptation occurs through the combination of these small, continuous and random changes in traits with natural selection.

Meanwhile, genetic drift is an independent process that results in random changes in the frequency of a trait in a population. Within humans there are instincts that are at the bottom of us which can be explored through various approaches discussed in Mortido’s book Fear, Greed and Vigilance, An Evolution of Civilization, Revised Edition.

Genetic drift results from the probability of whether a trait will be inherited when an individual survives and reproduces. Although the changes produced by drift and natural selection are small, these changes will accumulate and cause substantial changes in organisms. This process culminates in producing a new species.

And in fact, the similarities between organisms suggest that all the species we know came from a common ancestor by this slowly diverging process. Furthermore, there are five principles of evolution, namely:

• The new species is not the most perfect form that immediately lives, but comes from simple, unspecialized forms.
• Evolution is not always from simple to complex, in fact there are many examples of “regressive evolution” namely from complex forms to simple forms. For example, the cassowary is descended from a winged bird that can fly and then develops into a cassowary that is wingless and cannot fly.
• At one time evolution occurs faster than others. New forms appear and old forms disappear.
• The pace of evolution does not take place the same in every different organism. In general, evolution is rapid at first as new species appear and then slows down as groups form.
• Evolution occurs within populations, not within individuals, by the processes of mutation, differential reproduction and natural selection.

Characteristics of the Evolutionary Process

Biologists had made observations of the comparison of dark to brightly colored butterflies in Southern England still in the 1850s. But when they studied collections from England’s smoky industrial Midland region, they found very few butterflies. brightly colored butterfly.

There is no doubt that coloration is genetically controlled, but why are brightly colored butterflies more common in some areas and darker ones more in others? From this event we can note four important things, namely:

• An event must have a basis, namely “raw material”. Before the frequency of dark colored butterflies increased, there were already some dark colored individuals in this population and this dark coloration was decreasing. So evolutionary events require genetic drift as a raw material. There is a factor of change in evolution.
• Evolutionary events do not encompass all existing raw materials. A century ago there were many aberrant declines in butterflies. But only one deviation, namely the dark color, is the basis for changes in the population. the other deviations are more or less fixed in frequency. evolution is selective change, with environmental factors (in this case soot and birds of prey) driving this selection. So in evolution there is a guiding factor.
• Evolutionary events are changes in populations, not changes in one or a few individuals. A century ago in the population of the Biston Betaria butterfly there were only a few dark butterflies. The change that occurred over the next hundred years was a change in the frequency of dark colors in the population.
• In general, change is not the most important characteristic of evolutionary events. In 1850 all individuals were nearly identical. Now they are still almost the same anyway. Most of the discrepancies that were rare in 1850 are still rare today and only a few new deviations can be discovered. The only thing that changes is the frequency of the color traits. So in evolution there is a factor of stability.

 

Evolution Theory

 

Before discussing further about the theory of human evolution, Readers can use the book Theory of Evolution: Origin and Purpose of Humans as a reference to better understand the various explanations below.

Early Human Evolution Theory

Up here, you have started to understand what is meant by the theory of evolution, right? To be clearer, it’s better if you know the theory of ancient human evolution. As previously discussed, Anaximander, a pre-Socratic philosopher who lived around 610–546 BC, has discussed the possibility of how humans evolved from fish.

However, there is no scientific evidence that can prove this opinion, right, Pahamifren. Over time, this theory of human evolution actually focuses more on the assumption that humans developed or evolved on earth from primates that were already extinct, you know. The primates that are often associated with human evolution are ape-like primates. That is why there is a lot of information circulating that humans come from monkeys.

Evidence that primates are related to humans is from their genetics. DNA between humans and primates can reach up to 97% similarity. However, that does not mean that humans are considered to have come from monkeys, yes. These facts can only trace that humans and primates may have a common ancestor.

Charles Darwin’s Theory of Evolution

In fact, information about humans evolving from apes emerged because of Charles Darwin’s theory of human evolution. In the book “The Origin of Species” which put forward the theory of evolution written by Charles Darwin, concluded that all living things came from a common ancestor (common ancestor) and are related to one another. According to Darwin in the book, the process of genetic mutation from the same ancestor resulted in the process of evolution and the emergence of various new species.

Darwin imagined human evolution to be like a tree. The single trunk of a tree and its roots are the ancestors of living things. While the branches and leaves of trees become new species that are born due to a process of genetic mutation. The process of genetic mutation can occur due to natural selection in a long time. From natural selection, Darwin then divided the evolutionary process into microevolution and macroevolution.

Microevolution is the changes that occur in species in small ways. For example, changes in color or size in a population over several generations. While macroevolution is a change due to natural selection that is able to create new species. For example, dinosaurs turned into birds, amphibian mammals into whales, and ape ancestors became humans.

In the world of work, one really needs to have a work ethic. Then, what exactly is meant by work ethic? Well, you can find the answer in this article, Readers.

Definition of Work Ethic

In the world of work, one of the requirements for applying for a job is having a high work ethic. This term is closely related to how to assess one’s performance. Indirectly, one’s personality can be seen from one’s work ethic.

The definition of work ethic in language consists of two words, namely ethos and work. Ethos itself is defined as the basic character of a society.

The manifestation of the work ethic can be seen from social structures and norms. Meanwhile, the meaning of work according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI is defined as an activity in doing something. So, the work ethic can be interpreted simply, namely the work ethic is a reflection of productivity, enthusiasm, and self-discipline.

Someone who has a high work ethic will also have high productivity. For people who have a work ethic will usually be more appreciated because they are considered capable of being responsible in every job they do. Not only that, determination and dedication to a job must also be done.

The impact that will be obtained if we have a high work ethic is that we will look superior to others. That way, it can be one way to improve self-quality or even success in a career.

Each individual must have a work ethic when they want or are going to work. By having a good work ethic, the career you start will grow rapidly in the future. So, there is nothing wrong with having a good work ethic as an example for the Indonesian people. This will help you improve your performance in the work environment as well as in the academic environment.

Why Is Having a Work Ethic Important?

Work ethic is a very important attitude that must be owned by every individual. At work, when someone has a high work ethic, other people will give a positive assessment of your own person.

Maybe for some people think that a high degree, certification or even experience is everything. However, everything will come back to you, such as how hard you work, the level of creativity you use to solve problems and how determined you are to achieve your goals.

When you have a good work ethic, not only you will benefit, but also other people and the place where you work. This can happen because by having a work ethic, it can produce a good work environment. The hard work and sense of responsibility that you show can affect the performance of your colleagues and even your boss.

For example, when you get a job and always finish it quickly, it will change the way other people see you. They will assess your quality as a disciplined and responsible person, so you will be better known for having a high work ethic.

Characteristics of Work Ethic 

We can judge whether a person has the characteristics of a high work ethic or not by his habits in everyday life. The following is an explanation of the characteristics of a high work ethic and a low work ethic.

High Work Ethic

1. Have a Leadership Soul

For people who have a high work ethic, they will have a leadership spirit that is imprinted on themselves. Work responsibility is not only to fellow human beings but also responsibility before God.

How does he complete work with the people around him, how is he responsible for his God.

2. Have a tenacious and diligent attitude

Being tenacious and diligent is an attitude that must be possessed by people who have a high work ethic. Of course this is inseparable from a success.

Having a tenacious and diligent attitude means describing how the person is able to work diligently and expertly in a particular field. He will give his best and finish on time.

3. Discipline

Discipline is not only related to efficient time but also how someone is able to commit to things that have been planned. This discipline relates to work activities that should be used as a reference to work better.

You have to stay focused on your work and don’t settle for temporary results. You have to fight for a bright future with a rather long time.

4. Appreciate Existing Time

Time is money, this proverb makes people who want to have a good work ethic a passion. You have to appreciate the time you have to work better, don’t waste time on things that don’t support your work.

Do less unimportant things and make as much work time as possible. By appreciating the time you have, you will do good things and as much as possible.

5. Initiative and Responsive

Initiative is quite an important point. People who have a work ethic will not hesitate to express their opinions and ideas. We must respond quickly about the work we will do.

Of course, we must have initiatives on how to make the workplace or agency more advanced and rapid. We also have to be responsive if our workplace has problems or difficulties. They tend to feel dissatisfied when they are not involved in an activity such as a team project.

6. Sense of Responsibility

Sense of responsibility is the basis of the emergence of trust. Someone who has a work ethic, then he is always responsible for the tasks being done. Everyone must have a sense of responsibility, not only in the scope of work.

They will always prioritize the work they have taken on in order to complete it. Because people’s trust is more important to establish better cooperation.

7. High Dedication

In doing work you must have a sense of belonging or love for the job. This is so that you are always maximal at work.

Doubts that come to you will only make your work ethic decrease. Disappointment in the work you are doing will go away on its own and you will always be satisfied with the result.

8. Live simply and frugal

People who have a high work ethic are simple and frugal. Which in this case people who are not adventurous and not extravagant also affects how it works. They will live simply and not waste money to buy necessities that are not important, so that their financial condition remains good.

9. Work More Seriously

If you do something seriously, because this will lead to enthusiastic work. If you do your job seriously and carefully, the results you get will be in accordance with the wishes of the agency.

10. The Future Becomes Orientation When Working

We must have goals for our future. We must remember the future at work, want to be more advanced and want to increase the size of your company. With an attitude like this will make us better than before.

11. Have High Work Motivation

Motivation that is owned in work is very necessary both for oneself and within the agency. Motivation that is owned by ourselves, for example the company where we work, we want to make the company more advanced and bigger. With motivation, we will always try to do the best for the company.

Low Work Ethic

1. Has no leadership spirit
2. Work is not the main thing but consider work only part of the routine of life
3. Working compulsorily or being chased by necessity
4. Perceives work as a barrier to feeling pleasure or joy
5. Work is not appreciated
6. Feeling that work is a heavy burden to bear
7. Not tenacious and assiduous, just lazy
8. Not disciplined and not initiative
9. No sense of responsibility
10. Not very dedicated
11. Extravagant and full of compulsion style life.

Benefits of Having a Work Ethic 

When you have a work ethic and apply it well, you will also experience many benefits in terms of career and self-development. There are several benefits that a person can achieve when implementing a work ethic in his routine. The following is an explanation:

1. Getting Inner Peace

A high work ethic does not only affect life in the world of work. People who have a high work ethic will not procrastinate on mandatory work or work that needs to be done.

In general, people who have a high work ethic will carry out God’s commands without hesitation and without delay. That way, one can get peace that makes life more comfortable.

2. Good For Health

By having a work ethic, it can have a good impact on health. In this case, the health in question, such as physical health and mental health.

3. The Economy is Improving

Working diligently and enthusiastically will make you stand out in the eyes of your superiors. Having a good work ethic in the eyes of superiors will have a positive impact on career advancement.

4. Increase in Social Status

Having a good work ethic will not only increase your income. Social status will also rise and you will be well known by colleagues, family, and the wider community.

5. Building Self Image

They have no doubt about the various ideas that you submit or when you are appointed as the leader of the project team.

You will be known as a hard worker and reliable. This of course can be the right step for those of you who are building a good personal branding (self-image).

6. Increase Productivity

Someone who is always trying to improve work ethic, then he will always try to work optimally. That way, it can have a good impact on the company as well as itself.

Tips to Improve Work Ethic

The work ethic can be said to be cultivated in oneself. However, sometimes there are still some people who don’t know about it. Then, how do you improve your work ethic? Here’s an explanation:

1. Start From Yourself

You have to be a good start yourself to advance at work. Encouraging yourself is the most important thing so that the work targets you want to achieve are embedded in yourself.

The work ethic that you want to manifest is also grown from yourself. You have to convince yourself to do everything you can to achieve it. You need to pay attention to the health of the body too. A healthy body will affect us at work, such as exercise, adequate rest, adequate eating.

2. Instill Discipline

Throw away the desire to delay time in doing work tasks, don’t do them. If you have free time, use it to complete the task. Many temptations come when you want to be lazy at work. But you have to get through it by staying focused on what you are doing.

3. Use Time Wisely

Do not use the time at work for things that are not important. Sometimes at work we need time to relax but don’t go too far.

You must have a task target regarding work. This is useful when you are used to using time wisely, so there is no intention to delay work.

4. Avoid Distractions 

Throw away the negative thoughts that come that will only make a mess. Divert from positive thoughts or things that are important. Try to avoid distracting thoughts in order to increase focus at work.

5. Don’t Let Mistakes Dominate 

When you make a mistake at work, don’t let it dissolve and drown in excessive disappointment. This is intended so that morale does not go down.

Think more positively for the future. Do a self-evaluation, learn from mistakes, make a benchmark, don’t fall into the same hole again. Motivate yourself to be even better. By doing this, you can continue to grow to be a better person in the future.

6. Balance Working Time

You must know how the time limit is in working, according to the start time and end time. Using a work ethic means our eyes have to focus while working. Time off is also required and followed. Let your body and brain rest.

Spending leisure time at work also does not hurt. This time is a moment to recharge energy. So you have to balance work time with rest. By knowing the time limit in working is your job. This includes providing adequate rest time, getting proper sleep and eating the right diet.

From all the discussion above, it can be said that the work ethic must be optimally improved. This needs to be done because it can have a good impact on the company and also yourself. Thus the discussion about the work ethic. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you.

Definition of Ethnocentrism – Of course you often hear the terms ethnocentric or ethnocentrism, or even often appear in social situations. Launching from the Oxford Bibliographies , Monday (20/6/2022), the notion of ethnocentrism is a term applied in culture or ethnicity when an individual views the world from the perspective of his own group. Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the notion of ethnocentrism is an attitude or view that stems from its own society and culture.

Usually, ethnocentrism is accompanied by attitudes and views that belittle other societies and cultures. William Graham Sumner, a Yale University Professor of Political and Social Sciences, was the first to introduce the term ethnocentric in 1906.

While ethnocentrism is arguably a universal phenomenon that facilitates cohesion and continuity at all levels of social organization, it provides a rationalization for attacking other cultures or subcultures in its more extreme forms, for example motivating the criminalization of practices within a subculture or being used to justify war with other nation states.

Ethnocentrism is closely related to the deviant definition of a person who is not only seen as different, but also morally inferior or even evil. Stereotype members within their group against those outside the group as stupid, bad, or even dehumanizing and these characterizations provide the basis for cultural conflict.

Etymology and Definition of Ethnocentrism

The definition of Ethnocentrism is an assessment of other cultures on the basis of social values ​​and own cultural standards. Ethnocentric people judge other groups relative to their own group or culture, especially when it comes to language, behavior, customs, and religion. These ethnic differences and divisions define the distinctive cultural identity of each ethnic group. Ethnocentrism may be visible or invisible, and although it is considered a natural tendency of human psychology, it has negative connotations in society.

Ethnocentrism is a practice of looking at or judging other people’s culture based on one’s own values ​​or beliefs. This term comes from the Greek ” ethnos “, which means nation, and ” kentron “, which means center. Therefore, ethnocentrism involves the nation to become a center. Ethnocentrism focuses on the behavior of applying one’s own culture or ethnicity as a reference for assessing people’s culture, practices, behavior, beliefs. In the social sciences, ethnocentrism judges other cultures based on one’s own cultural standards, not the standards of another particular culture.

The tendency of ethnocentrism is to see our culture as the center of the universe, namely as a true reality that influences all intercultural communication, including inter-ethnic relations. This can be seen clearly in the definition of ethnocentrism.

Porter and Samovar (1997:10) state that the main source of cultural differences in attitudes is ethnocentrism, namely the tendency to view other people unconsciously by using our own group and our own habits as criteria for all judgments. The more we have in common with them, the closer they are to us; the greater the dissimilarity, the farther they are from us.

We tend to see our group, our country, our own culture, as the best, as the most moral. This view demands our first allegiance and creates a frame of reference that denies the existence of any other frame of reference. This view is an absolute position that raises another position from its proper place for other cultures.

Ethnocentrism is the judgment of a group of people against the culture of other groups of people by comparing or using their own cultural standards. ” Is Judging other cultures by comparison with one’s own ” (Giddens, 1986).

Ethnocentrism is also cultural egoism. A community considers itself the most superior among others. Better self-assessment of culture. ” Our own groups, our own country, our own culture as the best, as the most moral ” (Porter, 1972). So, all judgments depart from the size of one’s own culture, causing what is best is one’s own culture while other people’s cultures are inferior, as is the case with stereotypes which are misguided judgments, ethnocentrism can be called a blind judgment, “using our own group and our own. ” customs as the standards for all judgments ” (Samovar and Porter, 1991). This brings wide consequences and influences in acts of communication.

Definition of Ethnocentrism According to Experts

1. Coleman and Cressey

Ethnocentrism is someone who comes from an ethnic group who tends to see their culture as the best compared to other cultural traits.

2. Hoggs

Ethnocentrism is an activity that involves internal and external attributions in people’s lives.

3. Taylor, Peplau, and Sears

Ethnocentrism is something that refers to the belief of a group of people that their culture is always superior to other cultures.

4. Hariyono

Hariyono gives meaning to the term ethnocentrism as a feeling of being in group and out group on the basis of one’s attitude.

5. Harris

Ethnocentrism is the tendency for someone to think that their group is better than other groups so that this encourages irrational actions, such as committing violence, war, brawls, and so on.

6. Zestrow

Ethnocentrism is an attitude that is carried out by ethnic groups in private without considering the conditions of other social groups.

7. Levine and Campbell

Ethnocentrism is the view of certain groups that come from one culture to judge other cultures that have social values ​​that are different from their culture.

8.Summer

Ethnocentrism is the view that one’s own group is the center of everything and all other groups are compared and judged according to the group’s standards. In this case everything is assessed based on the perspective of the individual culture concerned.

9.SalimPeter

Ethnocentrism is an attitude that considers one’s culture or sense of self to be better than others.

Aspects in Ethnocentrism

The aspects of ethnocentrism are as follows.

• Every society always has a number of characteristics of social life that can be hypothesized as a syndrome.
• Ethnocentrism syndromes are functionally related to the composition and existence of groups and competition between groups.
• There is a generalization that all groups show the syndrome such as the safe intra group and disdain for the outside group.
• Physical (biological) differences. environmental differences (geographical), differences in wealth (social status), differences in beliefs. and differences in social norms.

Ethnocentrism Factors

1. History

Historically, ethnocentrism can be triggered. When individuals have a close connection with family history in the past regarding an event of identity development, then they will feel they belong to that culture. These various identities are in the form of language, habits, to past events that come from our ancestors.

2. Multiculturalism

This ethnocentrism will occur when the conditions of the social environment are diverse and noisy, of course, sometimes a feeling arises to make comparisons that lead to conflict. This is caused by the occurrence of several cultures meet each other.

3. Political Situation

Ethnocentrism will arise from the thoughts of a person or with a group to achieve a legitimized power. Usually there will be a feeling of fanaticism towards the identity attached to him. This happens because politics is often considered one of the right places to advance personal and group interests.

4. Loyalty

Ethnocentrism will arise when a strong culture makes individuals who are in a group have a deeper sense of loyalty and are more inclined to follow norms and develop relationships with related members.

5. Social Distancing

Social distance is another aspect of social prejudice that shows the level of one’s acceptance of others in the relationships that occur between them. Social distance is a feeling of separating a certain person or group based on a certain level of acceptance.

6. Social Prejudice

Prejudice is a negative attitude directed at someone on the basis of comparison with one’s own group. Such an attitude can be said to be an attitude that hinders the effectiveness of communication between communicators and communicants who, for example, have different ethnicities.

7. Stereotypes

Stereotype is a person’s belief in other people (because it is influenced by knowledge and experience). This belief makes us estimate differences between groups that may be too high or too low as a characteristic of a person or group.

Types of Ethnocentrism

Ethnocentrism is of two types as follows.

• Flexible ethnocentrism is defined as the way a person can learn how to properly control the ego and perceptions. In facing the reality of the world, where there are many tribes and groups, objective efforts are still made when looking at someone from another group.
• In contrast to flexible, inflexible ethnocentrism is explained as a form of someone who cannot understand people from other groups who have different cultural backgrounds. Those with intolerance only judge subjectively and based on habits in the group.

Example of Ethnocentrism

In everyday life, especially in relationships, ethnocentrism still occurs frequently, either consciously or unconsciously. For example, bullying, ridiculing or avoiding friends who come from eastern Indonesia, such as Papua, only because of their black skin and curly or curly hair.

The phenomenon of ethnocentrism also occurs in big cities, such as Yogyakarta. As a multicultural city, there are many immigrants from all over the archipelago with different cultural backgrounds, each bringing interests and values ​​from their respective regions. The concern that sometimes arises is the presence of primordial sentiments (excessive feelings of ethnicity) and ethnocentricity.

For example, students who come from Medan (Batak tribe) will always insist on their stance and attitude who call themselves a person who is firm, opinionated, and rude (rude in the sense of being firm). Malay people are said to be shy, religious, and feel more acceptable wherever they are. The Javanese people, as a result of the influence of the New Order, considered themselves the most advanced of other regions, so that when dealing with people outside Java, the stigma that was formed was negative stigma such as being lazy, rude, and rebellious.

In addition to everyday life, ethnocentrism also applies on a larger scale to certain groups. In the interior Papuan tribes who have the habit of using “Koteka”. If this is seen from the point of view of non-Papuan people in the interior, wearing a koteka might be considered a shameful thing. However, for residents of the interior of Papua, wearing a koteka is considered normal and a matter of pride.

Carok culture is a culture that originates from Madura, is the behavior of defending self-esteem by hurting the people involved. Carok in Madurese society is a sacred concept and must be upheld by Madurese people. The ongoing conflict between the Dayak and Madurese tribes has not yet emerged.

Impact of Ethnocentrism

In a multicultural society, ethnocentrism can lead to misunderstandings of other people’s cultures. Misunderstandings can occur especially regarding things that are considered sacred to a society. Deviant behavior that can arise is anger and stereotypes towards other people’s cultures. Conversely, ethnocentrism can strengthen the cultural elements of a society.

The existence of views on cultural differences can strengthen the unity of people in other cultures. Strong solidarity will be created without criticism of one’s own ethnicity or national group accompanied by prejudice against other national groups.

Conflicts that arise due to ethnocentrism are more due to differences in understanding with other cultures. The tendency that occurs is to judge the culture of other nations to be seen as lower than their own culture. Therefore, ethnocentrism has the opportunity to hinder the harmony of inter-ethnic interaction and communication.

1. The Negative Impact of Ethnocentrism

a. Causing Horizontal Conflicts

Being proud of one’s own culture and looking down on other cultures can trigger conflict among fellow citizens. Especially if the understanding of ethnocentrism is not only attached to an individual.

b. Hindering the Process of Assimilation and Cultural Integration

Cultural assimilation is a social process in the form of direct and intensive interaction over a long period of time with different cultural backgrounds, from this process a mixed cultural element is formed between these groups.

Cultural integration is a process of adjusting several different types of culture so as to achieve conformity and harmony. If ethnocentrism grows, then of course it will not be possible to achieve.

c. Lowering the Objectivity of Science

Ethnocentrism can reduce the development of science. Because, an individual will prioritize the side of subjectivity compared to objectivity in assessing something.

2. The Positive Impact of Ethnocentrism

a. Fostering the Spirit of Patriotism

When an individual understands ethnocentrism, he will automatically have a strong soul to defend his identity. This is generally referred to as patriotism.

b. Increasing Love for Own Culture

Ethnocentrism is needed in order to create a complete sense of knowing and owning a culture. With an attitude of ethnocentrism, culture can be maintained, because now it is vulnerable to being crushed by the processes of globalism and modernization.

c. Maintaining the Integrity of Multiculturalism in the Country

The next positive impact is being able to maintain multiculturalism as the identity of a nation. This is because Indonesia is nothing but a different philosophy, but still one.

Ethnocentrism Prevention Solutions

Ethnocentrism occurs because of socio-cultural problems. Therefore, the solutions that can be taken are as follows.

• Revive the local wisdom of the community.
• Instill multiculturalism.
• Filter the culture that enters Indonesia according to Pancasila.
• Instill a spirit of nationalism.
• Reducing excessive fanaticism.
• Be tolerant.
• Growing empathy.
• Fostering an inclusive attitude

Conclusion

The definition of Ethnocentrism is an understanding that considers their group is better than other groups. There are several levels in Ethnocentrism, including positive, negative, and very negative. Of the three levels, the worst level is the very negative level because it ignores positive things from other groups and deifies its group as the best group, often causing widespread and problematic conflicts.

This understanding of ethnocentrism is one of the obstacles in cross-cultural communication, that by being ethnocentrism one cannot view cultural differences as the uniqueness of each culture that should be respected. By viewing one’s own culture as superior and other foreign cultures as “wrong” cultures, effective cross-cultural communication is just wishful thinking

This is because a person tends to limit the communication he makes and as much as possible does not get involved with foreign cultures that are different or conflict with his own culture. Culture can be in the form of language as a symbol of a tribe or ethnicity.

Definition of Ethnicity – In a growing diversity, the existence of ethnicity is certainly one aspect that is quite important. So that in the end it will become inseparable from diversity.

However, in general, ethnicity or tribe is defined as a social unit that can differentiate units based on the similarity of one’s regional origins. So these things can be classified according to the meaning of similar social groups based on group status or class.

Therefore, in this article we will examine more clearly and in detail the meaning of ethnicity, types, and examples.

Definition of Ethnicity

Ethnicity itself is also known as ethnicity which is a social unit that can be distinguished from other units based on deeply rooted cultural elements, especially with language which is one of the most important aspects of a culture. There is another perspective that views ethnicity as a group of people who are bound by awareness and also a collective identity that is reinforced by an understanding of national unity. In this case, the existence of ethnicity is determined by the importance of group awareness, a broad understanding of cultural unity and also closely related origin similarities.

Ethnicity is a social system of human classification based on a belief system that has been believed, implementation of existing values ​​in society, understanding of cultural diversity, strengthening of constructed customs, affirmation of norms, use of language, explanation of human historical background, region geography, as well as inseparable kinship relations. Then the definition according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the term ethnic or ethnic has a meaning as a social group of people who are in a social or cultural system that serves as a guideline. These social groups have certain roles and positions based on genetic factors, customs or traditions, religion, language systems, and others.

Definition of Ethnic According to Experts

Ethnicity is a series of similarities in origin which is one of the factors that can encourage connection within a bond. So that the types of ethnicity spread throughout the world include the following: Mayans, Persians, Amazons, Aborigines, Han, Gypsy, Greek.

The following are some definitions of ethnicity according to the views of experts, including:

a. Definition of Ethnicity According to Fredrik Brath

Ethnicity is a group of people who unite because of the similarity in meaning of race, national origin, religion, and a combination of these categories originating from a cultural system with highly upheld social values.

b. Understanding Ethnicity According to Hassan Shadily MA

Ethnicity is a group of people who are seen as having relatively dominating biological relationships. In addition, ethnicity also implies a social group that mixes and becomes a characteristic that distinguishes groups of people based on regional origins.

c. Understanding Ethnic According to Anthony Smith

Ethnicity is a group of people who mingle and interact with each other, which are classified based on their beliefs and religion, racial equality, traditions or customs, language, historical background similarities, and also the origin of the descendants of the same ancestors. So that these community groups can create a cultural system that is inherent and regulates the community groups included in it with the values ​​and social norms they adhere to.

Ethnic Types

The following are the types of ethnicity which are divided into 7, including namely:

1. The Mayans

The Mayans are a group of tribes who occupy the territory of the Yucatan peninsula, Central America, which borders the Pacific Ocean to the west and the Caribbean Sea to the east. Where the Mayans with all their developments can produce unique works and civilizations such as buildings in the form of Chichen Itza. Then in agriculture they created drainage canals, then planted corn and latex, and also built wells called cenotes.

2. Tribe of the Persian nation

The Persians are one of the tribes belonging to the Iranian nation, which uses Persian in their daily communication. The majority of these nations occupy the territory of Iran and also some others occupy territories in several other countries such as Tajikistan, Afghanistan, Uzbekistan, Kuwait, the United States, the United Arab Emirates, Iraq, and several countries in the Middle East.

3. The Amazons

The Amazons are one of the ethnic groups whose entire population is female. Beginning during the Classical Era in Greek mythology, according to Herodotus, the Amazons occupied an area on the Scythian border in Sarmatia, Ukraine. Other historians also argue that the Amazons also occupy Asia Minor, India, and Libya.

4. Aborigines

Aboriginal ethnicity is a group of people who live on the continent of Australia. Where they appeared in the 18th century or often known as the centuries of the arrival of white people. The population alone reaches 300,000 people. They live on the north and east coasts and also on the banks of the Murray River as well as in Tasmania. The Aborigines survive by hunting and gathering.

5. The Han people

The Han people live in China with a population of 91.59 percent of the population in all of China. Not only being the largest tribe in China, the Han tribe is also the tribe with the largest population in the world. Where this one tribe has approximately 4,000 years of historical records. The Han people are scattered throughout China. They usually use Hanyu in their daily communication.

6. The Gypsy Tribe

The Gypsy Tribe is one of the tribes that is classified as nomadic. Where they do not have a fixed place of residence or are always moving places of residence. This ethnic group has its own view of life which is unique and widespread in the Americas and the Middle East. The population of the Gypsy Tribe is estimated at more than 5 million people spread across the world.

7. Tribes of the Greeks

The Greek tribe is the name of the ethnic group that has lived in Greece since the 17th century BC until now. The population of this Greek tribe is found on the Greek peninsula in southeastern Europe, Cyprus and the Greek Islands.

Ethnic Example

The following are some examples that show an ethnicity, including:

1. Lineage

Membership in certain ethnic groups is basically determined by lineage. For example, the Batak tribe with lineage from the father or often referred to as patrilineal. This is different from the Minang tribe with a mother’s lineage which is usually referred to as matrilineal. In addition, ethnic classification can also be based on religion. For example, there is the term Ethnic Malay in Malaysia for natives who are predominantly Muslim. Meanwhile, the Serani ethnic group is Christian with the characteristics of the Portuguese breed like the Tugu people.

2. Mixed Ethnicity

What shows the existence of ethnic diversity is the existence of ethnic groups based on a mixture of races. For example, Peranakan people are a mix of Malay and Chinese ethnicity, Metis ethnicity which is a term for a mix of Hispanics and natives. Then the Mulato Ethnicity which is a blend of the Negroid Race and the Caucasoid Race, and others.

Ethnic Identity

Ethnic identities are individuals who have many identities associated with specific roles. One of these identities is related to their ethnic background which is considered as the essence of themselves. Thus, ethnic identity is a characteristic possessed by a group of people who are considered to be the essence of themselves.

This ethnic identity is actually a specific form of cultural identity. Where ethnic identity can be seen as a set of ideas about one ownership of ethnic group membership. This concerns several dimensions, including:

a. Self identification
b. Knowledge of ethnic culture starting from customs, traditions, values, and behavior
c. The feeling of belonging to a particular ethnic group.

Approach to Change of Ethnic Identity

There are several reasons why changes in ethnic identity in a group can occur, including:

1. Objective Approach (Psychological or Structural)

a. Basic assumption of natural science: There is ancestry that exists in social reality in human behavior. Look for general laws by explaining which variables cause or correlate with other variables.
b. This approach tends to be ethnocentric.
c. Objectivists claim that cultural markers such as race are closely related, though inseparable from, ethnicity.

2. Subjective Approach (Phenomenology)

a. The subjective will see that ethnic identity emerges through cultural signs, they emphasize themselves, and feelings of identity related to the group and its recognition by others.
c. Ethnic identity as dynamic, situational, and fluid.

This deterministic approach has been criticized for being too simplistic, because the process of changing ethnic identity in ethnic groups is actually circular, interactional, and also dynamic, which involves conflicts within ethnic groups.

Models of Ethnic Identity Change

Basically, ethnic identity will emerge if two or more ethnic groups are interconnected. In the past, there have been various models of character as well as processes of transformation of ethnic identities, especially the acculturation model as well as the assimilation model which are sometimes interchanged. Assimilation tends to coincide with the loss of ethnicity, while cultural pluralism tends to highlight the continuity of ethnicity.

Generally, assimilation will refer to the extent to which a group that was originally distinctive has lost its subjective identity and has been absorbed into the social structure of another group. Indeed, acculturation is a prerequisite or at least goes hand in hand with assimilation because how can someone lose their distinctive feeling and be fully accepted in another group, unless they are fluent in the language and culture of the receiving group.

The concept of acculturation and also the concept of assimilation originated and developed in the United States. The difference between the two processes is that acculturation is a two-way process, while assimilation is a one-way process. Since the authoritative definition emerged, many experts put forward a definition of acculturation. Many definitions contain similar interpretations, namely that acculturation is a form of cultural change caused by cultural group contact, emphasizing the acceptance of new cultural patterns and characteristics of indigenous peoples by minority groups.

Ethnic or Ethnicity Concept

In studying inter-ethnic relations can be done by looking at the cases that occurred. Especially for ethnic groups who rarely experience conflict and survive the friction that occurs. The goal itself is to identify how they deal with any friction that occurs without conflict. According to Barth, ethnic groups can be called a cultural unit because ethnic groups themselves have an important main feature, namely the ability to share the same cultural characteristics. He also assumes that each ethnic group has its own cultural characteristics.

There are two main things that we can discuss in observing ethnic groups with the characteristics of these special cultural units, namely the formation of cultural units and also the factors that influence the formation of these cultural units. There are also several implications when viewing ethnic groups as cultural units, including:

a. The classification of certain individuals or groups declared as members of a particular ethnic group depends on their ability to show the cultural characteristics of that ethnic group.

b. Visible cultural forms will show ecological influences, but that does not mean that this shows that all of them are merely forms of adaptation to the environment.

However, it is more correct to say that these cultural forms are the result of adjustments by members of ethnic groups when dealing with various external factors. For example, when an ecological environment group varies, it will show different behavior according to the area where it lives, but does not reflect a different cultural value orientation.

Identity Politics

This concept has been explained by Gabriel Almond at length and is easy to understand. These means, experiences, and also influences, which all shape individual attitudes, create what is called identity politics, namely a combination of several feelings and attitudes as follows.

1. Within a political system, there are some basic attitudes and beliefs such as nationalism, ethnic or class identification, ideological attachments, as well as a fundamental sense of personal rights, privileges and obligations.

2. There is a lack of emotional commitment to knowledge of governmental and political institutions such as elections, the structure of representative bodies, the powers of the executive branch, the structure of the judiciary, and also the legal system.

3. There are more fast-changing views on events, political policies, political issues, as well as rising political figures. Identity politics has so far been understood in terms of personal identity and collective identity as well as identity built on the basis of gender, ethnicity, sexual orientation, nation and religion.

Thus a series of explanations regarding the complete meaning of ethnicity, types, and examples that exist in society.

Definition of Etiquette – As dignified and virtuous social beings, it is better for us to instill good social values ​​within ourselves and spread them to the general public. One of the characteristics of a dignified person is having good manners in their daily life so that they can lead a harmonious and peaceful life without any disputes with each other.

The term etiquette itself is actually quite closely related to ethics. Even though they are related to each other, it is clear that the two terms have quite fundamental differences. In general, etiquette is explained as a procedure for carrying out courtesy and vice versa, ethics is the direct application of the form of these manners.

Both have a very important role in peaceful social life, but you need to know that Readers are no longer mistaken when asked to explain what the difference between etiquette and ethics is, so in this discussion we have summarized information about etiquette, types, examples, and the difference between etiquette and ethics. which will add insight to all of you Readers.

Furthermore, we have presented the discussion and can be listened to below!

Definition of Etiquette and Ethics

Sometimes we find it difficult to distinguish between ethics and etiquette. Because the two terms are often considered synonymous. Ethics and etiquette have different meanings on closer inspection. Although in fact they have a lot in common.

Etiquette is an attitude, like manners or other rules, that govern relations between groups of cultural workers. Etiquette comes from the French word “etiquette”.

The most basic is one of the most important things parents teach their children. Children who are brought up with basic manners can adapt well in society. This is an important provision for the future. Some children’s foundations are accustomed to thanking, apologizing, understanding how to share, willing to help others and know how to communicate properly with others.

Basic manners or etiquette is the good behavior of a person in relation to those around him. A person with good manners also leads a good social life. Therefore, parents must teach their children basic manners from an early age so that later they can communicate. There are different types of behavior that comprise the basic behavior.

Meanwhile, in the study of linguistics, the word ethics comes from the Greek word ethos, which means comes from habit. In this case, the perspective of the object is the action, attitude or behavior of the person. More specifically, the notion of ethics is the science of the attitude and decency of an individual in his social environment, which is full of rules and principles relating to behavior that is considered appropriate.

Ethics is a discipline whose aim is to study morality. Apart from ethics, morality is studied by several other disciplines, including anthropology, sociology, and psychology. The difference lies in the approach used to understand morality. The approach used in ethics is the descriptive study of morality. Ethics is the main problem of human social activity. Ethical goals are descriptive and prescriptive. Descriptive means that ethics makes observations about individual characteristics. Meanwhile, precept means that the purpose of ethics is to assess people’s actions and provide recommendations or approval of people’s actions.

However, the general understanding of ethics is the rules, norms, rules or procedures that are normally used as guidelines or principles for the performance of individual actions and behavior. The application of this standard is closely related to the good and bad character of individuals in society.

So ethics is the science that examines good and evil as well as duties, rights and responsibilities both socially and morally for everyone in their social life. Or it can also be said that ethics includes values ​​related to individual morality regarding right and wrong

The Fundamental Difference Between Etiquette and Ethics

By understanding this, you will also have an understanding of the difference between etiquette and etiquette. So that you know more clearly, here we summarize the differences between ethics and everyday etiquette.

Asmawati Burhan’s General Textbook of Ethics (2019) reports on differences in ethics and etiquette relating to human behavior. Both ethics and etiquette give names to human behavior, i.e. what is permissible and what is not. One of the differences between ethics and etiquette is their scope. Ethics is about individual morality. Although etiquette is all about manners.

According to K. Bertens, the book Ethics (2007) explains four differences between ethics and etiquette. Here’s the description:

• Etiquette is about how one should act. Meanwhile, ethics refers to the standard of action itself.
• Etiquette is valid only in social connections. At the same time, ethics always prevails, even if no one pays attention to it.
• Etiquette is relative (what is considered polite in one culture may be impolite in another). Even though ethics is absolute or does not need to be questioned anymore.
• Etiquette only applies to the outside of a person. Even though ethics refers to the inner (spiritual) side of a person.

The difference between ethics and etiquette can be started by recognizing the role ethics play in everyday life. Ethics fulfills its function as a place of critical identification in dealing with various confusing moral situations.

In addition, ethics is also an indicator of intellectual ability. Intellectual ability is the ability to reason rationally and critically. Then ethics also works in an ethical orientation, which is very necessary in a rational attitude in lularis conditions.

We can learn the difference between ethics and etiquette in advance from the characteristics of one of them, namely ethics. Ethics has several characteristics that we need to understand as a social science study, including:

1. Absolute or absolute nature

This means that ethics applies to everyone, anywhere and anytime. Ethics as a principle is unquestioned and does not depend on changing moral foundations. For example, killing other people and seizing rights or property are immoral acts and actions for whatever reason.

2. Ethics to judge whether human actions are good or bad.

Ethics usually prevails, although there is nothing to prove it. This is because ethics is related to the principles of good conscience and human life. For example, if someone steals, even though no one else knows about it, it is still an act that violates applicable ethics and norms. So one’s morale is ultimately bad, even if the police don’t deserve it.

3. Ethics is closely related to human actions or behavior.

Ethics, namely how to look inward about the good and bad relationships of actions committed by people or individuals. Basically, everyone is taught the things that can and cannot be done. Then people gradually come to know good and bad things, so they take shape and seep into their hearts. Of course, this makes people debate whether they want to commit evil or evil deeds.

4. Ethics is also related to the perspective of human reason.

Ethics is very closely related to one’s behavior, deeds and behavior. In this way, ethics for the most part develops naturally as a result of individual behavior, actions and behavior. Bad behavior and actions are considered as bad ethics, while good behavior and actions are also considered as good ethics. Fundamentally, however, ethics is closely related to the behavior and actions of the individual itself.

So ethics always apply, even when no one else is looking.

The following differences in ethics and etiquette can also be seen from their uses. The advantage of ethics itself is that through ethics people can contribute to attitudes that prevail between different points of view and morality. Then ethics is also useful for distinguishing what cannot be changed and what can be changed.

In addition, through systematic and critical thinking, ethics can also solve problems of morality and other social conditions that are troubling society.

Then ethics is also based on reason, not emotion, which can harm many people. Namely thinking and working systematically and regularly. Ethics can also dig into a problem down to its roots, not just out of curiosity, regardless of it.

Characteristics of Etiquette

Etiquette refers to a certain way of acting, habit, way or behavior adopted by a group of people when doing something. An example of etiquette is giving with the right hand.

Etiquette only applies to social interactions. In other words, if there are no witnesses or people, then the rules (adat) do not apply. For example, if someone puts their feet on the table while sitting on a chair and someone else sits with them, then this is not etiquette. However, such activity was fine if no one was looking or if he was just sitting alone.

Etiquette is very relative. Being rude to one group of people may not be a problem for another group of people. Spitting while eating is a relative violation of etiquette, while killing or stealing is an absolute etiquette. Therefore killing and stealing is guilty anywhere and anytime. Etiquette has more to do with looking at things outwardly or physically.

Etiquette is also closely related to manners (the two positions are interchangeable). Therefore, good manners emphasize only external conformity to standards. Politeness also aims to facilitate or harmonize social relations between humans. Politeness confuses the important and the unimportant. Sometimes behavior prioritizes things that are less important. For example our handshake with someone we already know or know when we meet, or saying “thank you” to someone who gave something.

Examples of Basic Etiquette in Everyday Life

There are various examples of basic etiquette in life. Some of the things to know are:

1. Ask for Help and Thank You

One of the ways parents educate their children is to properly ask for help and be grateful when others have helped them. Parents should set an example by saying the same when they ask their child for help.

For example, when asking your child to put their toys down, use “put them down first, son”, then when your child puts their toys down, remember to say “thank you”. If done every day, over time the child will follow this habit. Also, don’t forget to explain the meaning of the words please and thank you.

2. Greet others properly

Greeting others properly is one of the basic etiquette that children must master. When he meets friends, relatives or other people he doesn’t know, he needs to know how to greet them properly. Teach children to use polite words, especially when greeting older people.

Also, teach your child to look the other person in the eye during a conversation. If possible, teach them to shake hands with people they just met. The best way to practice this behavior is to practice it when role-playing or meeting other people.

3. Ask permission before taking

A child must learn that not everything can be taken for granted. If a child sees something he wants to touch, eat or take, then the child must be taught to ask permission first. Once they get something they want, they should be taught to say thank you.

4. Apologize when you make a mistake

Apart from asking for help and thanking them, children must know how to apologize properly. When children make mistakes, children must be taught to admit it honestly and apologize.

5. Don’t laugh at or insult others

Children may hear ridicule from their surroundings or from the TV programs or videos they watch, but find it acceptable. To avoid this, parents should make sure their child knows the basics not to tease, laugh at, or hurt others.

If they are allowed to make fun of others as a joke, even if the joke hurts the other person’s feelings, this behavior can eventually lead to bullying. Teach children that hurting other people’s feelings is not good and should be avoided.

6. Help others

Helping others is a basic habit that must be introduced to children from an early age. Teach children to care about the environment around them. It can foster empathy in children and make them grow into selfless individuals.

You can start by inviting your child to help with household chores, such as cleaning up his toys or lending his things to other people who need them.

Conclusion

That’s a brief discussion of the meaning of etiquette. Not only discussing the meaning of etiquette, but also further discussing the difference with ethics, characteristics, and examples of basic etiquette in everyday life.

Learning basic etiquette is a very important thing in social life because it teaches us various ways to behave and adapt to the situations and conditions we face in order to remain in accordance with local regulations.

Thus a review of how the meaning of etiquette and the difference with ethics. 

Definition of Erosion – Erosion comes from the Latin erosionem (meaning to gnaw) or also called erosion is an event that occurs naturally by the erosion of solids (sediment, soil, rock, and other particles) due to transportation by wind, soil and other materials under the influence gravity or by living things, such as animals that make burrows or the growth of plant roots that cause cracks in the soil, in this case it is called bio-erosion.

Erosion is not the same as weathering due to weather, which is the process of destroying rock minerals by chemical or physical processes or a combination of both. In general, erosion involves three processes, namely detachment , transformation , and sedimentation .

The erosion that occurs can form many interesting natural features such as mountain peaks, valleys and coastlines. Erosion is actually a natural process that is easy to recognize, but in most places it is exacerbated by human activities in poor land use, deforestation, mining activities, plantations and cultivation, construction or development activities that are not well managed, and road building.

Soil used to produce agricultural crops is usually subject to much greater erosion than soil with natural vegetation. The conversion of forests into agricultural fields increases erosion, because the strong root structures of forest plants that bind the soil are replaced with weaker root structures of agricultural crops.

Definition of Erosion

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), erosion is a condition of eroding the earth’s surface by forces that involve lifting objects such as flowing water, ice, wind, and waves or currents. Furthermore, based on the explanation at dpupkp.bantulkab.go.id , erosion or erosion is a process of moving rock mass from one place to another which is carried by transporters moving over the earth.

Quoting from the 2010–2014 National Disaster Management Plan owned by the National Disaster Management Agency (BNPB), it is stated that Indonesia has the potential to experience erosion due to changes in the shape of the soil or rocks. This occurs due to the forces of water, wind, ice, to the influence of heavy age or living organisms.

In general, soil erosion is a process or event of loss of the topsoil surface, either caused by the movement of water or wind. This erosion process can cause a decline in soil productivity, soil carrying capacity and environmental quality.

The surface of the earth’s crust will always experience a process of erosion, in one place erosion will occur while in another place landfill will occur, so that its shape will always change over time. This event occurs naturally and takes place very slowly, so that the consequences only appear after tens or even hundreds of years later.

Erosion is also the process of loss or erosion of soil or parts of land from one place that is transported by water or wind to another place. Eroded soil transported by runoff will be deposited in places where the flow of water slows down such as rivers, irrigation canals, reservoirs, lakes or river mouths. This has an impact on the shallowing of rivers, resulting in more frequent floods during the rainy season and droughts during the dry season.

Erosion is one of the processes in watersheds (DAS) that occurs as a result of land use that is not in accordance with land capabilities. Erosion is also one indication to determine the criticality of a watershed. The amount of erosion and sedimentation from year to year will increase if there is no control or prevention.

Factors Causing Erosion

The amount of erosion depends on various influencing factors including climate, vegetation, soil characteristics, land use, and topography. Climatic factors, including the amount and intensity of rain or precipitation, average and temperature ranges, as well as seasonality, wind speed, storm frequency. Geological factors including sediment type, rock type, porosity and permeability, land slope. Biological factors include the vegetation cover of the land, the creatures that live in the land and land use by humans.

Generally, with the same ecosystem and vegetation, areas with high rainfall, high frequency of rain, more frequent exposure to wind or storms are certainly more exposed to erosion. Sediments with a high content of sand or silt , located in areas with steep slopes, are more easily eroded, as are areas with weathered or broken rock.

Porosity and permeability of sediment or rock have an impact on the speed of erosion, related to whether or not water seeps into the soil easily. If water moves underground, less surface runoff is formed, reducing surface erosion. Sediments that contain a lot of clay tend to erode more easily than sand or silt. The impact of sodium in the atmosphere on the erodibility of the clay should also be considered.

The most variable factor is the amount and type of land cover. In untouched forests, soil minerals are protected by a layer of humus and organic layers. These two layers protect the soil by dampening the impact of raindrops. the layers along with the litter on the forest floor are porous and easily absorb rainwater.

Usually, only heavy rains (sometimes accompanied by hurricanes) will cause runoff on the ground surface in forests. If trees are removed by fire or logging, the degree of water infiltration is high and erosion is low. Severe fires can also cause marked increases in erosion when followed by heavy rains. In this case, construction activities or road construction, when the topsoil or topsoil is removed/compacted, the degree of susceptibility of the soil to erosion increases.

Roads, in particular, allow for an increased degree of erosion, because in addition to removing land cover, roads can significantly change drainage patterns, especially if an embankment is made to support the road. Roads that have lots of rocks and are hydrologically invisible (can catch water as quickly as possible from the road, by imitating natural drainage patterns) have a great chance of not causing increased erosion.

Determinants of Erosion Occurrence

In addition to the several main factors mentioned above, in the Journal of Civil and Environmental Engineering Vol. 3 No. 1 , also describes the four determinants of erosion. These factors include:

1. Topography

Topography or the elevation of the earth’s surface can also trigger erosion. Topography will cause differences in slopes. The slope and length of the slope are very influential on surface flow and erosion.

2. Soil

Soil is the next determining factor. Several things from soil conditions that can cause erosion include the soil’s resistance to damage caused by rainwater or surface activity and the ability of the soil to absorb water.

3. Vegetation

The determining factor for the last erosion is vegetation. The presence of vegetation on the surface of the earth will affect runoff and erosion. These influences include:

• Rain intercept done by crop crown processing.
• Vegetation that affects the speed of flow on the surface and the destructive power that comes from the water.
• Plant roots will affect biological activities related to plant growth and will affect soil fertility.
• Transpiration that occurs will make the soil drier.

4. Humans

Activities related to changes in factors that affect erosion, for example changes in land cover due to deforestation or clearing of forests for settlements, agricultural land, or
grazing. Changes in topography on a micro basis due to the application of terracing, loosening the soil by processing, and the use of stabilizers and fertilizers that affect soil structure.

The process of clearing land that is not controlled will have implications for increasing the risk of erosion. The main cause of erosion is land use that is not in accordance with its function and the level of sensitivity of the soil which is very sensitive to erosion. Land damage that occurs due to the high level of sensitivity of the soil to erosion as a result of human activities in managing land use that is not in accordance with conservation principles.

It is customary for the community to start farming in months with high rainfall, both for rice fields, cultivation and plantations. It can be observed that at the beginning of the growing season the vegetal cover area decreases , so that land without vegetation is vulnerable to erosion. The wider the farmer’s land, the greater the erosion caused.

Cultivation activities with the habit of burning the planting area repeatedly can damage the soil surface both for organic loss and soil erosion. Forest management activities such as logging, building roads, ditches and base camps must receive special attention in conserving forest resources. The same goes for other development sectors such as road network construction, mining, agriculture, transmigration, and settlements that deforest the land surface.

Erosion Examples

There are many types of erosion that occurs on the surface of the earth. There are several examples of erosion which are explained as follows.

1. Water Erosion or Ablation

The first example is water erosion. This erosion occurs due to the influence of river water and rain. High intensity and rainfall will further increase the chances of ablation. At least, there are four types of ablation that can occur.

• Splash erosion: caused by rainwater that falls into the ground and washes away the soil.
• Sheet erosion: occurs in soil on mountain slopes. The top layer of soil will be washed away with rainwater.
• Erosion of grooves: erosion of the soil that is already taking place and causes the formation of grooves which later become places for water to flow.
• Trench erosion: erosion that occurs when the groove that is formed has a depth of more than 0.3 meters.

2. Erosion Corrosion or Deflation

Deflation is erosion caused by wind. Usually occurs in desert areas. The wind in that place will cause the sand to move to another place constantly.

3. Abrasion

Abrasion is the erosion that occurs in coastal areas. The erosion occurs because of the destructive sea waves and ocean currents. According to BNPB in Indonesia’s Disaster Risk , it also explains that the abrasion process occurs when there is wind moving at sea which causes currents and waves towards the coast. If the incident lasts longer, it will cause a lot of erosion on the beach.

4. Excursion

This erosion is caused by the movement of melting ice. This melting causes the rocks to move downward and then precipitate. The results of this erosion are known as fjords . This occurrence is usually in the snowy mountains.

Erosion Impact

The impact of erosion is the depletion of the top layer of soil, which will reduce land capability (land degradation). Another consequence of erosion is the decreased ability of the soil to absorb water (infiltration). A decrease in the ability of land to absorb water into the soil layer will increase surface water runoff which will result in flooding in rivers.

In addition, soil particles that are transported by surface runoff will eventually settle in rivers (sedimentation) which in turn due to high sedimentation will cause siltation of rivers which will affect the smoothness of shipping lanes.

A certain amount of erosion is actually a natural occurrence and good for the ecosystem. For example, gravel periodically descends to lower elevations via water transport. However, excessive erosion, of course, can cause problems, for example in terms of sedimentation, ecosystem damage and simultaneous loss of water.

Erosion causes the loss of fertile and good soil layers for plant growth, as well as reduced soil ability to absorb and hold water. The transported soil will be carried into water sources (sediment) and will be deposited in places where the water flow slows down in rivers, reservoirs, lakes, reservoirs, irrigation canals, above agriculture and so on.

Thus, the damage caused by erosion occurs in two places, namely in the soil where erosion occurs, and in the final destination where the transported soil is deposited.

How to Prevent Erosion

The phenomenon of erosion in the top layer of the earth’s surface can actually be prevented in various ways. Quoting from Pusatkritis.kemkes.go.id , there are several ways to prevent erosion. Here’s an explanation.

1. Soil Conservation

The first way that can be done is to do soil conservation. This effort is made to prevent and inhibit soil erosion. Selection of the right vegetation is the key to the success of conservation efforts. Make sure to use vegetation that has the ability to withstand various stress conditions.

2. Terraces

We may already be familiar with the terracing system which is usually found on agricultural land in the highlands. This terracing actually has a very important role, especially in keeping rainwater from flowing down and causing erosion. With terraced land, the soil will be more stable and the plants will also grow better.

3. Counter Farming

The next effort to prevent soil erosion is by contour farming or planting based on contour lines. This method of cultivating crops will make the roots of the plants stronger, so they can hold the soil so that it doesn’t erode easily during heavy rains.

4. Reforestation

The next preventive measure that can be taken is reforestation or replanting of deforested forests. This method is very important to do because trees in the forest are oxygen producers as well as water retainers. With a forest ecosystem that is maintained, other natural disasters such as floods can also be prevented.

Definition of Equilibrium – The theory of consumer behavior in economic studies states that consumers always want the maximum level of satisfaction which is illustrated by an indifference curve. Consumers in a conventional economy assume a utility maximization assumption ( always aiming to obtain satisfaction in their consumption activities ).

Satisfaction is only limited by budget line , because in conventional economics economic motives are based on wants). It is the meeting between the budget line and the indifference curve (desire) that produces maximum satisfaction and is said to be the equilibrium point (Reksoprayitno, 2007: 180).

Abdurrazaq Nawfal once wrote a book entitled al -I’jaz al-Adabiy li al-Qur’an al-Karim . One of the discussions contains four forms of balance and harmony in the number of words in the Qur’an , one of which is the balance between the number of words and their antonyms. For example, the words al-hayah (to live) and al-mawt (to die) both add up to 145 times.

The words al-naf’ (benefits) and al-madharah both have 50. Furthermore, the words al-har (hot) and al-bard (cold) are mentioned four times. Likewise the words as-shalihat (goodness) and as-sayyiat (ugliness) is mentioned 167 times respectively. The words al-kufr (infidel) and al-iman (infinite form) is mentioned eight times (Shihab, 1992: 29 30).

The compatibility of the number of words above to a certain degree is proof of the authenticity of the Qur’an. But more than that, the harmony of the words used in the Qur’an actually provides a valuable lesson for humans that life requires balance. Balance in essence is part of sunnatullah . If the balance is not maintained , what will happen is the destruction of nature and humanity itself .

Referring to the whole concept in the Qur’an , there are three equiliubirium (balance) that humans must do, namely a balance between the life of this world and the hereafter, a balance between physical and spiritual needs , and a balance between individual and social interests.

Definition of Consumer Equilibrium

Conventional economic studies cannot forget the thoughts of Adam Smith in discussing consumer equilibrium . Smith has studied it since it was still a shadowy concept in the context of the division of labor . According to Smith: ” The general industry of the society can never exceed what the capital of the society employs “. This is due to: ” Every individual is continuously exerting himself to find out the most advantegous employment for whatever capital he can command “.

Smith in the next paragraph says: ” But the annual revenue of every society is always equal to the exchangeable value of the whole annual produce of its industry, or rather is precisely the same thing with that exchangeable value “.

Based on the explanation in the Collins Dictionary of Economics , equilibrium is explained as a state of balance with no tendency to change , while the definition is according to the Microsoft Bookshelf Dictionary (2000), namely:

• A condition in which all acting influences are canceled by others, resulting in a stable, balanced, or unchanging system ;
• Mental or emotional balance; Poise ;
• Physics . The state of a body or physical system at rest or in unaccelerated motion in which the resultant of all forces acting on it is zero and the sum of all torques about any axis is zero;
• Chemistry. The state of a chemical reaction in which its forward and reverse reactions occur at equal rates so that the concentration of the reactants and products does not change with time.

The word equilibrium is actually adopted from the Latin ” aequilībrium ” which starts with aequi which connotes equi , and lībra which means balanced ( balance ), stable, not moving, and or not changing. As according to the Collins Dictionary of Economics , equilibrium is understood as a state of balance with no tendency to change .

The word equilibrium in Indonesian is usually translated as balance or equilibrium and in Arabic it is known as tawazzun. Equilibrium concept (equilibrium ) according to mathematical economics refers to a point of intersection (or point of intersection) of the confluence of two opposing countervailing forces , for example between the demand curve vis-à-vis the supply curve, between the indifference curve vis- à-vis the budget line, between the demand curve marginal cost vis-à-vis the marginal revenue line , etc.

The point of intersection or tangency of the two curves seems to have become a magical point , which dictates the two countervailing forces to compromise to an outcome , which is called a certain equilibrium point . Consumers are parties who use consumption goods and services .

Consumer behavior can be divided into three stages, namely:

• Consumer preference, which is a first step that explains the reasons for how someone chooses a certain item over other types of goods;
• Budget line, namely consumer considerations regarding price factors and decisions according to the income they have. Merging consumer preferences with the budget line will determine the steps to be taken by the consumer;
• Consumer choices, namely the steps taken by consumers after knowing their preferences and income , they choose a combination of goods that can maximize their needs ( Pyndick and Rubinfield, 2002: 62) .

There are four known principles to assess the reasons consumers choose an item, namely:

1. Completeness ( Completeness ) _

This principle says that each individual can always determine the state he likes when he is faced with two situations. For example, if consumers are faced with two products A and B, the choices that occur are A is preferred over B , B is preferred over A, A and B are both preferred, or A and B are both disliked. This preference ignores the cost factor to get it.

2. Transitivity _( Transitivity )

This principle explains consumer consistency in deciding or determining alternative choices for several products. For example, a consumer says that item A is preferred over item B, item B is preferred over item C, of ​​course the consumer will say that item A is preferred over item C.

3. Continuity ( Continuity )

This principle explains that if a consumer says that item A is preferable to item B, any situation that is close to item A is preferable to item B. This shows the consistency of the consumer in choosing an item that he will later consume.

4. T he More is the Better ( More is Better )

This principle explains that if a consumer consumes more goods, the consumer’s satisfaction will increase. This can be explained through an increasing indifference curve that will provide better satisfaction, so that consumers will continue to increase their consumption in order to achieve maximum satisfaction , even though they are experiencing a budget constraint . ) (Karim, 2007: 64 – 65) .

Consumer Equilibrium in Islamic Perspective (Surah Al-Furqan Verse 67)

The unity approach approach initiated by Anas Zarqa’ seems relevant enough to understand Surah Al-Furqan verse 67 from an economic perspective. According to the study of the Ulumul Qur’an , this verse is included in the group of makkiyah verses . Etymologically, al-Furqan comes from Arabic, which means a distinction taken from the beginning of this letter. The word al-Furqan here refers to the book of the Qur’an itself. It is named so because the Qur’an is the difference between right and wrong, between right and wrong.

The main contents of this letter are talking about faith, laws, stories , and topics about natural events as proof of the oneness of Allah SWT. After the previous verses talk about the relationship between Allah SWT and creatures and how to be an ideal servant, then the human nature of property and ethics that should be held by a Muslim are described.

This verse is also an indication that there is no prohibition for a Muslim to have wealth. One should be able to control wealth, not wealth that controls people. In full, Surah Al-Furqan verse 67 reads as follows.

” And those who spend (wealth), they are not excessive, and not (also) stingy, and are (spending) in the middle between these ” (QS Al-Furqan: 67).

Judging from the paragraph above, there are important keywords to be used as a basis for building a theory of consumer equilibrium , including:

1. Infection

According to ath-Thabathabai, the word infak terminologically means “to issue wealth and spend it to meet the needs of oneself and others” (Ath-Thabathabai, tt: 239). Unlike what we often understand, the term infaq is always associated with a kind of contribution or donation. This term in the Qur’an is still very common. Spending for good, donations, or something that is for oneself, even consumptive desires and needs, are all included in the term infaq.

2. Israel

The word infak is the noun form of asrafa-yusrifu which means al- khuruj ‘an al-had (out of bounds). Israf in relation to infak is interpreted as an attitude of going beyond what is supposed to be in using wealth (Ath-Thabathabai, tt: 239). The word israf in the Qur’an is mentioned 23 times in different contexts, such as excessive actions related to food and drink, excessive self-esteem, charity, and war and power.

3. Qatr

The word qatr is the noun form of qatara-yaqturu which means “to be too frugal in spending wealth (Ath-Thabathabai, tt: 239). This word is the opposite of the word israf which can also mean giving less than what can be given according to the circumstances of the giver and recipient (Shihab, 2002: 533). This word is also equivalent to the word bukhl or bakhil in Indonesian. More broadly, these two words can mean withholding from obtaining or removing from what is reasonable and sufficient.

4. Qawam

This word in the verse tarkib is tanshish in the sentence “if they spend their wealth not excessively and not stingy”. The meaning of the word is ifrath wa tafrith (prohibition of transgression ), namely excessive and miserly. This attitude is called tawassuth ( middle) or ‘adl (fair) (Ath- Thabathabai, tt: 239).

—–

This is an explanation of the meaning and meaning of equilibrium that you need to understand. 

 

Definition of executive – Readers must have heard of executive. The word executive itself is related to government and also positions. The executive is a government agency created by the state to carry out various state functions.

Executives can also be interpreted as people who hold the highest position or have the highest authority in a company.

In simple terms, the executive can also be referred to as government. In addition, the figure who is said to be an executive is a figure who is considered the most important in an organizational system. As an example in the state structure, the executive branch is the institution with the highest position.

Likewise in a company, the executive is the highest authority who will make decisions in a company.

So that Readers understands more about what an executive is, both in government and in the position structure, let’s see this article until it’s finished! The following will explain the meaning of the executive in government, the meaning of the executive in office, and its supporting elements.

Definition of Executive Agency in Government

The executive branch is one of the three state agencies in the Indonesian government system.

State institutions themselves are government institutions created by the state, originating from the state, and intended for the state. State institutions are government organizations that will carry out state functions.

The executive branch is an institution that is given the power to implement laws. The executive branch is a government agency that has the power and responsibility to enforce the law.

The executive branch is tasked with administering government affairs, implementing laws, and maintaining security and order.

At this time, the position of the executive branch is held by the president as the head of government. In the Law of State Institutions in a democratic country, the executive branch is briefly defined as the power held by the president or king along with his ministers. In a broader sense, those included in the executive branch as well, namely the military and civil servants.

Therefore, in simple terms, the executive branch can be called the government. In carrying out its duties, the executive branch side by side with the legislature and the judiciary. The duties of this executive branch apply both domestically and abroad.

Authority and Duties of the Executive Agency 

Based on the explanation of the meaning of the executive branch that has been written above, the task of this institution is to implement laws, regulations and policies, which have been made by the legislature. In addition to these duties, there are powers and duties of other executive institutions, namely:

1. Organizing state administration.
2. Drafting or dispensing laws, then guiding them to the People’s Representative Council until they become laws.
3. Organize the police and other security forces, organize war, organize national defense and internal security.
4. Appoint representatives of the State of Indonesia such as ambassadors or consuls for other cooperating countries. The Indonesian Ambassador will be stationed in the capital city of the country, and the consul is an agency under the Indonesian Embassy in another country.
5. Make agreements with other countries with the approval of representatives of the people and carry out cooperation.
6. Giving a title sign, service mark, or other mark of honor to Indonesian citizens or foreign countries who have services for the Indonesian state.
7. Receiving and welcoming ambassadors from other countries who come to Indonesia.

Executive Agency System

After getting to know the meaning, authority, and duties of the executive branch, we will then get to know how the system of the executive branch is. The executive body system is generally divided into two, namely:

1. Parliamentary Government System

In this system, the head of state and head of government are separate. The head of state is led by the president, while the head of government is led by the prime minister. However, the head of state only functions as a symbol of a sovereign state.

2. Presidential Government System

The head of government and the head of state are both held by the president in this one system.

Executive Board Structure

As an institution, of course there is an arrangement within the organization. The following is the composition of the executive branch in Indonesia.

1. President

The president is the highest government administrator who holds government power based on the Constitution. The executive body system or government system in Indonesia is a presidential system. The President of the Republic of Indonesia has a special position, namely as head of state and also head of government.

2. Vice President

In carrying out his duties and obligations, the president will be assisted by the vice president. Therefore, the president and vice president are in one institution, namely the presidential institution.

3. Ministry of State

State ministries are government tools that deal with certain areas of government.

4. Minister-level officials

Minister-level officials are officials whose position is under the president and are directly responsible to the president.

5. Non-Ministerial Government Institutions

Non-Ministry Government Institutions are central government institutions created specifically to carry out certain governmental tasks from the president.

Definition of Executive Agency in Corporate Structure

Executive is defined as a person who holds the most important position or has the highest authority in a company. An executive has the highest authority and power to manage the company’s operations. Executives have enormous influence on the companies they lead, so these executives will play a very important role in being able to manage their subordinates.

The executive determines the direction of the company, so the executive must make the right decisions and policies within the company. Every human being has a different character. It’s the same as every executive who has a different character in leading his company.

Based on Low’s (2006) explanation, the executive leaders of a company have two characters in carrying out their duties, namely risk takers and risk averse. Risk taker is one of the executive characters who dare to take risks. Conversely, risk averse is an executive character who lacks the courage to take risks. The character of an executive who is a risk taker will dare to do anything in order to get the maximum profit.

Risk takers will be braver to take risks even though the risks taken can be said to be large. On the contrary, executives who have a risk averse character tend to dislike big risks. He will tend to avoid risks and definitely prefer smaller risks (Evianisa, 2014).

Every company must have a leader who occupies the highest position, which is usually referred to as top manager or top executive. These top executives must have certain characteristics to lead and manage the company’s business activities in an effort to achieve the goals to be achieved by the company. The character of an executive will greatly determine how the company works or the system.

This is because, everything that is done by the company must have a risk, whether it is small or big. According to Budiman and Setiyono (2012), the types of characters of individuals or executives who serve in company management, whether they are risk taking or risk averse, can be seen in the size of the company’s risk or existing corporate risk.

Executive Character Indicator

Company risk is one part of the executive character indicator. Company risk or corporate risk is the volatility of the company’s earnings, which can be measured by the standard deviation formula. So that company risk or corporate risk can also be interpreted as a deviation or standard deviation from earnings. Either the deviation is more than planned (upside potential) or less than planned (downside risk).

The greater the deviation of the company’s earnings indicates that the greater the company’s risk. According to Paligorova (2010), to determine the character of an executive, the company’s risk or corporate risk is also used. The size of the company’s risk will reflect the tendency of the executive character (Ni Nyoman Kristiana Dewi and I Ketut Jati, 2014).

So, that’s Readers’ understanding of the executive in the field of government and positions, along with the tasks, system, structure, characteristics, and determining indicators. 

Definition of Epilepsy-  As is known to the general public, epilepsy is a condition in which a person experiences seizures in certain parts of the body due to a disturbance in the nervous system of the brain. Usually people with epilepsy are not aware of what they are doing when the disease recurs. This epileptic condition can occur due to central nervous system (neurological) disorders which cause sufferers to experience seizures or even worse until they faint.

In general, a person cannot be said to have epilepsy if they have not had two or more seizures within 24 hours for no apparent reason. However, patients with epilepsy may have seizures more than once, i.e. repeated at the same time or at different times.

In fact, in some cases, epilepsy can cause seizures during sleep. This is most likely caused by a change in body phase from waking to sleeping which triggers abnormal activity in the brain.

So for that, Readers who want to know about the meaning of epilepsy or also known as epilepsy, in this discussion we will try to provide detailed information regarding epilepsy for all of Readers’ friends.

Further discussion of epilepsy can be seen below!

Definition of Epilepsy

Epilepsy (derived from the Ancient Greek verb ἐπιλαμβάνειν , meaning “to pass over, to possess or to torment”) is a group of long-term neurological diseases characterized by seizures. These seizures can vary in episodes from brief, barely noticeable seizures to severe tremors that last a long time. In epilepsy, seizures are usually recurrent and have no underlying direct cause, whereas seizures with a specific cause are not considered to represent epilepsy. In Indonesian, the term “epilepsy” is used for various cases of epilepsy.

In most cases, the cause is unknown, although some people develop epilepsy due to brain injury, stroke, brain tumors, and drug and alcohol abuse. Epileptic seizures are the result of excessive and abnormal neuronal activity in the cortex. Diagnosis usually involves ruling out other disorders causing similar symptoms (eg fainting) and determining the proximate cause. Epilepsy can often be confirmed by electroencephalography (EEG).

There is no cure for epilepsy, but in about 70 percent of cases, seizures can be controlled with medication. For those whose seizures do not respond to medication, surgery, nerve stimulation, or dietary changes may be considered. Not all epilepsy symptoms last a lifetime, and many people experience improvement to the point where treatment is no longer needed. Epilepsy, like tuberculosis, must be fully treated, even if it appears healthy. For epilepsy, treatment was stopped one year after the last seizure.

About 1% of the world’s population (65 million) suffer from epilepsy and nearly 80% of cases occur in developing countries. Epilepsy becomes more common with age. In developed countries, early symptoms of new cases are most common in children and the elderly; In developing countries, it occurs most often in older children and young adults because of the prevalence of underlying causes. About 5 to 10% of people have unprovoked seizures before the age of 80, and there is a 40 to 50% chance of having another seizure. In many parts of the world, people with epilepsy are not allowed to drive or drive at all, but most of them are able to drive again after an epilepsy-free period.

Epilepsy Symptoms

Epilepsy is characterized by a long-term risk of recurrent seizures. These seizures can occur in different ways, depending on which part of the brain is affected and the patient’s age. Here are some symptoms of epilepsy that you need to know:

1. Seizures

The most common form of epileptic seizures (60%) are seizures/shakes. Of these seizures, two-thirds start with partial seizures (which can later become generalized seizures) and one-third with generalized seizures. The remaining 40% of other types of seizures are non-convulsive. An example of this type is absence seizures, which represent a reduced level of consciousness and usually last about 10 seconds.

Focal epileptic seizures are often preceded by a special experience known as an aura.

Sensory (sight, hearing, and smell), psychic, autonomic, or motor phenomena. Seizures can start in one muscle group and spread to surrounding muscle groups, which is known as a Jacksonian epileptic seizure. Automation can occur. These are involuntary movements, usually simple repetitive movements such as smacking your lips or more complex movements such as trying to pick something up.

About 6% of people with epilepsy have seizures, often triggered by certain events, known as reflex seizures. People with reflex epilepsy have seizures that are only triggered by certain stimuli. Common triggers are lightning and sudden noises. In some types of epilepsy, seizures occur more frequently during sleep, and in other types of epilepsy, they occur almost exclusively during sleep.

2. Postictal

After an active seizure, there is usually a period of confusion called the postictal period before the level of consciousness returns to normal. This usually takes 3-15 minutes, but can take hours.

Other common symptoms are: Fatigue, headaches, difficulty speaking and abnormal behavior. Post-attack psychosis is quite common, occurring in 6-10 percent of sufferers. Patients often do not remember what happened during this period. Localized weakness, known as Todd’s palsy, can also occur after a focal epileptic seizure. When it does, it usually lasts a few seconds to a few minutes but rarely a day or two.

3. Psychosocial

Epilepsy can affect a person’s social and psychological well-being. These effects may include social isolation, stigma or disability. This effect can lead to lower school performance and fewer job opportunities. Learning disabilities are common in patients with epilepsy, and especially in children with epilepsy. The stigma of epilepsy can also affect affected families.

Certain disorders are more common in people with epilepsy, depending in part on the symptoms of epilepsy. These may include: depression, anxiety disorders and migraines. Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) affects children with epilepsy three to five times more frequently than the general population. Both ADHD and epilepsy have serious consequences for a child’s behavior, learning abilities, and social development. Epilepsy is also more common in autistic people

Epilepsy is caused by abnormal brain activity that can affect all processes controlled by your brain. In many cases, the symptoms of epilepsy appear spontaneously and for a short time.

In short, here are some of the symptoms of epilepsy that can be identified:

• Temporary confusion.
• Empty (dark) eyes stare too long at one place. Uncontrollable jerking movements of the arms and legs.
• Total or temporary loss of consciousness.
• Mental symptoms.
• muscle stiffness.
• Tremor (shaking) or spasms in one part of the body (face, arms, legs) or throughout the body. Seizures, followed by sudden rigidity and loss of consciousness, which can cause the person to fall suddenly.

Types of Epilepsy

Recurrent seizures are the main symptom of epilepsy. The severity of seizures varies, depending on which part of the brain is first affected and how far the disease has spread. Types of seizures are divided into two based on brain disease, namely:

1. Partial Epilepsy

Seizures are caused by abnormal electrical activity in the brain. Partial seizures are seizures that only affect one area of ​​the brain.

Partial epilepsy, also called focal seizures, is common in adults with epilepsy. The type of seizure that occurs depends on which part of the brain is affected.

Symptoms can be in the form of motor movements or felt through the five senses. Partial seizures usually affect one part of the body or only one side of the body. However, these seizures can sometimes become generalized seizures.

In partial or focal seizures, only part of the brain is affected. Partial seizures are divided into two categories, namely:

• Simple partial seizures, namely seizures in which the subject does not lose consciousness. Symptoms may include twitching or tingling in the limbs, dizziness and flashing lights. The part of the body that experiences seizures depends on which part of the brain is affected. For example, if epilepsy affects the brain that controls the movement of the arms or legs, only those two limbs will have seizures. Partial seizures can also cause sufferers to experience emotional changes, such as: Sudden excitement or fear.
• Complex partial seizures. Sometimes focal seizures impair a patient’s consciousness, causing them to appear temporarily confused or semi-conscious. These are called complex partial seizures. Other features of complex partial seizures include staring blankly, swallowing, chewing, or rubbing hands.

2. General Epilepsy

In generalized or generalized seizures, the symptoms occur throughout the body and are caused by abnormalities that attack all parts of the brain. The following symptoms may occur when a person has a generalized seizure:

• Eyes that open during seizures.
• Tonic seizures. The body tensed for a few seconds. It may or may not be accompanied by rhythmic movements of the arms and legs. The muscles of the body, especially the arms, legs and back started to shake. Atonic seizures, where the muscles in the body suddenly relax, allowing the person to fall uncontrollably.
• Clonic seizures, which are rhythmic convulsive movements that usually involve the muscles of the neck, face and arms.
• Sometimes people with epilepsy make noise or scream during a seizure.
• sleeping time
• Shortness of breath for a few moments, making the body look pale and even blue. In some cases, a generalized seizure leaves the patient completely unconscious. Upon awakening, the patient may appear confused for several minutes or hours.

There is a type of epilepsy that is common in children and is known as absence or petit mal. Although this condition is not dangerous, academic performance and concentration can be disrupted. This type of epilepsy is characterized by loss of consciousness for a few seconds, blinking or lip movement, and blank stares. Children with these seizures may not be aware of or remember what happened during their seizure.

Factors Causing Epilepsy

In many cases, the cause of epilepsy is unknown. However, here are some factors that affect the brain and may be a cause of epilepsy, including:

• Genetic influence. Several types of epilepsy, classified according to the type of epilepsy or the part of the brain affected, run in families.
• Head injuries Head injuries from car accidents, falls, or other traumatic injuries can also cause epilepsy. brain health Brain damage, such as a brain tumor or stroke, can cause epilepsy. Stroke is the leading cause of epilepsy in adults over the age of 35.
• Infectious diseases Infectious diseases such as meningitis, HIV/AIDS and viral encephalitis can cause epilepsy.
• Prenatal Injuries. Epilepsy in children is usually triggered by various disorders during pregnancy. Before birth, babies are prone to brain damage which can be caused by several factors, including maternal infection, poor diet, or lack of oxygen
• Developmental disorders. Epilepsy can sometimes be associated with developmental disorders such as autism and neurofibromatosis.

Epilepsy Risk Factors

Although the exact cause is unknown, researchers have identified several factors that increase the risk of epilepsy. The following risk factors for epilepsy are:

• Age Children and the elderly have more cases of epilepsy than working age adults. However, this disease can also occur in all age groups who have a high risk of developing epilepsy.
• Genetics. Genes can cause epilepsy in most people. So if you have a family history of epilepsy, you have a higher risk of developing this disease.
• Head injuries Head injuries from car accidents, falls or other traumatic injuries play a role in the development of epilepsy.
• Stroke and vascular disease. Strokes and other blood vessel diseases can cause brain damage that can trigger this condition.
• dementia Dementia can increase the risk of epilepsy in the elderly.
• Encephalitis Infections, such as meningitis, that cause inflammation in the brain or spinal cord can increase your risk of developing this condition. History of childhood seizures. High fever can be a cause of epilepsy in children. Although not all, children with neurological disorders and a family history of epilepsy are usually more susceptible to this condition.

Diagnosis of Epilepsy

In addition to reviewing your symptoms and medical history, your doctor may perform several tests to diagnose your condition. Some of the diagnostic tests for epilepsy include:

• The neurological examination examines the patient’s brain function, motor skills, and behavior.
• Blood tests to rule out other health problems that can cause seizures.
• An electroencephalogram (EEG) is a common epilepsy test that looks for abnormal brain waves.
• Computed tomography (CT), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), functional MR imaging (fMRI) and positron emission tomography (PET) and single photon emission computed tomography (SPECT) for imaging studies of the brain.

Conclusion

So a brief discussion about the meaning of what epilepsy is. Not only understanding the meaning of epilepsy, but further discussing the symptoms, types, causes and ways to find out whether someone has epilepsy based on these factors.

Knowing what epilepsy is is very useful for someone to understand the various possibilities and causal factors that cause someone to experience epilepsy. Because by understanding it well, we can be able to help provide first aid to people with epilepsy if one day they experience a relapse of their epilepsy.

 

Definition of enzymes – In the human body there is a reaction to break down food substances to produce energy in the form of ATP. This reaction is one of several chemical reactions that occur in the bodies of living things. As in the plant body, a chemical reaction called photosynthesis also occurs. Thus, all the chemical reactions that occur in the bodies of living things are called metabolism.

The chemical reactions in metabolism occur very quickly. Enzymes as components that play a very important role in the reactions that exist. Does Readers know about enzymes? So, if you don’t know, then you can refer to this article, Readers.

So, what are you waiting for? Let’s see!

Definition of Enzyme

Enzymes are biomolecules that function as catalysts in a chemical reaction. In this case, the catalyst is a compound that speeds up the reaction process without being completely reacted. If this substance is not there, it can inhibit the activity that occurs in the organs of the body. In addition, enzymes are referred to as biocatalysts which have a role in accelerating biological reactions without any changes in chemical structure.

In this reaction, the substrate as the initial reaction molecule and the enzyme that converts these molecules into different molecules, this is called the product. In general, all biological processes require enzymes to operate quickly.

According to Kuhne (1878), the word enzyme comes from in and zyme which means something in the yeast. Based on the studies that have been investigated, enzymes are proteins in the form of large molecules. In the enzyme there is a protein part that is not heat resistant, which is called an apoenzyme , while the non-protein part is the active part and is given a prosthetic group, usually in the form of a metal such as iron, copper, zinc or an organic compound containing metal.

The apoenzyme and the prosthetic group form a unit called the holoenzyme , but there are also parts of the enzyme where the apoenzyme and the prosthetic group do not unite. The part of the prosthetic group that is lost we call a coenzyme, which is active like a prosthetic group. Examples of coenzymes are vitamins or their parts, such as vitamins B2, B1, B6, niacin and biotin.

Enzyme Structure

Enzymes consist of two components, namely the pro part (apoenzyme) and not the protein part (prosthetic group). This apoenzyme is made up of protein and can easily change. These changes can occur depending on pH and temperature.

Meanwhile, the prosthetic group can be said to be a group that is no longer active. In this substance, contained various kinds of metal elements, namely magnesium, sodium, iron, and manganese. However, in this prosthetic there are also organic materials that do not include protein. For example, B vitamins.

Enzymes Inside the Cell

A living cell can be likened to an energy-dependent chemical factory that must follow various chemical conventions. Meanwhile, a chemical reaction that makes life possible is also known as metabolism. There are continuous reactions going on inside every cell, so metabolism is an amazing reaction. Metabolic trajectories must be carefully regulated so that cells can function and develop properly.

Cells can regulate which metabolic pathways run and how fast by producing the right catalysts called enzymes in the right amount and when needed. Almost all chemical reactions take place very slowly without a catalyst and enzymes are more specific and stronger catalysts than metal ions or other inorganic compounds, which can be absorbed by plants and soil. Thus, enzymes generally increase reaction rates by a factor of between 18Y TO 1020. Compared to man-made catalysts, enzymes are usually 10K to 10c times more effective.

Enzymes are also much more specific than inorganic catalysts or even synthetic organic catalysts in terms of the variety of reactions they can catalyze, so that reactions can be controlled by the formation of certain compounds needed for compounds in life.

The catalyst has a function to accelerate the reaction that can be used repeatedly. For example, one catalyst can make as many as 2 to 3 reactions.

Inside the cell, enzymes are evenly distributed throughout the plasma, but are concentrated in the organelles where the reactions occur. For example, the enzymes involved in the Calvin and Krebs reactions assemble in mitochondria and chloroplasts. Enzymes needed in the synthesis of DNA and RNA as well as for the deepest mitosis process in the cell nucleus.

The enzymes in the cell will work continuously. That is, the product of a reaction step will be released at a place where this product can be immediately converted by another enzyme next. There are some enzymes that are found outside the organelles, but they are also not dispersed due to the branched endoplasmic reticulum.

Knowing more about enzymes can be through the book Enzymes and Their Use. In this book, readers can find out the benefits of enzymes not only for themselves, but also for the benefits of enzymes for industry. In addition, through this book, it will be easier for you to understand the characteristics of enzymes. Get this book immediately, by clicking the “Buy Now” button.

 

Properties of Enzymes

In addition to discussing the meaning and structure of enzymes, at this point, we will discuss the properties of enzymes.

• Enzymes are active in very small amounts

It only requires a small amount of the enzyme to change in a chemical reaction.

• With stable conditions, the enzyme will not be affected by the existing reaction

This can happen because the nature of protein and enzyme activity is affected by pH and temperature. Under conditions that are considered not optimum, an enzyme is a relatively unstable compound and is affected by the reaction it catalyzes.

• Enzymes do not affect the balance of reactions

Although enzymes speed up the completion of a reaction, they do not affect the balance of the reaction. If the speed is high, then an enzyme will have reciprocity in the living system that takes place.

• Specific enzyme catalytic action

Enzymes exhibit specificity for the reactions they catalyze. So, in an enzyme that catalyzes a reaction, the enzyme does not catalyze other enzymes.

• Enzymes are composed of proteins

Enzyme forming substances or constituents are proteins. However, not all types of protein are enzymes.

• Enzymes are biocatalysts

Enzymes are biocatalysts, which means that enzymes can only change the rate of reaction by lowering their energy.

• Enzymes can be used repeatedly / reusable

As long as the enzyme is not damaged, the enzyme can be used repeatedly because it does not react.

• Enzymes do not turn into products

Even though enzymes work to convert substrates into products, enzymes don’t turn into products either, yes, Readers.

• Enzyme work is alternating or reversible

An enzyme can carry out a two-way reaction, namely the substrate becomes a product or the product becomes a substrate.

• Enzymes are colloids

Enzymes are composed of protein components. Therefore, the nature of the enzyme is classified as a colloid. Enzyme activity tends to be large because it has a large surface area between particles.

• Does not determine the direction of the reaction

Enzymes do not have a role to step in the direction of the reaction. For example, a body that lacks glucose will be able to break down reserve sugar or glycogen and vice versa.

As previously explained, this enzyme is composed of protein. Therefore, through the book Proteins & Enzymes , readers will find it easier to understand the relationship between proteins and enzymes. This book, which is written in simple language, is perfect for students who are studying proteins and enzymes to read.

Enzyme Classification

The following is a classification of enzymes that you need to know.

Hydrolase 

Hydrolases are enzymes that can decompose a substance with the help of water. Hydrolase itself is still divided into several parts based on the substrate, including:

• Carbohydrase

Carbohydrase is an enzyme that removes carbohydrates. This group is further broken down according to the carbohydrates described, for example:

1. Amylase, which is an enzyme that breaks down starch (a polysaccharide) into maltose 9, a disaccharide.
2. Maltase, is an enzyme that processes maltose into glucose.
3. Sucrase, is an enzyme that converts sucrose (cane sugar) into glucose and fructose.
4. Lactase is an enzyme that can convert lactose into glucose and galactose.
5. Cellulase, is an enzyme that processes cellulose (a polysaccharide) into cellobiose (a disaccharide).
6. Pectinase, which is an enzyme that breaks down pectin into pectin acid.

• Esterase

Esterases are enzymes that break down ester groups. Examples:

1. Lipase, is an enzyme that breaks down fat into glycerol and fatty acids.
2. Phosphatase, is an enzyme that processes an ester to release phosphoric acid.

• Proteinases or proteases

Proteinases or proteases are enzymes that break down proteins. Examples:

1. Peptidase, is an enzyme that processes peptides into amino acids.
2. Gelatinase is an enzyme that breaks down gelatin.
3. Renin is an enzyme that breaks down casein from milk.

Oxidases and Reductases

Oxidases and reductases are enzymes that help in the processes of oxidation and reduction. Oxidase enzymes are further divided into:

• Dehydrogenase, namely this enzyme, plays an important role in converting organic substances into oxidation products.
• Catalase is an enzyme that can decompose hydrogen peroxide into oxygen and water.

Desmolase 

Desmolases are enzymes that break down CC, CN and several other bonds. Desmolase enzymes are further divided into:

• Carboxylase is an enzyme that breaks down pyruvic acid into acetaldehyde.
• Transaminase is an enzyme that transfers an amino group from an amino acid to an organic acid so that the latter is converted into an amino acid.

Factors Affecting Enzyme Work

Factors that affect the work of enzymes include temperature, degree of acidity (pH), concentration of enzymes and substrates, cofactors and inhibitors. Each enzyme requires a different optimum temperature and pH (acidity level) because enzymes are proteins that can undergo changes if the shape of the temperature and acidity changes. Enzyme work is also influenced by other molecules. Inhibitors are molecules that minimize enzyme activity, while for activators molecules that increase enzyme activity. The following are factors that can affect the performance of enzymes.

Temperature or temperature

Enzymes are composed of proteins, very sensitive to temperature. If the temperature is too high, it can cause protein denaturation. Too low a temperature can inhibit the reaction. In general, the optimum temperature of the enzyme is 30-400C. Most enzymes do not show a reaction if the temperature drops to 0c, but the enzymes are not damaged, if the temperature is normal, the enzymes will be active again. Enzymes can withstand low temperatures, but if temperatures above 500 c will be damaged.

Concentration of enzymes and substrates

In order for the reaction to run optimally, the ratio of the amount between the enzyme and the substrate must be appropriate. If there are too few enzymes and too many substrates, the reaction will be slow, and there may even be substrates that are not catalyzed. The reaction will be fast if there are more enzymes.

Activating substances 

Certain chemicals can increase enzymes. For example, salts and also alkali metals with a dilute concentration of 2 percent to 5 percent, so that they can control the work of enzymes. As for other activating substances, such as Mn, Mg, Co, ions, and so on.

Enzyme inhibitors

Some chemicals can inhibit the performance of enzymes. For example, salt containing mercury and cyanide. There are three types of inhibitors that Readers needs to understand. The following include:

• competitive inhibitor 

In inhibitor inhibition, each inhibiting substance has a structure that is almost the same as the substrate structure. Therefore, the inhibitor substance will have the potential to the active site of the enzyme. If the inhibitor first binds to the active site of the enzyme, then the substrate can no longer bind to the active site of the enzyme.

• Non competitive inhibitor

In this inhibition, the substrate is no longer able to bind to the inhibitor enzyme complex, because the active site of the enzyme changes. So the enzyme will lose its activity. Therefore, the surface of the active site cannot be in contact with the substrate.

• Feedback inhibitors

A reaction that can inhibit an enzyme working process in the reaction.

From all the discussion above, it can be said that this enzyme is needed by the body. In addition, there are also several factors that will affect the work of the enzyme itself.

Well, that’s the meaning, structure, properties and factors that affect enzymes, yes, Readers. It turns out that enzymes have an important role in the survival of living things. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful and can add to your insight.

 

Definition of Entrepreneurship – The term entrepreneurship is also known in Indonesian as entrepreneurship. In addition, the notion of entrepreneurship is also known as a term that has a meaning related to courage, creativity and innovation.

In general, entrepreneurship is also a process of applying innovation and creativity in creating something different that also has value and ability to face life’s challenges by seeing opportunities from various risks and uncertainties in order to achieve profit and growth.

To find out more clearly about entrepreneurship, then you can see this article, Readers. In this article, we will discuss entrepreneurship, starting from its meaning, goals, and benefits. So, read this article to the end, Readers.

Definition of Entrepreneurship

Entrepreneurship is entrepreneurship and the word entrepreneurship itself basically comes from the French word entreprendre which means to do. Then, this term from French developed into entrepreneur or entrepreneur. Until finally the word developed again into the word entrepreneurship.

The word entrepreneurship itself also has an entrepreneurial concept which is of course identical with the creation of various new things in order to obtain various advantages. Therefore, it is not surprising that this concept is synonymous with the activity of opening your own business.

Definition of Entrepreneurship According to KBBI and Experts

1. Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI)

Entrepreneurship or entrepreneurship is about entrepreneurship. Meanwhile, entrepreneurs or self-employed are people who are smart or talented in recognizing new products, determining new production methods, also arranging operations for procuring new products, marketing them, and managing their operating capital.

2. Eddy Soeryanto Soegoto

According to Eddy Soeryanto Soegoto, entrepreneurship is a business that is carried out by someone based on creative and innovative treatment to then produce a work that has a sale value, with the aim of providing benefits to other people and being able to create jobs.

3. Siswanto Sudomo

Siswanto Sudomo said that the notion of entrepreneurship is everything that is closely related to an entrepreneur who has an attitude of wanting to work hard and make sacrifices, dares to do everything in his power and effort, and dares to take all risks to then realize his ideas and ideas.

4. Hermawan Kartajaya

Hermawan Kartajaya then explained that the notion of entrepreneurship is an attempt to create value through observing a business opportunity, by managing risks that may arise as well as skills in communicating and mobilizing existing resources, especially human resources so that they can create something. which produce.

5. Abu Marlo

Abu Marlo in the book Entrepreneurship Hukum Langit (2013) then explains that entrepreneurship is a person’s ability to then be sensitive to opportunities and take advantage of these opportunities to then make changes from the existing system. In the world of entrepreneurship, opportunities to realize or carry out a business must still take into account the risks faced.

6. Robbin & Coulter

Robbin & Coulter himself explains that entrepreneurship is a process in which a person or a group of individuals uses organized efforts & means to then seek opportunities and create a value that grows by fulfilling needs and desires through innovation and uniqueness, regardless of any resources. currently in use.

Entrepreneurial Goals

When playing a business, when an entrepreneur then makes a plan, he must have a goal. As for some of the goals of entrepreneurship itself are as follows:

1. Supporting the Emergence of Small Businesses

An entrepreneurial activity then emerges, it must involve many people to support the running of a business. The involvement of human resources, may then be acknowledged directly or indirectly, will form new characters as business actors.

During this pandemic, many economic sectors then stopped, so that many human resources lost their source of income. Currently, what is needed is an entrepreneurial activity that side with the people’s economy. If these people’s economic activities are then fully supported, then new jobs will also be opened, and the people’s economy will also be helped.

2. Community Welfare

The sluggish economy has lifted due to the pandemic, which has also resulted in an increase in the poverty rate in a society. However, with the existence of several economic activities that run through entrepreneurship, it is then expected to be able to provide support for the national economy, so that the poverty rate can be reduced.

3. Fostering the Spirit of Innovation

The next goal of entrepreneurship is to foster a passion for innovation. That way, the business that is being undertaken can continue to grow because it is able to keep up with the times.

Entrepreneurial Benefits

Entrepreneurship is entrepreneurship, according to Zimmerer there are several benefits of entrepreneurship including:

1. Provides an opportunity to control one’s own destiny

In this case, it can be interpreted that you can then own or lead a company with freedom and opportunities for entrepreneurs to then achieve important goals for them.

2. Provide opportunities to make changes

With more and more entrepreneurs starting businesses because they see an opportunity to be able to make changes that they think are important. Entrepreneurs also have many ways to express concern for social issues and have a desire to live a better life.

3. Provide opportunities to reach their full potential

For entrepreneurs there is not much difference between work and play, both are the same. They also know that the limit to their success is all that is set by their own creativity, enthusiasm and vision.

4. Providing opportunities to gain unlimited profits

Even though money does not have the main driving force for entrepreneurs, profits from business can be said to be an important motivating factor for starting a company.

5. Providing opportunities to play a role in society and get recognition for their efforts

These business owners love the trust and recognition they then receive from customers who have served them faithfully. The important role played in a local environment and awareness actually has a considerable influence on the community environment. In fact, entrepreneurship can play a role in society and its business is more easily recognized by the public.

6. Provide opportunities to do something you like and enjoy doing it

Most entrepreneurs then succeed in choosing a particular business, because they are then interested and like the job. This can be interpreted as a hobby can also be used as a job.

Stages of Becoming Entrepreneurship

The entrepreneurship process begins with an axiom, namely the existence of a challenge, from this challenge then comes the idea, willingness and encouragement to take the initiative, which is nothing but creative thinking and innovative action so that the challenge is overcome and solved. According to Suryana (2006), the stages or steps of entrepreneurship in a person are as follows:

1. The starting stage

The stage where someone then intends to do business, should start with preparing everything needed. In addition, starting with seeing new business challenges and opportunities and continuing with the possibility and desire to open a new business. This stage also selects the type of business that will then be carried out whether in agriculture, industry, or services or other businesses.

2. The stage of carrying out the business

In this stage an entrepreneur then manages various aspects related to his business, covering several aspects, namely:

• Running a business
• Financing
• HR
• Ownership
• Organization
• Leadership which includes how to take risks and make decisions, marketing, and in evaluating.

3. The stage of maintaining the business

The stage of maintaining a business can be interpreted as the stage of an entrepreneur in conducting analysis and also being able to overcome the problems being faced, such as challenges, obstacles, and so on. In this way, the ongoing effort can be maintained.

4. Business development stage

This stage is where the entrepreneur has succeeded in going through various problems in his business. In addition, at this stage too, entrepreneurship can develop its business. As for how to develop this business, you can start by increasing relationships, updating methods and systems, updating the products produced, enlarging and expanding the business, adding quality, adding services, adding manpower.

In fact, you could say that at this stage, entrepreneurs can then make long-term economic contributions to humans, nature and the environment. The benefits of developing this business can then be obtained clearly, regarding the contribution to employment problems, namely there will be an additional workforce.

Those are the four stages to become an entrepreneur. Of the four stages are certainly very difficult to achieve. Therefore, never give up and continue to believe in doing entrepreneurship because in the future, you may become the leader of a business.

Closing

Basically entrepreneurship is an activity in building a business. In building a business, this can not be done just like that. In other words, it must take time for the business that is built to be successful. Even though it is difficult, but if it is done with full sincerity, then the business that you are doing can grow.

If your business has grown, it is possible to open a branch. Even so, the business that has been built must also be maintained properly so that it does not just collapse. Thus the discussion about the meaning of entrepreneurship to its benefits and also the stages. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for Readers.

 

Definition of Enthalpy – In learning chemistry we will get to know material about chemical thermodynamics which discusses the change of heat energy into other forms of energy. In learning this science, we will also get to know about the enthalpy formula, which is a sub-branch of learning from thermodynamics that discusses the amount of energy, volume, and heat pressure of a substance.

For this reason, Readers who want to know and learn more about the meaning of enthalpy in order to better understand the formula and its application in chemistry lessons, in this discussion we will summarize various information related to the enthalpy formula.

Furthermore, the discussion regarding the meaning of enthalpy can be seen below!

Definition of Enthalpy

Thermodynamics is a branch of physics that deals with the conversion of heat energy into other forms of energy. The first law of thermodynamics and the second law of thermodynamics are references when discussing energy changes. Measurements in thermodynamics are not expressed in microscopic terms but in macroscopic quantities.

Thermodynamics is closely related to statistical mechanics, thus inferring thermodynamic relationships. The origin of the word thermodynamics comes from two Greek words, namely thermos which means heat and dynamic which means change. The discovery of the concept of thermodynamics originated from the efforts of scientists in the 19th century AD to create machines capable of producing energy changes.

The purpose of this energy conversion was initially to facilitate work by converting energy into work with the maximum energy change. The first machine created by scientists was able to convert the energy of motion into potential energy. Its working principle is based on collision events. There were attempts by scientists who at the end of the 20th century succeeded in developing theories related to thermodynamics. The thermodynamic theory applies to states of heat or systems in equilibrium at the beginning or at the end.

After the 19th century AD, the development of thermodynamic theory shifted to quantum physics and phase transitions. Phenomenologically, the development of the thermodynamic theory is aimed at macroscopic systems. In physics, the thermodynamic formula becomes an axiom that includes the three laws of thermodynamics. The key concepts underlying the three laws of thermodynamics are energy and entropy.

Thermochemistry or chemical thermodynamics is a branch of chemistry that studies the energy that accompanies physical changes or chemical reactions. The main goal of thermochemistry is to establish criteria for determining the probability or spontaneity of the required transformation. In this way, thermochemistry is used to predict energy changes that occur in chemical reactions, phase changes, and solution formation. Most properties in thermochemistry evolved from the application of the First Law of Thermodynamics, the law of the “conservation” of energy, to functions of internal energy, enthalpy, entropy, and Gibbs free energy.

Enthalpy is a law of thermodynamics that states the sum of the internal energy, volume, and thermal pressure of a substance. The SI unit for enthalpy is the joule, but the British units for heat and calories are also used. It is not possible to measure the total enthalpy (H) directly. As in classical mechanics, only changes can be evaluated. Enthalpy is a thermodynamic potential, so to measure the enthalpy of a system we must first determine a reference point, then we can measure the change in enthalpy ΔH. . The ΔH change is positive for endothermic reactions and negative for exothermic reactions.

For a process at constant pressure, ΔH equals the change in energy within the system plus the work done by the system on the surroundings. So the enthalpy change under these conditions is the heat absorbed or released by a chemical reaction or external heat transfer.

The enthalpies of ideal gases, solids and liquids are independent of pressure. Real objects at room temperature and pressure often obey this property more or less, which simplifies enthalpy calculations.

Enthalpy Formula

Enthalpy is the amount of energy possessed by the system (U) and work (PV), so that it can be written H = U + PV. While the change in enthalpy is the heat of reaction from the reaction at constant pressure. To calculate enthalpy, it must be measured at a specific temperature and pressure.

According to chemists, a temperature of 25°C and a pressure of 1 atm is a good measure of enthalpy. The enthalpy change measured by standard measurement will be called the standard enthalpy change. The unit is the kilojoule (kJ) in the international system (SI). Writing the enthalpy for the reaction in the reaction equation is done by writing the symbol for the enthalpy change (⧋H) after the reaction equation.

It was also explained that enthalpy is the amount of energy possessed by a system which is denoted by U and work is denoted by PV so that the enthalpy change formula can be written as H = U + PV .

While the change in enthalpy is the heat of reaction from the reaction at constant pressure. To calculate enthalpy, it must be measured at a specific temperature and pressure. According to chemists, a temperature of 25°C and a pressure of 1 atm is a good measure of enthalpy.

The enthalpy change measured by standard measurement will be called the standard enthalpy change. The unit is the kilojoule (kJ) in the international system (SI). Writing the enthalpy for the reaction in the reaction equation is done by writing the symbol for the enthalpy change (⧋H) after the reaction equation. For example:

A(s) + B(aq) → C(aq) H = + x kJ

Enthalpy Types

When recording thermochemical data, the enthalpy change for a reaction under standard conditions (25∘C, 1 atm) is represented by the symbol H∘ with units of kJ/mol and depends on the type of reaction. is derived into several enthalpy formulas and as an example as follows:

1. Enthalpy of formation

The standard enthalpy of formation in which a compound represents the amount of heat required or released for the formation of 1 mol of the compound from standard state stable elements (STP).

Enthalpy of formation is the change in the amount of heat of formation per 1 mol of a compound from its elements under normal conditions. Standard normal values ​​are determined at a temperature of 298 oK and a pressure of 100 kPa. In free elements, the standard enthalpy of formation is zero. The enthalpy of formation under standard conditions is denoted Δ𝐻𝑓𝑜. The enthalpy combinations form elements or compounds that can be used to calculate the enthalpy change in a chemical reaction. The equation used to determine the enthalpy change for a reaction is: Δ𝐻𝑜(reaction) = ΣΔ𝐻𝑓𝑜(product) – ΣΔ𝐻𝑓𝑜(reactant).

The standard enthalpy change for forming 1 mole of a substance directly from its elements in their standard states (298 K, 1 atm). For example, the enthalpy of formation of standard water is −285 kJ/mol, so the thermochemical equation becomes:

H2(g)+12O2→H2O(l) ΔH=−285 kJ

The thing to note is

• Considering the shape of the element under standard conditions, choose the most stable allotrope. For example, graphite is the most stable allotrope for carbon
• In general, the enthalpy of formation of a compound is negative (exothermic), indicating that the compound is more stable than its elements.
• The enthalpy forming element in its standard form is set to zero

2. Atomization enthalpy

In this concept it is called elemental atomization, which is the enthalpy change if 1 mole of gas consists of elements in the form of matter under standard conditions. The atomization reaction will have a positive ⧋H (endothermic). Indeed, reactions require energy to separate atoms.

Atomization enthalpy is the energy required to produce 1 mole of gaseous atoms in an element. Atomization enthalpy values ​​are determined when an element is at room temperature in its normal phase. Atomized enthalpies are used to measure the formation of metallic compounds by breaking metallic bonds.

The enthalpy change for atomization of 1 mol of a substance into its elements in their standard states (298 K, 1 atm). The standard atomization enthalpy is opposite to the formation reaction, so its value is the same as the formation enthalpy but opposite in sign.

An example of a standard decomposition enthalpy can be seen from the formation reaction above, so the standard decomposition enthalpy is:

H2O(l)→H2(g)+12O2(g)ΔH=+285 kJ

3. Enthalpy of combustion

Standard enthalpy of combustion where a compound represents the amount of heat required or released for the combustion of 1 mol of a compound from its stable element under standard conditions (STP).

The enthalpy of combustion is the difference between the enthalpy of the products under certain conditions and the enthalpy of the reactants under the same conditions. Calculation of enthalpy of combustion is done for complete combustion. The amount of enthalpy change produced in a chemical reaction is called the heat of reaction. Calculation of the heat of reaction can be calculated based on the difference between the heat of formation between the products and reactants.

The enthalpy change for the complete combustion of 1 mole of a substance, measured under standard conditions.

Combustion is said to be complete if:

• Carbon (C) turns into CO2
• Hydrogen (H) burns to become H2O
• Sulfur (S) burns to SO2

Example of Enthalpy Discussion Questions

1. Problem 1

Determination of the enthalpy of combustion of charcoal in carbon dioxide and steam.

Response:

The reaction of burning coal can be written as follows.

C(s) + O2(g) → CO(g)

Not all changes that occur in enthalpy can be determined by conducting experiments. For example, in the combustion reaction, carbon (graphite) turns into carbon monoxide. The enthalpy change for reactions that burn carbon to pure CO tends to be more difficult because CO is flammable. And if we react carbon with excess oxygen, CO will immediately burn and turn into CO2. During this time, in a limited amount of oxygen, a mixture of CO and CO2 will be formed.

However, the enthalpy change that occurs during the formation of CO can be determined on the basis of the enthalpy change that occurs easily. The reaction is easier than burning carbon and turning it into carbon dioxide and burning carbon monoxide turning it into carbon dioxide.

The enthalpy value of this reaction is unknown. The enthalpy value of the coal combustion reaction can be determined using a reaction with a known enthalpy value. We know that the enthalpy of formation of CO2 = –393.5 kJ mol-1 and the enthalpy of combustion of CO = –283 kJ mol-1.

Based on the two enthalpy data, using Hess’s law, the enthalpy of burning carbon converted to carbon monoxide can be calculated as follows.

The thermochemical equation leads to the formation of carbon dioxide (CO2)

(1) C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g) = -393.5 kJ/mol

The thermochemical equation leading to the burning of carbon monoxide (CO)

(2) CO(g) + 1/2 O2(g) → CO2(g) AH = -283 kJ/mol

To get the equation for the reaction that burns carbon to carbon monoxide, reaction (2) can be reversed and can then be added to reaction (6).

Removing two substances that are equal on both sides, we get the following reaction equation:

C(s) + O2 (g) → CO(g) ∆H = -110.5kJ

Based on the sum of the two reaction stages, the enthalpy change of the results of burning carbon that is converted into carbon monoxide can be determined in a way that tends to be easier, namely by adding up the enthalpy changes of the two reaction phases. . incident. The determination of the magnitude of the enthalpy change in this way was discovered by a Russian chemist, namely GH Hesse (1840). Through a series of experiments he conducted, Hess stated that enthalpy changes depend only on the initial and final state of the reaction, and not on the course of the reaction.

Thus, if a chemical reaction takes place in several reaction steps, the enthalpy change is determined by adding the enthalpy change for each step. This Hess statement became known as Hess’s Law (or better known as the Law of Complement of Heat). Applying Hess’ law we can easily determine the enthalpy change for reactions that are hard to determine when doing experiments.

The thermochemical equation is prepared in such a way that the total yield of the reaction with the change in enthalpy is determined. Usually, several equations must be multiplied by the appropriate coefficients to obtain the required thermochemical equation.

This calculation method follows Hess’s law which states that the enthalpy of a reaction absorbed or released by a reaction does not depend on the course of the reaction. Some principles for calculating thermochemical equations according to Hess’s law that need to be considered are:

• If you need to reverse the reaction equation, change the sign ∆H. For example,

Reaction:

H2(g) + O2(g) → H2O2(l) ∆H = –187.8 kJ

Behind:

H2O2(l) → H2(g) + O2(g) ∆H = +187.8 kJ

• If in an addition reaction a substance appears on both sides of the equation in the same phase, the substance can be removed. The example is:

H2(g) + O2(g) → H2O(g) ∆H = +241.80 kJ

H2O(l) → H2(g) + O2(g) ∆H = –285.85 kJ

H2O(l) → H2O(g) ∆H = –44.05 kJ

Calculations of the ∆H of the reaction can also be made from the basic data of the standard heat of formation reaction (∆Hf°). The standard heat of formation is the heat of formation of compounds based on their elements. Consider the general equilibrium reaction equation below. aA + bB → cC + dD

∆Hreaction = (c × C + d × D) – (a × A + b × B)

= ∆H°f products – ∆H°f reactants

So, in general the reaction ∆H can be determined by the formula:

∆H reaction = H°f products – ∆H°f reactants

Information :

• ∆H°f gives: is the total standard enthalpy of formation based on the product of the substance.
• ∆H°f of reaction: is the total standard enthalpy of formation based on the reactants.

Conclusion

So a brief discussion of what is the meaning of enthalpy and an explanation of the formula. Not only knowing the meaning of enthalpy in chemistry, but also discussing the types, formulas, and examples of problems from discussing enthalpy itself.

Knowing what enthalpy is gives us new knowledge about learning chemistry which can be useful in everyday life if the application of the concept of enthalpy is used according to the rules.